domestic repair station and quality control manual s€¦ · domestic repair station and quality...

DOMESTIC REPAIR STATIONAND

QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL’SFOR

West Star Aviation, Inc. (GJT)796 Heritage Way

Grand Junction Regional AirportGrand Junction, Co 81506

Federal Aviation Administration Repair StationCertificate Number WTXR173J

&West Star Aviation, Inc. (ASE)

Additional Fixed LocationAspen-Pitkin County Airport/Sardy Field

12 West Airport RoadAspen, CO 81611

Kevin T. BostwickAccountability Manager/Quality Assurance Manager

REVISION LEVEL

Manual Copy Number

6

Date: JUN/01/2010

Repair Station Manual

Blank Page.doc

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

REPAIR STATION MANUAL14CFR §145.209

NOTE: ANY AND ALL FORMS, STAMPS OR TAGS REFERENCED IN THIS MANUAL CAN BEFOUND BY USING THE INDEX LOCATED IN APPENDIX B. WEST STAR NUMBERS THEIR

FORMS USING THE PREFIX OF, “WSF” FOR INTERNAL CONTROL


Blank Page.doc


REPAIR STATION MANUAL

Preface:Doc. No.:Effective Date:Revision No.:Page:

i06/01/10

Rev. 61 of 2

i (TOC).doc

TABLE OF CONTENTS

REPAIR STATION MANUAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

NOTE: If viewing this manual in a digital format, click on the individual line items below which are hyperlink to the document

TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................. iLIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES................................................................................... iiRECORD OF REVISIONS........................................................................................ iiiMANUAL REVISION INSTRUCTION AND CONTROL FORM................................ iv

Chapter 1: GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES

Title Page........................................................................................................ 1.000Introduction ................................................................................................. 1.010Manual Distribution, Control and Revision Processes ................................ 1.020Work Performed at a Location Other Than Fixed Location......................... 1.030Additional Fixed Location............................................................................ 1.035Work Performed After Regular Business Hours.......................................... 1.040

Chapter 2: ORGANIZATION

Title Page........................................................................................................ 2.000Organizational Chart ................................................................................... 2.010Management Responsibility........................................................................ 2.020General Manager........................................................................................ 2.030Removed .................................................................................................... 2.040Accountability Manager............................................................................... 2.050Quality Assurance Manager........................................................................ 2.060Quality Assurance Team Leader ................................................................ 2.070Quality Assurance Inspector ....................................................................... 2.080Category I Quality Control Inspector........................................................... 2.090Category II Quality Control Inspector.......................................................... 2.100Aircraft Services Manager........................................................................... 2.110Page Not Used ........................................................................................... 2.120Paint Program Manager.............................................................................. 2.130Interior Program Manager........................................................................... 2.140Accessories Program Manager................................................................... 2.150Avionics Program Manager......................................................................... 2.160Avionics Install Team Leader...................................................................... 2.170Avionics Repair Assistant Manager ............................................................ 2.180Director of Maintenance.............................................................................. 2.190Program Manager....................................................................................... 2.200Team Leader .............................................................................................. 2.210Technician .................................................................................................. 2.220Apprentice Mechanic .................................................................................. 2.230



i06/01/10

Rev. 62 of 2

i (TOC).doc

Engineer Manager ...................................................................................... 2.240Engineer ..................................................................................................... 2.250Engineer Designer ...................................................................................... 2.260NDT Team Leader ...................................................................................... 2.270Materials Control Manager.......................................................................... 2.280Purchaser ................................................................................................... 2.290Parts Manager ............................................................................................ 2.300QA Training Coordinator ............................................................................. 2.310Organization Designated Airworthiness Representative (ODAR-T)............ 2.320

Chapter 3: REPAIR STATION OPERATION REQUIREMENTS

Title Page........................................................................................................ 3.000Personal Requirements .............................................................................. 3.010Supervisory Requirements.......................................................................... 3.020Rosters ....................................................................................................... 3.030Equipment, Materials & Tooling Requirements........................................... 3.040

Chapter 4: HOUSING & FACILITIES

Title Page........................................................................................................ 4.000Housing & Facility Requirements................................................................ 4.010Housing & Facility Change of Location ....................................................... 4.020

Chapter 5: TRAINING

Title Page........................................................................................................ 5.000Training System.......................................................................................... 5.010GPS Training System ................................................................................. 5.020

Chapter 6: CONTRACT MAINTENANCE

Title Page........................................................................................................ 6.000Contract Maintenance Requirements.......................................................... 6.010Contract Vendor Qualification Requirements.............................................. 6.020

APPENDIXES

Appendix A: Contract Maintenance Function ListAppendix B: Repair Station Forms IndexAppendix C: Electronic Signatures

EASA SUPPLEMENT

CANADIAN SUPPLEMENT


PrefaceDoc. No.:Effective Date:Revision No.:Page:

ii06/01/10

Rev. 61 of 1

ii (LOEP).doc

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES – APPROVAL / ACCEPTANCE OF

Page Date Page Date Page Date Page DateDoc. No. i Doc. No. 2.070 Doc. No. 2.250 Doc. No. 5.020

1 06/01/10 1 07/01/07 1 07/01/07 1 07/01/072 06/01/10 Doc. No. 2.080 Doc. No. 2.260 2 07/01/07

Doc. No. ii 1 07/01/07 1 07/01/07 Doc. No. 6.0001 06/01/10 Doc. No. 2.090 Doc. No. 2.270 1 07/01/07Doc. No. iii 1 07/01/07 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 6.010

1 06/01/10 Doc. No. 2.100 2 07/01/08 1 06/01/10Doc. No. iv 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 2.280 2 06/01/10

1 07/01/07 Doc. No. 2.110 1 07/01/08 3 06/01/10Doc. No. 1.000 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 2.290 4 06/01/101 07/01/07 Doc. No. 2.120 1 07/01/07 Doc. No. 6.020

Doc. No. 1.010 1 Removed Doc. No. 2.300 1 06/01/101 06/01/10 Doc. No. 2.130 1 10/01/09 2 06/01/10

Doc. No. 1.020 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 2.310 Appendix A1 06/01/10 2 07/01/08 1 07/01/07 1 06/01/102 06/01/10 Doc. No. 2.140 Doc. No. 2.320 Appendix B

Doc. No. 1.030 1 07/01/08 1 10/01/09 1 07/01/081 06/01/10 2 07/01/08 Doc. No. 3.000 Appendix C2 06/01/10 Doc. No. 2.150 1 07/01/07 1 06/01/10

Doc. No. 1.035 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 3.010 2 06/01/101 07/01/08 Doc. No. 2.160 1 07/01/07 EASA SUPPLEMENT

2 07/01/08 1 07/01/08 2 07/01/07 06/01/10Doc. No. 1.040 2 07/01/08 Doc. No. 3.020 CANADIAN SUPPLEMENT

1 10/01/09 Doc. No. 2.170 1 07/01/07 07/01/07Doc. No. 2.000 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 3.0301 07/01/07 Doc. No. 2.180 1 07/01/07

Doc. No. 2.010 1 07/01/08 Doc. No. 3.0401 10/01/09 Doc. No. 2.190 1 10/01/09

Doc. No. 2.020 1 07/01/07 2 10/01/091 07/01/07 Doc. No. 2.200 Doc. No. 4.000


Doc. No. 2.040 1 07/01/08 1 07/01/071 Removed Doc. No. 2.220 Doc. No. 4.020


Doc. No. 2.060 1 10/01/09 1 07/01/071 07/01/07 Doc. No. 2.240 Doc. No. 5.0102 07/01/07 1 07/01/07 1 07/01/07

Approval: Acceptance of:

West Star Aviation________________________ FAA F.S.D.O.________ ___________Accountability Manager Principal Maintenance Inspector


Blank Page.doc


Repair Station Manual/Quality Control Manual


iii06/01/10

Rev. 61 of 1

iii (ROR).doc

RECORD OF REVISIONS

Manual No. _____________

NOTE: Electronic versions of this manual may have the manual number and revision datedisplayed on the disc or CD in lieu of the spaces provided on this page. Since electronicversions of this manual are completely reissued at each revision, the last “date inserted”and “initials” may remain blank on electronic copies of this document.

Retain this record in the manual. Upon receipt of revisions, insert revised pages in the manualand enter the revision number, revision date, insertion date, and initials of person incorporatingthe revision in the appropriate block on this page. Complete and return the Revision ControlForm to the Quality Assurance Manager or designee. All personnel are expected to suggestrevisions to the Accountability Manager or their supervisor.

Revision Number Revision Date Date Inserted Initials

Original January 31, 2004 January 31, 2004 KTB

Rev. 1 September 8, 2004 September 8, 2004 KTB

Rev. 2 February 28, 2006 February 28, 2006 KTB

Rev. 3 July 1, 2007 July 1, 2007 KTB

Rev. 4 July 1, 2008 July 1, 2008 KTB

Rev. 5 October 1, 2009 October 1, 2009 KTB

Rev. 6 June 1, 2010


Blank Page.doc




iv07/01/07

Rev. 31 of 1

iv (SAMPLE).doc

WSF 027

REPAIR STATION & QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL REVISION INSTRUCTION ANDCONTROL FORM

MANUAL TITLE BEING REVISED: WEST STAR REPAIR STATION & QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL

NUMBER BEING REVISED: _______________________

REVISION NUMBER BEING INSERTED: __________________

MANUAL REVISION INSTRUCTIONS:

Carefully review each page of this revision, until you understand the scope, nature and effect of the changes to themanual being revised. Compare each revised page for details of specific changes. Your questions regarding thisrevision may be addressed to the Quality Assurance Manager. When you understand each change, revise papercopies of the manual per the following instructions.

NOTE: Since electronic versions are reissued in their entirety, no revision action is necessary. Instructions 1 and 2below may be ignored for electronic versions.

1) Insert a page of the new revision into the manual. If there is already a page in the manual, with the identical pagenumber, remove the old page. If the page of the new revision does not have an identical, corresponding pagealready in the manual, place the new page in the correct numerical order. When the revision is complete, themanual should have no duplicated page numbers, with different revision dates or numbers. The pages that wererevised and removed may be destroyed.

2) When all pages of the revision are inserted, and all applicable pages of the previous revision are removed,complete the Record of Revisions page of the manual. Some manuals may not have a Record of Revisionspage. Typically, a Record of Revisions page will include the following information:- Revision Number- Revision Date- Date Inserted- Initials

3) SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THIS REVISION:

REVISION CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS:

When the manual has been revised according to the above instructions, read the following statement and sign anddate this form. Return this form to the Quality Assurance Manager for West Star at:

West Star796 Heritage WayGrand Junction, CO 81506Attn: Quality Assurance Manager

I have reviewed the above referenced revision and understand the contents of the revision. I have revised themanual according to the above listed instructions.If I have been issued an electronic version of a manual, I also certify that I have access to the computer and softwarenecessary to view all pages of my copy of the manual. I also certify that I understand the use of the computer andsoftware and I am able to view each page of my electronic copy of the manual without assistance.

_______________________________________ ______________NAME (Print) DATE

_______________________________________ ______________SIGNATURE INITIALS


Blank Page.doc



Chapter:Doc. No.:Effective Date:Revision No.:Page:

11.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

1.000.doc

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVEPROCEDURES


Blank Page.doc




11.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

1.010.doc

Title: REPAIR STATION MANUAL INTRODUCTION (14CFR §145.209)

1.0 Purpose: This repair station manual includes a description of the policies and proceduresthat will be used by this repair station to meet all requirements of 14 CFR Part145.

2.0 Responsibilities:

2.1 All Repair Station Key Personnel are required to be familiar with the requirements of thismanual and the applicable FAA Regulations.

2.2 The Individual Hangar libraries will have a hard copy of the manual to include, departmenthead supervisors of which all technicians will have access to including the electronic versionlocated and accessed on the company intranet. There will be additional copies maintained inthe inspection office when a West Star technician is tasked to work away from base. Thistravel copy will be checked out by the technician. This Repair Station Manual will becombined with the Quality Control Manual in one binder. These manuals will be tracked asone. A list of manual assignments by individual or location will be maintained in theInspection office.

2.3 Manual holders are responsible for maintaining their assigned manuals to current revisionstatus, and for ensuring that all personnel under their supervision have access to and arefamiliar with the contents of the manual and adhere to its provisions, to include the electronicversion located and accessed on the company intranet.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 This manual will describe the housing, facilities, equipment, personnel, and generaloperating rules pertinent to the operation of this domestic repair station, certificated bythe Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) under 14 CFR Part 145. All ratings issued tothis repair station by the FAA under Part 145 are described in its OperationsSpecifications and in this manual.

NOTE: This Repair Station elects not to use the option of a capability list asdescribed in 14CFR §145.209 (d) (1) (2) and 14CFR§145.215. All ratings will belisted in the Operation Specifications.

3.2 The information contained in this manual explains the systems used by the repair stationwhen performing routine/non-routine maintenance, preventive maintenance or alterationon civil aviation articles. When more detail is required to accomplish or record aparticular operation, those details are contained in the applicable manufacturer’sinstructions for continued airworthiness (e.g., maintenance, overhaul and repairmanuals), service bulletins, service information letters, Airworthiness Directives, and/orother data acceptable to or approved by the FAA.

3.3 The maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alteration of civil aviation articles will beperformed in accordance with the applicable Federal Aviation Regulations (FARs). Therepair station will not maintain or alter any article for which it does not hold an appropriaterating. The repair station will not maintain or alter any article for which it is rated if theappropriate housing, facilities, equipment, personnel, or technical data are not availableor not acceptable to the administrator.


Blank Page.doc




11.020

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 2

1.020.doc

Title: MANUAL DISTRIBUTION, CONTROL AND REVISION PROCESSES(14CFR §145.209 (k) & §145.211 (c)(4))

Note: The following procedures apply to both the Repair Station and Quality Control Manual

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To establish a means of manual distribution, control and to ensure revisions to theRepair Station & Quality Control Manual are distributed and inserted into all manualsin a timely manner.


2.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Manager for coordinating allrevisions to this manual with the local Flight Standards District Office.

2.2 It shall be the responsibility of all personnel to ensure all revisions are read, insertedand recorded in a timely manner for the Repair Station and Quality Control Manual,electronic or hard copy where applicable.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Each manual will have a control number and an assignment entry on the manualcover page. A master list containing the manual number, location and revisionstatus will be kept in the Inspection Office. With the assistance of West Star’scomputer department, an electronic version of the manual will be maintained andrevised on the company Intranet of which all technicians have access, (ReferenceAppendix C of this manual for additional information on the electronic format of theRepair Station & Quality Control manuals).

3.2 The Repair Station Manual shall be revised as required consistent with currentoperations. The Quality Assurance Manager will review this Repair StationManual once each year confirming the manual is still current and valid for use, oridentify needed changes. The Quality Assurance Manager will have anyrevisions he finds necessary produced in a final form and he will approve this bysigning the list of effective pages for coordination with the FAA Flight StandardsDistrict Offices (“FAA FSDO”) at Salt Lake City, Utah as described below.

3.3 To maintain a clean, professional appearing manual, each procedure within aChapter will be given a separate document number. In the top right corner of eachpage, the Chapter Number, Document Number, Effective Date, Revision Numberand number of pages for that document will be listed.

3.4 Formal revisions will be published as a complete new document rather than revisingindividual pages. (Example): If a revision is required within document # 1.020, theentire document titled under 1.020 will be replaced with the revision. A bold verticalline in the left or right margin will indicate the revised part of the document.



11.020

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 2

1.020.doc

3.5 The revised document will carry a new Effective Date and Revision Number. TheList of Effective Pages will be revised to show the latest issue dates.

3.6 The Accountability Manager will send one paper copy with an additional copy ofthe signature page, (List of Effective Pages) of each revision to the FlightStandards District Office for review. The revision package must include allrevised pages including a revised list of effective pages. Upon acceptance of theproposed revision, the FAA Flight Standards District Office will sign and date therevision acceptance statement on the List of Effective Pages. One signed copyof the signature page, (List of Effective Pages) is then returned and the otherretained to revise the Flight Standards District Office's copy of the manual.Receipt of the returned paper copy, of the signature page, from the FAA FSDOby the repair station signifies revision of the Flight Standards District Office'scopy of the manual.

3.7. Upon receipt of the FAA accepted paper revision, the Quality AssuranceManager will distribute paper copies of the revised pages to those personsassigned a paper copy of the manual, and attach a copy of West Star Aviationform WSF.027, to each copy. A sample of WSF.027 is included in the preface.Upon receipt of the paper revision, each paper manual holder is responsible forreviewing, understanding and inserting the revised pages into his/her assignedmanual and recording the revision on the manual’s Record of Revision page.

Note: West Star is authorized to implement, revise and use the RepairStation and Quality Control Manual prior to FAA acceptance.

3.8 The Quality Assurance Manager shall also create a complete new copy of therevised electronic version of the manual. This electronic version will be locatedon the company Intranet. The newly revised electronic version shall contain allrevised pages, correctly inserted. All personal using an electronic version of themanual is responsible for reviewing and understanding the changes to themanual.

3.9 Once paper copies of the manual have been revised, reviewed and understood,and electronic versions have been received, reviewed and understood, eachmanual holder shall sign and date a copy of Form WSF.027 and return it to theQuality Assurance Manager. Form WSF.027 is used to certify that the revisionhas been reviewed and is understood by the manual holder and that all revisedpages have been inserted into paper copies of the manual. Returned copies ofForm WSF.027 are kept on file in the Inspection office and serve as a means ofassuring Repair Station & Quality Control Manual Revision Status Control.

4.0 Acceptance and Approval signatures within the Repair Station, Quality Control, EASAand Canadian manuals will be kept in hard copy in the Quality Assurance department.



11.030

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 3

1.030.doc

Title: WORK PERFORMED AT A PLACE OTHER THAN THE REPAIR STATION(14CFR §145.103 (c) & §145.203)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To establish guidelines by which work can be accomplished on a customer's aircraft at a place otherthan the Repair Station.


2.1 West Star will provide maintenance service for its customers at a place away from the Repair Station.West Star Aviation may only provide service for which the Repair Station is rated. The QualityAssurance Manager, Director of Maintenance or Program Manager may authorize a work order for suchwork by the following steps:

The Billing Department will create work orders as required specifically for work away from the repairstation. They will do this by pre-loading the Preliminary squawk with the following statement in thediscrepancy:

♦ “The Quality Assurance Manager, Director of Maintenance or Program Manager hasapproved this work order for the purposes of: “Work performed at a place other thanthe Repair Station.”

The Director of Maintenance, Quality Assurance Manager or Program Manager will approve thework order by opening the Preliminary Squawk in Corridor and approving it for “Parts”, “Labor” and“Services”. This will signify the approval for the work away from station.

2.2 The Director of Maintenance will be responsible for assigning the personnel necessary to perform thework and appoint a person to be in charge of the work force.

2.3 The Quality Assurance Manager will be responsible to ensure the technician assigned work away fromstation has the appropriate knowledge and authority to return an aircraft, engine, accessory orcomponent to service, has all required forms and the work is completed as necessary.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The Director of Maintenance will ensure that the article to undergo maintenance and the work force willbe in an area safe for the work to be performed and that they will have adequate protection from theelements. The Director of Maintenance will be responsible to provide all the necessary manpower, workforms, technical data, tools, and equipment necessary for the accomplishment of the maintenance. TheDirector of Maintenance will establish a system of communications between the field force and theRepair Station.

3.1.1 If work/inspection to be performed is due to an accident, a Hidden Damage Inspectionincluding the areas next to the obvious damaged parts must be complied with in accordancewith the Quality Control Manual Chapter 3, (4.0).

3.2 The Program Manager will contact the QA Manager to ensure the technician selected for the job has theappropriate certification as indicated on the Return to Service roster.

NOTE: If they work away from station is to be accomplished after hours or on the weekends, theProgram Manager will contact the QA Manager via phone for the Return to Service approval ofthe technician.

3.3 The Team Lead will be responsible for accessing the work order and provide a hard copy to thetechnician whether utilizing (WSF.2000/2001) or the Corridor system. When utilizing the Corridor workorder system, the Team Lead will provide a hard copy of the work order to the technician. The technicianwill complete the work and inspections on the hard copy using wet signatures or initials. Uponcompletion of the work the Team Lead will transcribe the work performed off the hard copy into theCorridor system and the QA department will “Complete” the squawk(s) digitally. Ref. QCM Doc. No.3.005 para. 2.10 for disposition of WO hard copy.



11.030

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 3

1.030.doc

NOTE: If work is to be performed and full access to the Corridor system is available at the GJT facilityvia remote access, then all requirements of QCM Doc. No. 3.005 will be followed as required.

3.3 All work functions will be accomplished in accordance with West Star Repair Station & Quality ControlManual in conjunction with the manufacture recommendations or the owner/operatorsmaintenance/inspection program.

3.4 The Materials Control Manager will be responsible for assigning a stock person who will provideparts and supply support between the repair station and the field personnel. All articlesdisassembled by repair station personnel outside the repair station will be protected from theelements and properly segregated to eliminate contamination or damage. The inspector(s)assigned will inspect each component and tag accordingly. All tags normally used within the repairstation may be used for work outside the repair station.

3.5 All personnel assigned to accomplish work away from the Repair Station shall accomplish the specificfunction of work in the same manner as when performed at the Repair Station.

3.6 All (RII) Required Inspection items shall be inspected and stamped/signed off by personnel, who havebeen trained, qualified and authorized by the Operator/Air Carrier.

3.7 The following will be observed for work performed outside of the premises of the repair station.

3.7.1 All functions that are performed outside the repair station must be performed inaccordance with the inspection system procedures as governed by Quality ControlManual.

3.7.2 Properly qualified personnel must be available at the place where the function of thestation is to be performed.

3.7.3 It is permissible for the person performing the work to inspect his or her own work, whenproperly authorized and on a case-by-case basis with prior approval by the QualityAssurance Manager with the exception of an Operator/Air Carrier with RII requirements.The Operator/Air Carrier Manual must be followed.

3.7.4 All necessary tools, equipment and supplies required to accommodate the function of thestation must be available at the place where the function is to be performed, and will beunder the control of the QC Inspector assigned to the job.

3.7.5 All necessary technical data must be available at the site where work will be performed.3.7.6 A Team Leader shall be designated to be in charge of the function to be performed. His

responsibilities will include assuring compliance with all FAR requirements. The TeamLeader need not be at the site of the maintenance if the person performing themaintenance is properly certificated.

3.7.7 If any assistance is provided by any individual or company with their tooling, the toolingmust be verified that it has current calibration as required by West Star Quality ControlManual Chapter 4.

3.7.8 Technicians assigned work away from base duties, will at all times, have on their person,West Star form WSF 053A, (Repair Station Inspection Authority), card. This card willindicate approval from the QA Manager that the technician is authorized for work awayfrom base.

3.7.9 Technicians assigned work away from base duties, will at all times, have available to thema current copy of the West Star RSM/QCM.

3.7.10 If work away from station is to be accomplished on any EASA registered aircraft, the workand return to service must accomplished in accordance with the West Star EASAsupplement attached to this Repair Station Manual.

3.7.11 If work away from station is to be accomplished on any Canadian registered aircraft, thework and return to service must accomplished in accordance with the West Star Canadiansupplement attached to this Repair Station Manual.

3.8 In the event the technician that has been tasked to perform away from base functions determineshe/she must deviate from the established procedures of West Star’s fixed location, the technicianwill contact the Quality Assurance Manager or Director of Maintenance immediately for a resolution



11.030

06/01/10Rev. 63 of 3

1.030.doc

prior to commencing work.


Blank Page.doc




11.035

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

1.035.doc

Title: ADDITIONAL FIXED LOCATION

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To establish guidelines by which work can be accomplished on a customer's aircraft at an AdditionalFixed Location.


2.1 West Star will provide maintenance/Inspection service for its customers at an Additional Fixed Locationat the following address:

12 West Airport RoadAspen-Pitkin County Airport/Sardy Field

Aspen, CO 81611

2.2 West Star will only provide service for which the Repair Station is rated at any Additional Fixed Location.

2.3 The Additional Fixed Location will be under Managerial control from the Grand Junction location.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 West Star will transport equipment and/or parts whenever possible via company van or truck.

3.1.1 As needed, parts and/or equipment will be shipped via a qualified carrier such as Fed Ex,UPS, etc.

3.1.2 Once the equipment and/or parts arrive at the Additional Location, a detailed receivinginspection will be accomplished to ensure no damage was caused as a result of transportingthe equipment and/or parts.

3.2 West Star will employ qualified technicians to work at the Additional Fixed Location.

3.2.1 At the location indicated above, West Star will employ two full time qualified employee’s whowill reside in Aspen.

3.2.2 As needed, West Star will supplement these technicians from the Grand Junction facility in theevent the work scope warrants or if the technicians require sick or vacation days.

3.2.3 All personnel assigned to accomplish work at an Additional Fixed Location shall accomplishthe specific function of work in the same manner as when performed at the Grand Junctionfacility and in accordance with 14CFR §145.109 through §145.219.

3.3 All work functions will be accomplished in accordance with West Star Repair Station & Quality ControlManual in conjunction with the manufacture recommendations or the owner/operatorsmaintenance/inspection program.

3.4 The following will be observed for work performed at an Additional Fixed Location.

3.4.1 All functions that are performed at the Additional Location must be performed inaccordance with the inspection system procedures as governed by Quality ControlManual.

3.4.2 It is permissible for the person performing the work to inspect his/her own work, whenproperly authorized and on a case-by-case basis with prior approval by the QualityAssurance Manager with the exception of an Operator/Air Carrier with RII requirements.The Operator/Air Carrier Manual must be followed.



11.035

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

1.035.doc

3.4.3 All necessary tools, equipment and supplies required to accommodate the work scope atthe Additional Location must be available at the Additional Location or will be procuredfrom the Grand Junction facility.

3.4.4 All necessary technical data must be available at the Additional Location.

3.4.4.1 Technical Data will be provided via access to the Grand Junction facilitycomputer network. Technical data provided by the owner/operator may be usedonly if its revision status can be verified.

3.4.5 If any assistance is provided by any individual or company with their tooling, the toolingmust be verified that it has current calibration as required by West Star Quality ControlManual Chapter 4.

3.5 In the event the technician working at the Additional Fixed location determines he/she must deviatefrom the established procedures of West Star’s Repair Station and/or Quality Control Manual, thetechnician will contact the Quality Assurance Manager or Director of Maintenance immediately for aresolution prior to commencing work.



11.040

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

1.040.doc

Title: WORK PERFORMED AFTER REGULAR BUSINESS HOURS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To provide guidelines for West Star technicians to perform maintenance functions afterregular business hours which includes before 6:00 a.m., after 5:00 p.m., weekends andholidays.


2.1 It will be the responsibility of the maintenance technician to follow the guidelines of thissection as it relates to performing maintenance after regular business hours.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Periodically, West Star will perform maintenance functions after regular business hours.West Star will only provide service after hours for work for which the repair station israted.

3.2 The Director or Manager of the respective department is responsible for assigning thepersonnel necessary to perform that work and appoint a Team Leader. The QualityAssurance Manager or QA Inspector will be responsible to ensure the technician assigned“after hours duties” has the appropriate knowledge and authority to return an aircraft, engine,accessory or component to service and assure that all required forms and work arecompleted as necessary.

3.2.1 Technicians assigned after hour duties, will at all times, have on their person,West Star form WSF 053A, (Repair Station Inspection Authority), card. This cardwill indicate approval from the QA Manager the technician is authorized for afterhour duties.

3.3 The billing department will have work orders opened in Corridor to be used specificallyfor after hours. The work order will have, “ADMINISTRATION ACCOUNT” as thecustomer, the work order will be titled “AFTER HOURS” and initially be opened to theQUALITY CONTROL department. A Preliminary Inspection Item with squawk will be inplace along with all department Item’s you would typically see on a work order including“Quality Assurance”. The “Quality Assurance” item will have a squawk preloaded forreturn to service”. It will be the responsibility of the technician to sign off the return toservice squawk as long as he/she has return to service authority. Understand thatanyone Item that does not have a squawk loaded under it will not show up on the Invoice.If a work order copy is requested, you will print the “Work Order Detail” report found onthe LH side explorer pane. Upon use of these work orders, notify the QA department onthe next business day to ensure appropriate return to service has been documented andnotify the billing department to ensure the appropriate posting to the appropriate customerand department is completed for final invoicing. This will also trigger another work order tobe opened for the next time. The billing department will have open and ready to use, afterhours work orders. They will only be used for this purpose. This ensures that the process ofopening work orders remains consistent. The billing department will notify, via email, theafter hours work orders numbers to the appropriate team leaders as they are opened. It willbe the responsibility of the Team Leaders to notify their technicians of these work ordernumbers should they be called out after hours or during the weekend.

3.4 It is permissible for the person performing work after hours to inspect his or her own workwhen so authorized on a case-by-case basis by the Quality Assurance Manager with theexception of an Operator/Air Carrier with RII requirements. The Operator/Air CarrierManuals must be followed.


Blank Page.doc




22.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.000.doc

CHAPTER 2

ORGANIZATION


Blank Page.doc


GENERAL MANAGERMATERIALS

CONTROL MANAGER ENGINEERINGMANAGER

PARTSMANAGER

PURCHASERSENGINEER

DESIGNERSENGINEERS


ACCOUNTABLE MANGER(FAA)

Chapter 2 Doc. No. 2.010 Eff. Date 10/01/09 Rev. No. 5 Page 1 of 1

Title: West Star OrganizationalChart (14CFR 145.209(a))

ACCOUNTABLE MANAGER(EASA)

PRG. MGRHAWKER

PRG.MGRCIT.

PGR MGRTURBOPROP

LIGHT JET

PGR MGRCHALLENGER

PGR MGRLEARJET

TEAMLEADER

TEAMLEADER

TEAMLEADER

TEAMLEADER

TEAMLEADER

TECHNICIAN TECHNICIAN TECHNICIAN TECHNICIAN TECHNICIAN

APPRENT.MECH.

APPRENT.MECH.

APPRENT.MECH.

APPRENT.MECH.

APPRENT.MECH.

INTERIORPROGRAMMANAGER

PAINTPROGRAMMANAGER

ACCESSORIESPRGRAM

MANAGER

ACFTSERVICESMANAGER

TEAMLEADER

TEAMLEADER

TEAMLEADER

TECHNICIAN TECHNICIAN TECHNICIAN

NDT TEAMLEADER

SHEETMETALTECH

TECHNICIAN

AVIONICSPROGRAMMANAGER

REPAIR ASST.MGR

INSTALLTEAM LEAD

TEAMLEADER

TECHNICIAN

QA TEAMLEADER

QAINSPECTOR

QCINSPECTOR

QA TRAININGCORRDINATOR

DIRECTOR OFMAINTENANCE QUALITY

ASSURANCEMANAGER

ADDITIONALFIXED LOCATION

(ASPEN)

TEAM LEADER

TECHNICIAN

Quality Control Manual

Blank Page.doc




22.020

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.020.doc

Title: MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES/AUTHORITIES

1. Ensure that the policies, procedures, requirements and specifications established by thecompany, manufacturer and the Federal Aviation Administration are applied and enforced.

2. Plan, direct and control the overall activities under their supervision. Rely upon their managers,supervisors, leads and/or assigned personnel for assistance in administrating the dailyoperational activities of the department.

3. Perform other functions not specifically listed in job description, but required by soundadministrative practice or management directives, to include functions assigned byimmediate supervisors.

4. Remain current with the contents of West Star Repair Station Manual, Quality Manual andsubsequent revisions, applicable Federal Aviation Regulations and other company policiesand procedures as required to ensure compliance in area of responsibility.

5. Ensure that supervisory continuity and shift turnover procedures for work in progress arefollowed and observed.

6. Direct, train and supervise assigned personnel to ensure maximum motivation, efficiencyand discipline in accordance with delegated authority and company policy.

7. Maintain familiarity with qualifications and capabilities of employees within their span of control,and make work assignments based on employee qualifications and capabilities.

8. Prepare reviews and evaluations of managers, leads and/or personnel in area of theirsupervision.

9. May delegate duties to any qualified assistant. Such delegation does not relieve them of theoverall responsibility of their position.

10. Must be properly certificated when required by the Repair Station Manual.

11. Observe and promote all company safety procedures.

12. Participate in the continuous improvement of processes and procedures.


Blank Page.doc




22.030

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.030.DOC

TITLE: GENERAL MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The General Manager is accountable for the overall operation of the Repair Station, comprised ofAircraft Maintenance, Aircraft Completions, Avionics Installation and Repair, Product Support,and the Quality Assurance and Engineering of those operations.

He is accountable for the supervision and coordination of the activities of the above-named areasand their departments.

The General Manager is to follow the requirements, as stated in the EASA manual, as theAccountable Manager representing West Star Aviation, Inc.

DUTIES:

1. Providing adequately trained and qualified personnel.

2. Providing tools, equipment, materials, and facility for performance of the functions of the RepairStation.

3. Providing the technical information and regulatory library necessary to support and govern RepairStation operations.

4. Providing resources necessary for maintaining the Quality Control & Repair Station Manual for WestStar Aviation including any revisions which must be made.

5. Ensure that the repair station is meeting all European Aviation Safety Agency, (EASA) requirementsas indicated in the EASA Maintenance Implementation Procedures Guidance, (MIP-G) as revised.

The General Manager may delegate any or all of his duties, as he deems necessary; however, suchdelegation does not relieve the General Manager of the overall responsibility.


Blank Page.doc




22.040

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.040.DOC

TITLE: HANGAR OPERATIONS MANAGER

REMOVED


Blank Page.doc




22.050

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.050.DOC

TITLE: Accountability Manager

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Accountability Manager is responsible to the General Manager. This individual isdesignated by the certificated repair station and is responsible for and has the authorityover all repair station operations conducted under Part 145, including ensuring that repairstation personnel follow the regulations and serving as the primary contact with the FAA.With respect to 14CFR & EASA (European Aviation Safety Association), the GeneralManager shall ensure the repair station continues to meet the requirements for providingadequate housing, facilities, equipment, and personnel appropriate to the ratings of therepair station. In addition to the overall duties and responsibilities listed above, theAccountability Manager has the following specific duties:

DUTIES:

1. Ensure that all revisions to this manual are coordinated with the FAA.

2. Assist upper management in developing the criteria for hiring personnel for positionsresponsible for maintaining, supervising, or inspecting maintenance or alterations ofcivil aviation articles.

3. Establish the requirements for initial and recurrent training for all personnel involved inthe maintenance, preventive maintenance, and/or alteration of civil aviation articles inconcert with the VP Maintenance & Operations.

4. Is responsible to determine the appropriate action(s) to be taken when deficiencies arediscovered or reported.

5. Along with the Director of Maintenance & VP of Maintenance & Operations, approvework outside the repair station’s fixed location as delineated in this manual.

6. Ensure that proper entries are made into maintenance logs & work orders IAW 14CFRpart 43 and Operator/Air Carrier manuals.

7. Act as the liaison with all customers as it relates to Quality Assurance.

The Accountability Manager may delegate any duties and responsibilities of any personnel of the repairstation to qualified persons. However, delegation of duties does not relieve the specified position of theirresponsibilities under this manual or the 14 CFR.


Blank Page.doc




22.060

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 2

2.060.DOC

TITLE: QUALITY ASSURANCE MANAGER

Responsibilities:

The Quality Assurance Manager is responsible to the General Manager for the overalloperation of the Quality Assurance Department and along with the Accountability Managerwill have the final authority in the releasing to service of airframes, engines, propellers,appliances and the component parts thereof. In addition, the QA Manager is responsiblefor directing, planning, and laying out the details of inspection standards, methods, andprocedures used by the repair station in complying with all applicable Federal AviationRegulations, manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.

Duties:

1. Assist, supervise, and direct all personnel assigned to the Quality Department.

2. Assure that all inspections are properly performed on all completed work and that the properinspection records, reports, and forms used by the repair station are completed and executedprior to releasing the product for return to service.

3. Determine that all technical data on articles overhauled or repaired by the repair station arekept current with latest revisions. This data includes manufacturer's overhaul manuals,service bulletins, part specifications, related FAA approved data, and other technical dataused by the repair station.

4. Assure that periodic checks are made on all inspection tools and the calibration of precisionequipment used by the repair station and technicians who keep their own precisionequipment. Further assure that current records of those inspections and tests are maintained.

5. Determine that no defective, unserviceable, or unairworthy parts are installed in anycomponent or article released by the repair station.

6. Submit reports of defects or unairworthy condition in accordance with 14CFR §145.221.

7. Assure the proper execution of a maintenance release and/or FAA Form 337 when required.

8. Guide the final acceptance of all incoming material, including new parts, supplies, and theairworthiness of articles on which work has been performed outside the repair station.

9. Guide the preliminary, hidden damage, in-progress, and final inspections of all articlesmaintained by the repair station and the recording of results of such inspections.

10. Guide the proper tagging and identification of all parts and components as outlined in thismanual.

11. See that unairworthy parts are segregated and quarantined in such a way as to prevent theirreuse as serviceable parts.



22.060

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 2

2.060.DOC

12. Assure that all inspections are properly performed on all completed work before it is approvedfor return to service, and that the proper inspection and maintenance records, reports andforms required for each release are properly executed.

13. Assure that the proper inspection records, reports, and forms used by the repair station areavailable to all inspection personnel.

14. Maintain and keep current a regulatory library including federal aviation regulations, typecertificate data sheets, and FAA published airworthiness directives.

15. Compile completed work orders and inspection forms in such a manner that once filedinformation pertaining to a specific item can by readily located for review.

16. Assure that the responsible technicians properly execute complete entries on forms and workorders used by the repair station.

17. Assure that procedures used in procurement and reception of aircraft parts will guard against"bogus" and "unapproved" parts from entering the parts system and to ensure that any suchparts are detected before their use.

18. Ensure that any maintenance performed for FAR 121, 125, 129 or 135 Carriers under aContinuous Airworthiness Program per FAR 145.2 through 145.205 is accomplished inaccordance with that Carriers manual and that all required inspection items are inspected byRII inspectors, not performing the work.

19. Ensure that all regulations are followed as it relates to Contract Maintenance IAW FAR145.209 (h) & 145.217.

20. Ensure that proper entries are made into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part 43and Operator/Air Carrier manuals.

The Quality Assurance Manager may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant asnecessary; however, such delegation does not relieve the Quality Assurance Manager of the overallresponsibilities.



22.070

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.070.DOC

TITLE: QUALITY ASSURANCE TEAM LEADER

Responsibilities:

Each Quality Assurance Team Leader is responsible to the Quality Assurance Managerfor the performance of all quality assurance department functions assigned.

Duties:

1. Perform maintenance record research of assigned aircraft and ensure data is properlyprovided to Team Leaders and entered into tracking system. .

2. Coordinate projects with Quality Control members on a daily basis.

3. Enter and update data into database at completion of each aircraft.

4. Work with customers and other facilities to ensure accurate data is gathered.

5. Monitor work orders and work processes to ensure regulations and quality guidelinesare met.

6. Update and completion of FAA forms or records, including support of Engineering andTeam Leaders to ensure return to service is accomplished expediently.

7. Daily contact at assigned aircraft with Team Leader to ensure schedule and qualitystandards are met.

8. Maintain customer oriented work habits.

9. Make entries into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part 43 and Operator/AirCarrier manuals.

10. Any other job-related duties as assigned by Quality Assurance Manager.


Blank Page.doc




22.080

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.080.DOC

TITLE: QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTOR

Responsibilities:

Each Quality Assurance Inspector is responsible to the Quality Assurance Manager,through the Quality Assurance Team Leader, for the performance of all quality assurancedepartment functions assigned.

Duties:

1. Determine inspection status of aircraft in for scheduled inspection, as assigned.

2. Audit of inspection and maintenance work packages generated by the repair station duringthe performance of maintenance and repair.

3. Work with production personnel, Team Leaders, Lead Technicians and Technicians to ensureaccurate and complete documentation of work performed in company work order packages.

4. Generation of maintenance record entries for aircraft, engines, propellers, and accessoriesmaintained by the repair station in accordance with FAR Part 43 and the requirements of thisrepair station manual. Includes completion of FAA forms 337 and 8130-3 as required.

5. Assist in surveillance of the repair station facilities and procedures and report results to theQuality Assurance Manager

6. Assist the Quality Assurance Manager in the development of improved methods andprocedures for the performance of quality assurance functions.

7. Assist the Quality Assurance Manager in the maintenance of the technical publication librariesthroughout the repair station.

8. Assist the Quality Assurance Manager in the tracking and calibration of inspection and testequipment used by the repair station for the purpose of product acceptance.

9. The proper execution of Malfunction or Defect Reports, FAA Form 8010-4 when required.This report will be submitted to the FAA within 96 hours after the malfunction or defect hasbeen discovered in accordance with 14CFR§145.221.

10. Assist the Quality Assurance Manager as necessary in the receiving inspection of parts ormaterial forwarded to him by the receiving inspector.

11. Assuring proper documentation of the preliminary inspection, hidden damage inspection, andfinal inspections of all items processed as assigned.

12. Make entries into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part 43 and Operator/Air Carriermanuals.

13. Maintaining Quality Department work areas in a clean and orderly manner.

14. Assist the Quality Assurance Manager as directed.


Blank Page.doc




22.090

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.090.DOC

TITLE: QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTOR (CATEGORY I)

RESPONSIBILITIES:

Each Category I Quality Control Inspector is responsible to the Quality Assurance Manager forall inspection duties assigned. Each Inspector, within the scope of his or her experience, isresponsible and has the authority for one or more of the following:

DUTIES & AUTHORIZATIONS:

Note: Based on experience, Duties & Authorizations may be limited to a specific model aircraft,engine, propeller, appliance or component part.

1. Inspection of items critical to the safety of flight as defined by the Quality Control ManualChapter 3, Doc No. 3.030. Category 1 QC inspectors will have “Single Inspection, DoubleInspection & Function Test” sign off authority within the work order system.

2. Authority for inspection and final approval for return to service of aircraft, airframes, aircraftengines, propellers, appliances or component parts within the scope of repair stationcertification authority to include final return to service sign off in block 7 of FAA form 337 &Maintenance Release Tags.

3. Perform look-phase inspection, (Inspection Checklists), portion of the maintenance scope andwrite accurate and complete discrepancies and resolutions on company work forms asassigned.

4. Perform inspection of maintenance and discrepancy corrective action performed by repairstation personnel as assigned.

5. Proper execution of inspection and maintenance records reports and/or forms in accordancewith FAR part 43 and these repair station manual instructions.

6. Ensure that only serviceable and airworthy approved parts are installed as part of themaintenance performed by the repair station.

7. Perform preliminary, hidden damage and final inspection on aircraft and related componentsmaintained by this repair station as assigned.

8. Provide for continuity of inspection by completing required reports in the shop turnover bookfor inspections on other shifts.

9. Assure the proper tagging of all parts during the repair process to prevent improper use ofrejected and unserviceable parts.

10. Assure that precision tools and test equipment used for product acceptance are in calibrationprior to use.


12. Any other duties and responsibilities assigned by the Quality Assurance Manager.


Blank Page.doc




22.100

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.100.DOC

TITLE: QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTOR (CATEGORY II)

RESPONSIBILITIES:

Each Category II Quality Control Inspector is responsible to the Quality Assurance Manager for all inspectionduties assigned. Each Inspector, within the scope of his or her experience, is responsible and has theauthority for one or more of the following:

DUTIES & AUTHORIZATIONS:

Note: Based on experience, Duties & Authorizations may be limited to a specific model aircraft, engine,propeller, appliance or component part or portion of either.

1. Authority to inspect items NOT critical to the safety of flight as defined by the Quality Control Manual Chapter3, Doc No. 3.040. Category II QC inspectors will have “Single Inspection & Function Test” sign off authoritywithin the work order system for non-critical to the safety of flight items.

2. Authority to inspect airframes, engines, propellers, appliances or component parts within the scope of repairstation certification authority only if the work scope does not contain anything critical to the safety of flight asdefined by the Quality Control Manual Chapter 3, Doc No. 3.040.

3. Perform look-phase inspection, (Inspection Checklists), portion of the maintenance scope and write accurateand complete discrepancies and resolutions on company work forms as assigned.

4. During the course of a look-phase inspection, a QC II inspector is authorized to inspect and sign off critical tothe safety of flight items that are called out in the inspection checklist. It is only when, as a result of thatinspection, it is determined that the critical inspection item has to be repaired or altered that only a QC IInspector has the authority to inspect and sign off that repair or alteration.

5. Perform inspection of maintenance and discrepancy corrective action performed by repair station personnelas assigned.

6. Proper execution of inspection and maintenance records reports and/or forms in accordance with FAR part 43and these repair station manual instructions.

7. Ensure that only serviceable and airworthy approved parts are installed as part of the maintenance performedby the repair station.

8. Perform preliminary, hidden damage and final inspection on aircraft and related components maintained bythis repair station as assigned.

9. Provide for continuity of inspection by completing required reports in the shop turn over book for inspectionson other shifts.

10. Assure the proper tagging of all parts during the repair process to prevent improper use of rejected andunserviceable parts.

11. Assure that precision tools and test equipment used for product acceptance are in calibration prior to use.

12. Make entries into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part 43 and Operator/Air Carrier manuals.

13. Any other duties and responsibilities assigned by the Quality Assurance Manager.


Blank Page.doc




22.110

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.110.DOC

TITLE: AIRCRAFT SERVICES MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Aircraft Services Manager is responsible to the General Manager for the overall management of therepair stations back shops.

He/She is responsible to assure that the shop processes control, evaluation of the shop expenses, financesand development of the operations to meet the needs of the company to include assurances that the shopsmeet any and all requirements of the federal aviation regulations and manufacturer's recommendations.He/She may establish standards to assist in the operation of the repair station.

DUTIES:

1. Work with General Manager in project management, operations improvements, and expansion of work forceand facilities.

2. Participating in the evaluation, design, and implementation of expansion and promotion of Aircraft Maintenanceoperations.

3. Assuring that the maintenance, repair and overhaul of all articles and components is properly accomplishedwithin the authority of the repair station.

4. Work with Department Managers on production issues, including quality, facilities, equipment, and processes.

5. Establishing standards to assure that adequate safety precautions are observed.

6. Establishing procedures to determine the need for original and recurrent training for all personnel under hissupervision consistent with the work to be performed.

7. Work with QA department and sales personnel to ensure positive communication and resolve road blocks toproduction quality and customer satisfaction.

8. Continue to expand the capabilities of the company under the leadership of the Hangar Operations Manager.

9. Any other job-related duties as assigned by the Hangar Operations Manager.

10. Maintenance and repair of shop facility, equipment and tooling to support operations.

The Aircraft Services Manager may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant as necessary; however,such delegation does not relieve he/she of the overall responsibilities.


Blank Page.doc




22.120

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.120.DOC

PAGE NOT USED


Blank Page.doc




22.130

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

2.130.DOC

TITLE: PAINT PROGRAM MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Paint Manager is responsible to the General Manager for the overall operation of theAircraft Paint Department.

DUTIES:

1. Scheduling incoming work for the Aircraft Paint Department.

2. Assisting, supervising, and directing all Aircraft Paint Department personnel in theperformance of their duties so that work is accomplished on schedule and in accordancewith applicable Federal Aviation Regulations and Repair Station Procedures.

3. Assure that Aircraft Paint Department personnel record the work performed on workorders and supplementary forms on a daily basis

4. Training Aircraft Paint Department personnel in the proper work practices and procedures,including observation of safety precautions during the performance of their duties.

5. Assure that Aircraft Paint Department personnel are properly trained and practice properhandling of parts during the accomplishment of maintenance in order to maintainadequate preservation of parts during the paint process.

6. Assisting the Quality Assurance Manager in the maintenance of periodic calibration ofprecision tools and test equipment used by the Aircraft Paint Department.

7. Maintaining the premises of the Aircraft Paint Department in a clean orderly manner.

8. Making available to the personnel under his authority, the required technical data on allaircraft and equipment for the maintenance accomplished.

9. Assuring the appropriate maintenance entries on maintenance forms and work ordersused by the repair station are properly executed on a daily basis by the responsibletechnicians.

10. The quality of work performed by the personnel in the department.

11. Assuring that each Aircraft Paint Department employee has received training in thehazard communication standard, and the handling of chemical waste if appropriate to theemployee’s job function.

12. Maintaining adequate shop supplies required for the performance of the Aircraft PaintDepartment.

13. Initiating purchase orders for stock as required.



22.130

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

2.130.DOC

14. Maintaining the preservation of all units or parts during the work process, installation, andstorage in the Paint Department.

15. The planning, direction, and coordination of activities within the paint department, and theplanning of its activities in conjunction with other departments, as required.

16. Ensure that proper entries are made into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part43 and Operator/Air Carrier manuals.

17. Conducting periodic drills for acquainting Paint Department personnel with the proper useand locations of fire fighting equipment located within or near the Paint Department workareas. Checking the equipment periodically for serviceability and adequacy.

18. Such other special projects within his or her area of expertise, such as preparations ofbids for aircraft paint jobs.

The Paint Program Manager may delegate all duties to any qualified assistant as necessary;however, such delegation does not relieve he/she the overall responsibilities.



22.140

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

2.140.DOC

TITLE: INTERIOR PROGRAM MANGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Interior Program Manager is responsible to the General Manager for the overalloperation of the Aircraft Interior Department.

DUTIES:

1. Scheduling incoming work for the Aircraft Interior Department.

2. Assisting, supervising, and directing all Aircraft Interior Department personnel in theperformance of their duties so that work is accomplished on schedule and in accordancewith applicable Federal Aviation Regulations and Repair Station Procedures.

3. Assure that Aircraft Interior Department personnel record the work performed on workorders and supplementary forms on a daily basis

4. Training Aircraft Interior Department personnel in the proper work practices andprocedures, including observation of safety precautions during the performance of theirduties.

5. Assure that Aircraft Interior Department personnel are properly trained and practice properhandling of parts during the accomplishment of maintenance in order to maintainadequate preservation of parts during the Interior process.

6. Assisting the Quality Assurance Manager in the maintenance of periodic calibration ofprecision tools and test equipment used by the Aircraft Interior Department.

7. Maintaining the premises of the Aircraft Interior Department in a clean orderly manner.

8. Making available to the personnel under his authority, the required technical data on allaircraft and equipment for the maintenance accomplished.

9. Assuring the appropriate maintenance entries on maintenance forms and work ordersused by the Interior Department are properly executed on a daily basis by the responsibletechnicians.


11. Assuring that each Aircraft Interior Department employee has received training in thehazard communication standard, and the handling of chemical waste if appropriate to theemployee’s job function.

12. Maintaining adequate shop supplies required for the performance of the Aircraft InteriorDepartment.




22.140

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

2.140.DOC

14. Maintaining the preservation of all units or parts during the work process, installation, andstorage in the Interior Department.

15. The planning, direction, and coordination of activities within the Interior Department, andthe planning of its activities in conjunction with other departments, as required.


17. Conducting periodic drills for acquainting Interior Department personnel with the properuse and locations of fire fighting equipment located within or near the Interior departmentwork areas. Checking the equipment periodically for serviceability and adequacy.

18. Such other special projects within his or her area of expertise, such as preparations ofbids for aircraft interior jobs.

The Interior Program Manager may delegate all duties to any qualified assistant as necessary;however, such delegation does not relieve he/she of the overall responsibilities.



22.150

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.150.DOC

TITLE: ACCESSORIES PROGRAM MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Accessories Manager is responsible to the General Manager for the overall operation of theAccessories Department.

DUTIES:

1. Scheduling incoming work for the Accessory Department.

2. Training and assisting subordinates in the proper work procedures and practices to be followed.

3. Making available to the personnel under his authority, the required technical data on all aircraft andequipment for the maintenance accomplished.

4. Assuring the appropriate maintenance entries on maintenance forms and work orders used by therepair station are properly executed on a daily basis by the responsible technicians.


6. The proper handling of all parts while in repair process through the accessory department andwhen work is completed.

7. Maintaining adequate shop supplies required for the performance of the Accessory Department.

8. The preservation of all units or parts during process through the accessory department and whenwork is completed.

9. To insure the accessory department premises are kept in a clean and orderly manner.


11. Ensure that proper entries are made into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part 43 andOperator/Air Carrier manuals.

12. Maintaining the preservation of all units or parts during the work process, installation, and storagein the accessory department.

13. The planning, direction, and coordination of activities within the accessory department, and theplanning of its activities in conjunction with other departments, as required.

14. Conducting periodic drills for acquainting Accessory personnel with the proper use and locations offire fighting equipment located within or near the accessory work areas. Checking the equipmentperiodically for serviceability and adequacy.

The Accessories Program Manager may delegate all duties to any qualified assistant as necessary;however, such delegation does not relieve he/she of the overall responsibilities.


Blank Page.doc




22.160

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

2.160.DOC

TITLE: AVIONICS PROGRAM MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Avionics Program Manager is directly responsible to the General Manager for theperformance of the Avionics Install and Repair Departments.

This position requires the knowledge of aircraft avionics installation and repair. The jobincludes management of the shop process, control and evaluation of the shop expensesand finances, and development of the operations to meet the needs of the company.Supervision of Team Leaders will be key to the work process. Work order processing, logbook and maintenance release entries and pricing to the sales and customers are routineduties. Job duties will vary each day and will encompass projects as designated by theGeneral Manager. Will be required to work independently and lead designated customerand company projects. Will have direct customer contact.

DUTIES:

1. Coordination of Avionics Install and Repair department schedules prior to and during theperformance of all completions operations.

2. Assisting Repair and Install department in supervising, and directing all departmentpersonnel in the performance of their duties so that work is accomplished on scheduleand in accordance with applicable Federal Aviation Regulations and repair stationprocedures.

3. Assisting Avionics departments to assure personnel record the maintenance performed onmaintenance forms and work orders on a daily basis.

4. Assisting in training Repair and Install department personnel in the proper work practicesand procedures, including observation of safety precautions during the performance oftheir duties.

5. Assure that Repair and Install department personnel are properly trained and practiceproper handling of parts during the accomplishment of maintenance in order to maintainadequate preservation of parts during the maintenance process

6. Assisting the Quality Assurance Manager in the maintenance and periodic calibration ofprecision tools and test equipment used by the department.

7. Participating in the evaluation, design, and implementation of expansion and promotion ofthe Repair and Install department operations.

8. Assisting with special projects within his area of expertise, such as preparation of bids forpaint and interior projects.




22.160

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

2.160.DOC

10. To insure that the facilities occupied by Repair and Install department personnel are keptin a clean and orderly manner.

The Avionics Program Manager may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant asnecessary; however, such delegation does not relieve he/she of the overall responsibilities.



22.170

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.170.DOC

TITLE: AVIONICS INSTALL TEAM LEADER

Responsibilities:

The Avionics Install Team Leader is directly responsible to the Avionics Program Manager for theoverall operation of the Avionics Install Department.

Duties:

1. Scheduling incoming work for the Avionics Install Department.

2. Training and assisting subordinates in the proper work procedures and practices to be followed.

3. Making available to the personnel under his authority, the required technical data on all aircraft andequipment for the maintenance accomplished.

4. Assuring the appropriate maintenance entries on maintenance forms and work orders used by therepair station are properly executed on a daily basis by the responsible technicians.


6. The proper handling of all parts while in repair process through the avionics department and whenwork is completed.

7. Maintaining adequate shop supplies required for the performance of the Avionics InstallDepartment.

8. The preservation of all units or parts during process through the avionics department and whenwork is completed.

9. To insure the avionics install department premises are kept in a clean and orderly manner.


11. Maintaining the preservation of all units or parts during the work process, installation, and storage.

12. Ensure that proper entries are made into maintenance logs & work orders IAW FAR part 43 andOperator/Air Carrier manuals.

13. The planning, direction and coordination of activities within the department, and the planning of itsactivities in conjunction with other departments, as required.

14. Conducting periodic drills for the purpose of acquainting Avionics personnel with the proper useand locations of fire fighting equipment located within or near the avionics work areas. Checkingthe equipment periodically for serviceability and adequacy.

The Avionics Install Team Leader may delegate all duties to any qualified assistant as necessary;however, such delegation does not relieve the he/she of the overall responsibilities.


Blank Page.doc




22.180

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.180.DOC

TITLE: AVIONICS REPAIR ASSISTANT MANAGER

Responsibilities:

The Avionics Repair Assistant Manager is responsible to the Avionics Program Managerfor maintenance and repair of shop facility, equipment and tooling to support operationsand overall operation of the Avionics Repair department.

Duties

1. Work with Team Leaders to ensure project flow and work process meet expectations.Schedule and work quality is essential in these functions.

2. Work with customer in project management, pricing and customer support roles.

3. Track, process and complete work order for each job assigned.

4. Supervise Team Leaders in daily functions, such as work order processing, FAApaperwork, and shop processes.

5. Work with inspection department and sales personnel to ensure efficient and accurate jobsales and process.

6. Continue to expand the capabilities of the avionics repair department to meet the needs ofthe company, with training as a key element.


8. Any other job-related duties as assigned by supervisor or management.


Blank Page.doc




22.190

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.190.DOC

TITLE: DIRECTOR OF MAINTENANCE

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Director of Maintenance is directly responsible to the General Manager for theperformance of aircraft inspection programs, repairs, overhauls, alterations, maintenance,and preventative maintenance by repair station personnel.

DUTIES:

1. Coordination of aircraft schedules and shop schedules prior to and during theperformance of all repair station functions.

2. Assisting, supervising, and directing all aircraft maintenance personnel in the performanceof their duties so that work is accomplished on schedule and in accordance withapplicable Federal Aviation Regulations and repair station procedures.

3. Assure that aircraft maintenance personnel record the maintenance performed onmaintenance forms and work orders on a daily basis.

4. Training maintenance personnel in the proper work practices and procedures, includingobservation of safety precautions during the performance of their duties.

5. Assure that maintenance personnel are properly trained and practice proper handling ofparts during the accomplishment of maintenance in order to maintain adequatepreservation of parts during the maintenance process

6. Assisting the Quality Assurance Manager in the maintenance and periodic calibration ofprecision tools and test equipment used by the repair station.

7. Participating in the evaluation, design, and implementation of expansion and promotion ofaircraft maintenance operations.

8. Assisting with special projects within his area of expertise, such as preparation of bids formajor airframe repairs and alterations.


10. To insure that the facilities occupied by maintenance personnel are kept in a clean andorderly manner.

The Director of Maintenance may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant asnecessary; however, such delegation does not relieve the Director of Maintenance of theoverall responsibilities.


Blank Page.doc




22.200

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

2.200.DOC

TITLE: PROGRAM MANAGER

Responsibilities:

The Program Manager is directly responsible to the General Manager or Director of Maintenance,depending on the program, for the development, supervision and performance of the specific programassigned.

Duties:

1. Manage the West Star Aviation, Inc. Program as assigned

2. Direct the work and flow of multiple projects.

3. Insure debriefs and post briefings on aircraft are performed with the customer.

4. Supervision of Team Leaders and Teams in daily operations and duties.

5. Must perform all work in accordance with Federal Aviation Administration guidelines.

6. Follow all company and safety rules during performance of duties.

7. Maintain a positive customer service environment.

8. Assistance in completion of work orders, FAA paperwork and billing items.

9. Any other duties as assigned by the Director of Maintenance or General Manager as required.

NOTE: Some Program Managers, i.e. those of Accessory, Paint and Interior Departments, depending ontheir maintenance experience level, do not supervise maintenance activities, but serve merely asDepartment Administrators.


Blank Page.doc




22.210

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.210.DOC

TITLE: TEAM LEADER

Responsibilities:

The Team Leader is directly responsible to the respective Program Manager for the performance of theAircraft Maintenance, Inspection, Repair or Alteration.

Duties:

1. Perform mechanical items on aircraft and related systems. This shall include, but not be limited toitems such as removal and installation of panels and components, repair work and sheetmetal repairor installation.

2. Troubleshooting and evaluation of systems on the aircraft when designated.

3. Inspection and evaluation of the aircraft and components when designated.

4. Performance of ground runs.

5. Maintenance and repair of shop facility, equipment and tooling to support operations.

6. Work independently on projects and lead multiple projects as assigned. Schedule and work quality isessential in these functions.

7. Work with Program Manager in project management, pricing and customer support roles.

8. Supervise team members in daily work and project management for completion of projects.




Blank Page.doc




22.220

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.220.DOC

TITLE: TECHNICIAN

Responsibilities:

The Technician is directly responsible to the Team Leader of the respective department for theperformance of the Aircraft Maintenance.

Duties:

1. Perform general mechanical items on aircraft and related systems. This shall include, but not belimited to items such as removal and installation of panels and components, repair work andsheetmetal repair or installation.



4. Performance of ground runs.

5. Maintenance and repair of shop facility, equipment and tooling when required.




Blank Page.doc




22.230

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

2.230.DOC

TITLE: APPRENTICE MECHANIC

Responsibilities:

The Apprentice Mechanic is directly responsible to the Team Leader through the technician of therespective department for the performance of the Aircraft Maintenance, Inspection, Repair or Alteration.

Duties:

1. Perform general mechanical functions on aircraft and related systems. This shall include, but not belimited to items such as removal and installation of panels and components, repair work and sheetmetal repair or installation.



4. Aircraft movement, assistance in performance runs and taxiing when required.

5. Maintenance and repair of shop facility, equipment and tooling when required.



8. The Apprentice Mechanic will be supervised by a qualified technician for the job being performed.


Blank Page.doc




22.240

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.240.DOC

TITLE: ENGINEER MANAGER

Responsibilities:

The Engineer Manager is responsible to the General Manager.

Duties:

1. Provide technical and engineering assistance to Team Leaders and technicians indepartments during work on aircraft and related systems. Maintaining schedule and workquality is essential in these functions.

2. Create and submit to the FAA, engineering documents, drawings and illustrations.

3. Research documents for required data and support information.

4. Work with Team Leaders in customer support and technical roles, both on site and byphone.

5. Apply for FAA approval of West Star Aviation documents, as appropriate and under theappropriate Flight Standards District Office or Aircraft Certification Office.

6. Daily interaction at the aircraft with Team Leaders to assure completion of projects.

7. Assist with the FAA certification aspects of the Engineering department.



Blank Page.doc




22.250

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.250.DOC

TITLE: ENGINEER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Engineer is directly responsible to the Engineering Manager for the performance ofthe Engineering department.

The responsibility of this position must have extensive knowledge of aircraft regulationsand systems, preparation of FAA certification documents and engineering drawings tosupport company projects. Responsibilities will vary each day and will encompassprojects as designated by the Engineering Manager. Will be required to workindependently and to be involved in multiple projects at the same time. Unfailing integrityis a must. Will have some direct customer contact. Assisting Team Leaders andtechnicians in support of program and customer contact are critical.

DUTIES:

1. Technical and engineering assistance to Team Leaders and technicians.

2. Maintaining customer schedules and work quality.

3. Perform engineering analysis of data in support of Field Approvals and STC projects.

4. Creating and submitting engineering drawings and illustrations on CAD software.

5. Creating and submitting engineering documents using word processing software.

6. Participating in the evaluation, design, and implementation of expansion and promotion of theEngineering department operations.

7. Assisting with special projects within his area of expertise, such as preparation of bids.

8. Work independently of projects as assigned.

9. To help insure that the facilities occupied by the engineering department personnel are kept ina clean and orderly manner.

10. Assist with FAA certification aspects of Engineering Department functions.


Blank Page.doc




22.260

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.260.DOC

TITLE: ENGINEER DESIGNER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Engineer Designer is directly responsible to the Engineering Manager for theperformance of the Engineering department.

This position requires a basic knowledge of aircraft regulations and systems, preparationof FAA certification documents and engineering drawings to support company projects.Responsibilities will vary each day and will encompass projects as designated by theEngineering Manager. Will be required to work independently and to be involved inmultiple projects at the same time. Unfailing integrity is a must. Will have some directcustomer contact. Assisting Team Leaders and technicians in support of program andcustomer contact are critical.

DUTIES:

1. Technical and engineering assistance to Team Leaders and technicians.

2. Maintaining customer schedules and work quality.

3. Perform engineering analysis of data in support of Field Approvals and STC projects.

4. Creating and submitting engineering drawings and illustrations on CAD software.

5. Creating and submitting engineering documents using word processing software.

6. Participating in the evaluation, design, and implementation of expansion and promotion of theEngineering department operations.

7. Assisting with special projects within his area of expertise, such as preparation of bids.

8. Work independently of projects as assigned.

9. To help insure that the facilities occupied by the engineering department personnel are kept ina clean and orderly manner.

10. Assist with FAA certification aspects of Engineering Department functions.


Blank Page.doc




22.270

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

2.270.DOC

TITLE: NDT TEAM LEADER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The NDT Team Leader is directly responsible to the Aircraft Services Manager for theperformance of the NDT department.

Responsibilities for this position are the management of a team in the NDT Department.To include customer contact and the responsibility to supervise and direct project flow. Inaddition to human resource skills, this position requires extensive knowledge of all NDTmethods used by the company. This position also supervises the inspection of aircraft orrelated parts. This position also includes acting as the Radiation Safety Officer for thecompany. Assistance with work order processing, squawk approval and pricing to thecustomers are routine duties. Responsibilities will vary each day and will encompassprojects as coordinated with the Aircraft Services Manager. Will be required to workindependently and lead multiple projects. Will have direct customer contact.

DUTIES:

1. Coordination of NDT department schedules prior to and during the performance of allcompletions operations.

2. Directing all department personnel in the performance of their duties so that work isaccomplished on schedule and in accordance with applicable Federal AviationRegulations and repair station procedures.

3. Assisting managers to assure that NDT department personnel record the maintenanceperformed on maintenance forms and work orders on a daily basis.

4. Assisting managers in training NDT department personnel in the proper work practicesand procedures, including observation of safety precautions during the performance oftheir duties.

5. Assure that NDT department personnel are properly trained and practice proper handlingof parts during the accomplishment of maintenance in order to maintain adequatepreservation of parts during the maintenance process

6. Assisting the Quality Assurance Manager in the maintenance and periodic calibration ofprecision tools and test equipment used by the department.

7. Participating in the evaluation, design, and implementation of expansion and promotion ofthe NDT department operations.

8. Assisting with special projects within his area of expertise, such as preparation of bids forpaint and interior projects.




22.270

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

2.270.DOC

10. To insure that the facilities occupied by the NDT department personnel are kept in a cleanand orderly manner.

The NDT Team Leader may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant asnecessary; however, such delegation does not relieve him/her of the overall responsibilities.



22.280

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

2.280.DOC

TITLE: MATERIALS CONTROL MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Materials Control Manager is directly responsible to the General Manager fordirecting, planning, and supervising the overall operation of the Parts department of WestStar Aviation, Inc.

DUTIES:

1. Develop, implement, and revise as required, procedures specifically aimed at ensuringthat no unapproved parts go undetected.

2. Provide adequate training of all product support personnel for the purpose of identificationand segregation of unapproved parts.

3. Planning, directing and training subordinates on policy and procedures of inventorymanagement and control, including core and warranty procedure.

4. Planning, directing and supervising customer service and inventory control anddisbursement to achieve overall goals and conformance with company policies andprocedures.

5. Establishing and coordinating the interaction between the Parts department, otherdepartments and vendors.

6. Preparing summary reports as to progress, purchase commitments, department budgetforecasts and miscellaneous recommendations.

7. Implementation of internal programs; e.g., communications, training, work simplification,cost reduction, etc. for the Parts department.

8. Maintaining conformity with work rules, regulations, and safety procedures.

9. Setting and measuring performance for operations, staffing and scheduling.

The Materials Control Manager may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant asnecessary; however, such delegation does not relieve he/she of the overall responsibilities.


Blank Page.doc




22.290

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.290.DOC

TITLE: PURCHASER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Purchaser is directly responsible to the VP of Administration performance within thePurchasing department.

Responsibilities of this position require a basic knowledge of purchasing and inventory controlwith an ability to adapt with changing priorities. Responsibilities remain consistent but canchange as assigned by the VP of Administration. Responsibilities include but not limited toentering and receipt of purchase orders placed, search OEM’s and independent part sources forcertified and traceable product.

DUTIES:

1. Place orders for the request of parts.

2. Coordinate with shipping on outside work requests.

3. Work with vendors to maintain traceability of parts

4. Work within the repair station manual guidelines to maintain certified and traceable parts.

5. Coordinate part status with requesting department or technician.

6. Process and maintain all records pertaining to each requisition.

7. Research and maintain stock requirements.



Blank Page.doc




22.300

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

2.300.DOC

TITLE: PARTS MANAGER

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The Parts Manager is directly responsible to the Materials Control Manager for directing,planning, and supervising the overall operation of the Parts department of West StarAviation, Inc.

DUTIES:

1. Manager Parts Inventory operations.2. Work with all Managers as required to most effectively deploy material assets.3. Work with appropriate department personnel to ensure efficient and accurate job sales

and work processes.4. Ensure quality and efficiency of all personnel and projects worked.5. Maintain oversight the procedures specifically aimed at ensuring that no unapproved parts

go undetected.

6. Assist Materials Control Manager in adequate training of all product support personnel forthe purpose of identification and segregation of unapproved parts.

7. Planning, directing and training subordinates on policy and procedures of inventorymanagement and control, including core and warranty procedure.

8. Planning, directing and supervising customer service and inventory control anddisbursement to achieve overall goals and conformance with company policies andprocedures.

9. Establishing and coordinating the interaction between the Parts department, otherdepartments and vendors.

10. Preparing summary reports as to progress, purchase commitments, department budgetforecasts and miscellaneous recommendations.

11. Implementation of internal programs; e.g., communications, training, work simplification,cost reduction, etc. for the Parts department.

12. Maintaining conformity with work rules, regulations, and safety procedures.

13. Setting and measuring performance for operations, staffing and scheduling.

The Parts Manager may delegate all duties assigned to any qualified assistant as necessary;however, such delegation does not relieve he/she of the overall responsibilities.


Blank Page.doc




22.310

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.310.DOC

TITLE: QA/TRAINING COORDINATOR

RESPONSIBILITIES:

The QA/Training Coordinator is directly responsible to the QA Manager for the performancewithin the QA department.

Responsibilities include assisting the Quality Assurance Manager in Coordinating the day to dayoperation of the QA department to include assuring West Star meets the requirements of the FAAtraining mandate. Daily functions will include data entry into the Vendor, Roster, Employeeemployment summary, training and calibration databases. Communicating to the FAA monthlyas to changes in employee’s, forms and roster changes. Assist in the oversight of the companytechnical publications library.

DUTIES:

1. Maintain employee’s training database, to include structuring it to meet the company and FAArequirements.

2. Coordinate with department managers to schedule required training and enter that trainingonce completed for all employees.

3. Assist training instructors in setting up training classes to be performed.

4. Maintain all training files as required.

5. Maintain calibration records and data base, including notifying department managers of itemsdue for calibration within their department.

6. Maintain past employment files for all employees.

7. Complete Vendor audit requests; maintain vendor audit records/data bases. Coordinate withparts and accounting to keep vendor approval codes current.

8. Coordinate with the FAA Flight Standards District Office for submittal of all information asrequired.

9. Create and revise repair station forms, maintain forms database, provide data base updatesto the I.T. department for maintenance of the Intranet.

10. Track department expenditures.

11. Assist in the oversight of the publication library coordinating with the Technical PublicationsCoordinator.

12. Assist the Quality Assurance manager as directed.


Blank Page.doc




22.320

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

2.320.DOC

TITLE: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGNATED AIRWORTHINESS REPRESENTATIVE (ODAR-T) ADMINISTRATOR &REPRESENTATIVE

Effective November 14, 2009 West Star Aviation will no longer maintain or be authorized to holdits Organizational Designated Airworthiness Representative (ODAR-T) per the requirements of

14CFR Part 183 Subpart D.


Blank Page.doc




33.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

3.000.doc

CHAPTER 3

REPAIR STATIONOPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS


Blank Page.doc




33.010

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 2

3.010.doc

Title: PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS (14CFR §145.151)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define the minimum personnel requirements for conducting day to dayoperations at the West Star Aviation Repair Station.


2.1 Quality and Production management personnel shall ensure that the RepairStation maintains the levels and qualifications of personnel to perform the workfor which the Repair Station is rated.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The Repair Station shall provide adequate personnel to perform, supervise, andinspect the work for which Repair Station is rated.

3.1.1 The total number and qualifications of personnel may vary based onworkload. However, the Repair Station shall maintain sufficient levelsand qualifications of personnel to keep up with volume of work in processand produce airworthy results.

3.2 Whenever possible, when the Repair Station employs apprentices/trainees,these personnel shall be integrated into groups of experienced workers.

3.2.1 If an entire work group or crew consists of apprentices/trainees, no morethan ten such personnel shall be assigned to the work group or crew, andeach work group or crew shall be assigned it’s own Supervisor.

3.3 Each person who is directly in charge of maintenance at the Repair Station, orwho performs inspections for the Repair Station, shall be appropriatelycertificated in accordance with FAR Part 65 as a mechanic or repairman.

3.4 The Repair Station shall employ a sufficient number of people with detailedknowledge of the maintenance functions and techniques that they perform andfor which the Repair Station is rated.

3.4.1 An employee is considered to have detailed knowledge if he satisfies oneor more of the following criteria:

a. Twelve months documented experience with the procedure,method, function, or airframe which the employee is working on.

b. Satisfactory completion of written and/or practical examination forthe procedure, method, function or airframe which the employee isworking on.

c. Interview and acceptance of qualifications by the Repair StationQuality Assurance Manager or designee.



33.010

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 2

3.010.doc

d. Acceptance of qualifications by the Administrator.e. Any other criteria mutually acceptable to the Repair Station and

Administrator.

Note: West Stars training program will be used to determineemployee qualifications and knowledge.

3.5 Personnel Authorized to Approve an Article for Return to Service 14CFR §145.157

3.5.1 Personal with this authorization must be certificated under Part 65.

3.5.2 Personnel Authorized to approve an article for return to service will berecommended by their supervisor and approved by the Quality AssuranceManager. Personnel will not be approved to return an article to serviceunless indicated on the Inspector Authorization Card (WSF053A). For thoseindividuals authorized to approve an article for return to service, this will beindicated within West Star’s Inspector roster, (WSF009)

3.6 Termination of Employment

3.6.1 Upon termination of employment, it is the responsibility of the employeeto surrender his or her Inspection Authorization card (WSF053A) and FAAissued “Repairman Certificate” to the Quality Assurance Manager. The“Repairman Certificate” must be returned so it can be forwarded back tothe FAA.



33.020

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

3.020.doc

Title: SUPERVISORY REQUIREMENTS (14CFR §145.153)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define the supervisory requirements for conducting day to day operations atthe West Star Aviation Repair Station.


2.1 Quality and Production management must ensure a sufficient number ofsupervisors to direct the work performed under the repair station certificate andoperations specifications.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The supervisors must oversee the work performed by any individuals who areunfamiliar with the methods, techniques, practices, aids, equipment and toolsused to perform maintenance, preventative maintenance or alterations.

3.2 Each Supervisor must be certificated under part 65.

3.3 Each Supervisor must have a minimum of 18 months of practical experience inthe work being performed.

3.4 Each Supervisor will be trained in or be thoroughly familiar with the methods,techniques, practices, aids, equipment and tools used to perform themaintenance, preventative maintenance or alterations.


Blank Page.doc




33.030

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

3.030.doc

Title: ROSTERS (14CFR §145.161 & §145.209 (b))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define procedures to maintain and revise the Managerial/Supervisory, and Inspectionrosters as well as employee summaries.


2.1 It will be the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Manger to maintain and revise therepair station rosters.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 This repair station shall keep a Personnel Roster for Managerial/Supervisory andInspection personnel acceptable to the administrator. It will include the following:

Name Authorizations, if any FAA Certification FAA Certificate Number

3.2 An Inspector Roster (WSF009) shall be maintained for all personnel performing inspectionfunctions. The roster shall include the name, license number, and level of inspectionauthority for each inspector.

3.3 A Supervisory Roster (WSF007) shall be maintained for all supervisory and managementpersonnel. The roster shall list the employee name, license number and title.

3.4 The Inspection office will maintain an Employment Summary (WSF052) form of each personlisted on the WSF009 and WSF007 Roster. This summary must contain enough informationon each person to meet the requirements of FAR 145.161 (a)(4). The employmentsummaries will be listed according to classification, type of certificates held and certificatenumbers (as applicable), job titles (where required).

The Repair Station shall not use any person to supervise maintenance or alterations or inspect workunless they have an Employment Summary on file and are listed on the appropriate Roster.

4.0 Revision Procedures

4.1 The Inspection Roster (WSF009), Supervisory Roster (WSF007) and EmploymentSummaries (WSF052) shall be updated to reflect employee termination’s, additions anddeletions of personnel, and changes to existing employees duties and responsibilities asrequired by FAR 145.161 (b).

4.2 Upon completion of any revision to any of the above stated rosters, the Quality AssuranceManager or designee will forward the revision to the FSDO with in 5 days.


Blank Page.doc




33.040

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 2

3.040.doc

Title: EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS & TOOLING REQUIREMENTS (14CFR §145.109 (a)(b)(c) &§145.209(c))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define the minimum equipment, materials & tooling requirements for conductingday to day operations at the West Star Repair Station.


2.1 The General Manager and the Quality Assurance Manager shall ensure that theRepair Station maintains the minimum equipment, materials & tooling required toperform the work for which the Repair Station is rated and/or routinely performs.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The Repair Station shall possess and maintain in good working order all equipment,material & tooling required by FAR Part 145.109, for each rating it holds and/or foreach aircraft it routinely performs maintenance and/or alterations on.

3.1.1 All inspection and test equipment included in paragraph 3.1 shall bemaintained and calibrated in accordance Chapter 4 of the West Star QualityControl Manual.

3.1.2 All equipment, material & tooling required by paragraph 3.1 shall be locatedon the Repair Station premises and shall be under full control of the RepairStation. For the purpose of this procedure, full control shall mean integratedinto the Repair Station’s tooling control system.

3.1.3 In the event that the tooling or equipment required to maintain a particulararticle is not cost effective to purchase, West Star will rent the tooling orequipment. Upon receipt of this tooling or equipment, the technician willensure that the calibration is current will all necessary documentation isavailable.

3.2 All equipment, material & tooling required by paragraph 3.1 shall be suitable for theintended function, and shall be the equipment, material & tooling recommended bythe manufacturer or operator of the component/aircraft for maintaining or altering theapplicable article.

3.2.1 The Repair Station may substitute equivalent equipment, materials & toolingfor those recommended by the manufacturer or operator provided theequivalent equipment, materials & tooling are suitable for the intendedfunction, and the equivalency is validated by airworthiness qualifiedinspection personnel assigned to quality assurance department, and isacceptable to the FAA.



33.040

10/01/09Rev. 52 of 2

3.040.doc

4.0 Special Equipment and Test Apparatus

4.1 The maintenance of aircraft and associated components may require the use ofspecial equipment and test apparatus (i.e. test fixtures, jigs, tooling…).

4.2 West Star may purchase such special equipment from the original equipmentmanufacturer (OEM), purchase equivalent substitute equipment, or produceequivalent substitute equipment, if specifically allowed by the OEM.

4.3 Equivalent special equipment shall be capable of performing all tests and checkingall parameters of the aircraft or component under test, to a level of accuracy equal toor better than the OEM supplied equipment.

4.4 When performing maintenance using substitute equipment, the person performingthe maintenance shall assure that the substitute equipment will produce resultsequivalent to OEM provided equipment.

4.5 West Star shall evaluate each piece of special equipment, not supplied by theOEM, for equivalency to the OEM supplied item, prior to initial use. Equivalency maybe established as follows:

1) TECHNICAL DATAWest Star may use technical data (i.e. drawings, specifications, blueprints,pictures…) provided by the OEM, to create equivalent special equipment. Ifsubstitute equipment meets the OEM’s standards and specifications with allrespects regarding tolerances and accuracy, it may be used to performmaintenance.

2) FUNCTIONAL EQUIVALENCYWest Star may use equivalent special equipment, without having technicaldata from the OEM, by comparing the results produced using the equivalentitem against the results produced by the OEM supplied equipment. Ifsubstitute equipment produces results, which are at least as accurate as theOEM supplied equipment, it may be used to perform maintenance.

4.6 Each item of equivalent equipment shall be given a unique identification number. Arecord of the means of determining equivalency shall be kept on file. Any equivalentspecial equipment, which requires calibration, shall be regularly calibrated to aknown standard as specified in Chapter 4 of the West Star Quality Control Manual.



44.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

4.000.doc

CHAPTER 4

HOUSING & FACILITYREQUIREMENTS


Blank Page.doc




44.010

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

4.010.doc

Title: HOUSING AND FACILITY REQUIREMENTS (14CFR §145.103)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define Repair Station housing and facility requirements necessary to ensure all workperformed complies with Federal Aviation Regulations and is completed in an airworthymanner.

2.0 Responsibility:

2.1 The Repair Station, and it’s management personnel, shall ensure that all work done isprotected from weather elements, dust, and heat, and that it’s workers are protected to theextent that their work will not be impaired by the environment or their physical efficiency.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The Repair Station shall maintain suitable permanent housing for aircraft types listed onthe operational specifications.

3.2 If climatic conditions permit work to be performed outside, permanent work docks may beused so long as all other requirements of this section are met.

3.2.1 Air conditioning and/or heating units shall be utilized as required to provide astabilized work environment for Repair Station personnel inside of aircraftpositioned outdoors.

3.3 All shop and assembly areas shall be located and arranged so as to not negatively impactin process or assembly work on adjacent or nearby aircraft.

3.3.1 Careful attention shall be paid to controlling particulates (sawdust, metal cuttingdust, etc.) when these operations are performed adjacent to or near aircraft inwork.

3.4 All parts, spare parts, work in-process parts, and raw materials shall be stored andprotected in a manner that will eliminate the possibility of contamination or damage.


Blank Page.doc




44.020

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

4.020.doc

Title: CHANGE OF LOCATION, HOUSING OR FACILITIES (14CFR §145.105)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this section is to describe the procedures that will be followed if location,housing or facilities are changed that could significantly affect the ability of a repair stationto perform airworthy work.

2.0 Responsibility:

2.1 It will be the responsibility of the Accountability Manager to assess the significance of thechange and make the determination if it effects the ability to perform work in an airworthymanner. The result of this determination will be reflected in West Star Housing andfacilities manual. This manual depicts the physical layout of the West Star complex andwill be kept and revised within the Quality Department as a separate manual from theRepair Station/Quality Control manual.

2.2 West Star will comply with the requirements of 14CFR §145.105(b) by notifying the FSDOin writing.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Whenever a change is made to the location, housing or facilities that could have asignificant effect on the ability of the repair station to perform work in an airworthy manner,the Accountable Manager will initiate a draft revision to this manual.

3.2 The Accountability Manager will decide which changes might have a “significant effect” onthe ability of the repair station to accomplish its work in accordance with all applicableFARs. If determined to be significant, the revision must be approved by the AccountabilityManager. If insignificant, the revision will be distributed as otherwise required bythis manual.

3.3 If the revision is found to have a “significant effect” on the repair station’s ability toaccomplish its work in accordance with the applicable FARs, a copy of the draft revisionwill be sent to the FAA for approval.

3.4 After receiving FAA approval and any FAA-prescribed conditions or limitations that affectthis repair station’s work during the transition, the Accountability Manager will ensure thefinal manual revision is created and is properly distributed.


Blank Page.doc




55.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.000.doc

CHAPTER 5

TRAINING SYSTEM


Blank Page.doc




55.010

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.010.doc

Title: TRAINING SYSTEM (14CFR §145.163 & §145.209 (e))

In order to meet the requirements of 14CFR §145.163 a Training Program Manual has been created andapproved by the Flight Standards District Office. The Training Program Manual is separate from theRepair Station and Quality Control Manual. This Training Program Manual contains the policies andprocedures West Star uses to determine its training requirements and to develop its training program.The training program ensures each repair station employee has the knowledge and skills to capablyperform assigned maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alteration tasks. The training programcontent in this manual ensures West Star can respond to its employees’ changing training needs.

The Training Program Manual sets forth the procedures for West Star to identify its training needs in asystematic manner, develop training and/or identify appropriate existing training, select the trainingmethods, provide training, record training accomplishment, and measure the effectiveness of its trainingprogram.

A copy of the Training Program Manual and all revisions are provided to West Star certificate-holdingdistrict office (CHDO). The procedures for revising this document and submitting revisions to the FAA forapproval are described in this document on page 6 and in the West Star RSM Doc. No. 1.020.

West Star uses a closed loop system to ensure that the training requirements for the company andemployees are identified, training standards are established, training is provided, and the trainingprogram is revised as necessary. West Star training program consists of the following basic components:

A training needs assessment to identify West Star overall training needs and individual employeetraining needs

The method for defining areas of study and/or courses/lessons made available to employees The method for identifying training sources and methods available to employees for the areas of

study, courses, and/or lessons The method of documenting employee qualifications and training The methods used to measure the effectiveness of the training program and to make changes as

necessary

The Accountable Manager has the overall authority for West Star training program and will ensure WestStar complies with all of the components of its training program.Any changes to the training program will be coordinated with the Accountable manager.


Blank Page.doc




55.020

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 2

5.020.doc

Title: GPS TRAINING SYSTEM

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this section is to explain how the repair station will conducttraining in regards to IFR certification for enroute and non-precision approaches.

2.0 Procedures:

GPS Non-Precision Approach Inspector Training

2.1 Training will consist of the trainee accompanying a GPS non-precision approachinspector on two (2) each GPS non-precision validation flights. During the flights,the trainee will be given instruction for the proper interpretations of GPSmeasurements and for the insertion of such data on the Flight Data EvaluationReport (WSF.2040-2/00). One GPS check flight will be considered a flightcovering all items on WSF.2040-2/00.

GPS Route Inspector Training

2.2 Training will consist of the trainee accompanying a GPS route inspector on two(2) each validation flights over the Loran C’ check route. During the flights thetrainee will be given instruction for proper interpretations of GPS measurementsand for the insertion of such data on the Flight Data Evaluation Report(WSF.2040-2/00). One route validation flight will be considered a flight coveringall items on the (WSF.2040-2/00).

GPS Flight Test Report (WSF.724)

2.3 Prior to IFR certification for enroute, terminal, and non-precision approachoperations, each GPS system shall be proven by conducting validation flights,which comply with the requirements of the current revision of AC 20-138. Suchvalidation flights shall be conducted by an approved test pilot or witnessed by anapproved inspector on board the aircraft. The results of the verification flightshall be documented on West Star Form WSF.724, “Flight Data EvaluationReport for IFR, Enroute, Terminal and Non-precision Approach Approval”. TheWSF.724 form shall be signed by the approved test pilot or approved inspectorwho performed or witnessed the validation flight(s). The appropriate forms willbe attached to the work order hard copy and filed. The GPS authorized inspectorwill assure that a ramp check of installed GPS and related equipment issatisfactorily completed prior to takeoff on the GPS validation flight.



55.020

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 2

5.020.doc



66.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

6.000.doc

CHAPTER 6

CONTRACT MAINTENANCE


Blank Page.doc




66.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 3

6.010.doc

TITLE: CONTRACT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (14CFR §145.209 (h) & §145.217)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this section is to describe a process for selecting subcontractors that door do not have their own FAA certificate and for maintaining some form of qualityoversight.


2.1 The Accountability Manager or his designee shall be responsible for assuring that theprovisions of this procedure are carried out.

2.2 The Materials Control Manager shall be responsible for assuring that all products andservices used for returning aircraft to service are procured from subcontractors that havebeen qualified in accordance with this procedure.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Some maintenance functions that are an integral part of the maintenance beingperformed by West Star may be subcontracted to a maintenance vendor approved by theAccountability Manager and the FAA. Such contractors are used on a part-time basis, asneeded.

3.2 The maintenance functions that will or can be contracted to outside sources will becontained in a list approved by the FAA located in Appendix A of this manual.

3.3 This section does not apply to components or services received from FAA certificatedvendors who have conducted final inspection and test of an assembled accessory, andissued acceptable/approved documentation, which approved the article for return toservice.

3.4 The Accountability Manager will be responsible to maintain a list of approvedmaintenance subcontractors and the maintenance functions they are approved toperform.

4.0 CONTRACT MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

4.1 Before adding any contracted maintenance functions to its FAA-approved list, the repairstation shall contact the FAA in a format acceptable to the administrator setting forth thetype of maintenance function it wishes to accomplish by contract.

4.2 The repair station shall not contract any maintenance function prior to obtaining FAAapproval. FAA approval will be provided in a format acceptable to the administrator or inthe case of an emergency, verbally.

4.3 Maintenance contractors are chosen for their ability to perform the maintenance,preventive maintenance or alteration service and their certificated or non-certificatedstatus.



66.010

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 3

6.010.doc

4.4 Non-certificated contractors are required to have a quality control system equivalent toWest Stars Quality system that ensures the vendor has the housing, facilities, equipment,trained personnel and data necessary to accomplish the specific work requested by thisrepair station. Additionally, the non-certificated source must allow the FAA to inspectthem during the time they are performing work on behalf of this repair station. This repairstation will remain directly in charge of the work performed by the non-certificated facilityby supplying the vendor the appropriate material and documentation to accomplish thecontract maintenance if it cannot be provided by the vendor in a manner satisfying allapplicable FAR requirements. When the work is completed by the contractor, the articlewill be subjected to a receiving inspection and a conformity inspection.

4.5 A list of contract maintenance facilities will be maintained in the inspection office in amanner acceptable to the administrator. This list will contain a Vendor Code, (InternalUse Only), and the name of the contracted facility, date of approval status, approval forcertificated or non-certificated facility and an approved contract maintenance functioncode. This function code will be derived from a FAA approved Contract MaintenanceNumerical Function listing. The name, type of certificates and ratings, if any, for thesefacilities will be maintained on file in the Quality Assurance Managers office along withthe Contract Maintenance Function and Facility listings.

4.6 A sample of the Numerical Function Listing is as follows:

Note: The FAA approved Function listing can be located in the Repair Station ManualAppendix “A”.

1. Metal plating or anodizing.

2. Complex machine operations involving the use of planers, shapers, milling machines, etc.

3. Precision grinding, honing, and lapping operations (including crankshaft, cylinder barrels, etc.)

4. Heat treatment.

5. Non-Destructive Testing (NDT)

6. Plastic, Acrylic, Polly Carbonate etc. repair or manufacturing

7. Hydrostatic test and inspection of pressurized gas cylinders.

8. Recharging, Overhaul and repair of pressurized gas cylinder regulators.

9. Commercial Parts: Must be approved prior to installation on aircraft. (I.e. Interior Dept. items such as latches, hingesand carpet. Avionics non-discreet (non-programmable) electronic components such as transistors, resistors and diodes.To include miscellaneous hardware and consumables).

10. Calibration articles inspection & repair

11. Parts Distributor

12. Plastics repair, i.e. acrylics, Polly carbonates, etc.


Chapter:Doc. No.:EffectiveDate:Revision No.:Page:

66.010

06/01/10Rev. 63 of 3

6.010.doc

4.7 A sample of the Contract Maintenance Facility Listing is as follows:

Note: The Contract Maintenance Facility listing is located in West Star Aviation Inspection office.

VendorCode

Vendor Name Date ofStatus

Non-Certificated

Facility

CertificatedFacility

FunctionCode

A/CSU AIRCRAFT SUPPLY COMPANY 01/31/04 APPROVED NA 10AARDI AAR DISTRIBUTION 01/31/04 APPROVED NA 10DALLD DALLAS AIRMOTIVE, INC. 01/31/04 NA FAILED NAPRAWH PRATT & WHITNEY ENGINE SERVICES, INC. 01/31/04 NA APPROVED NAROCKP ROCKWELL COLLINS 01/31/04 NA APPROVED NA


Blank Page.doc




66.020

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 2

6.020.doc

CONTRACTED VENDOR (FACILITY) QUALIFICATION

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 This document defines the procedure whereby West Star establishes that itsvendors are qualified to provide aircraft materials or services of adequate quality.

NOTE: Any reference to “vendor” falls under the same definition as “facility”.


2.1 The Quality Assurance Manager or his designee shall be responsible forassuring that the provisions of this procedure are carried out.

2.2 The Materials Control Manager shall be responsible for assuring that all productsand services used for returning aircraft to service are procured from vendors thathave been qualified in accordance with this procedure.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 A database will be maintained by the Quality Assurance Manager or hisdesignee, which summarizes the current, and past approval status of eachvendor evaluated under this procedure.

Table 3.1 lists the various possible approval status categories.

Table 3.1 Vendor (Facility) Approval Status CategoriesApprovalCategory

Status Definition ApprovalCodes

Approved Survey was returned and evaluated by West Star approved. AFailed Survey was returned and evaluated by West Star and failed. F

3.2 The approval status of each vendor will be made readily available to procurementpersonnel either through periodic reports from the database or by suitable codingon the Corridor Purchasing Department data tracking system.

4.0 DOCUMENTS

4.1 The Vendor Audit Form (WSF014A) will be used to establish acceptability of avendor's qualifications. This form is mailed, e-mailed or faxed to the vendor whofills it out and returns it to West Star for evaluation.

4.2 The Vendor Audit Form (WSF014A) may also be used to assist West Starauditors when performing periodic on site audits of vendors.

5.0 PROCEDURES



66.020

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 2

6.020.doc

5.1 Upon notification by the Purchasing Department of the need to evaluate avendor, the Quality Assurance Manager or his designee will mail, fax or e-mailthe vendor a copy of WSF014A, Vendor Audit Form.

5.2 When returned, WSF014A will be evaluated by a QA Inspector for theacceptability of the responses in each vendor category for which the vendor isbeing evaluated.

a. The vendor will be approved internally for those categories for whichacceptable answers are provided and procurement personnel will be notified persection 3.2 of the vendor's corresponding approval codes. Ref.Table 3.1 of thisdocument.

5.3 Approved vendor status will last for one to 5 years from the date of receipt of anacceptable WSF.014. Prior to the expiration of their approved status, the vendorwill be sent a current copy of the Vendor Audit Form (WSF014A) to fill out andreturn. The WSF014A form will be evaluated and the vendor’s status established.

5.4 Changes to the vendor's management, ownership, location, and/or quality systemmay require re-evaluation of the vendor. Therefore, any such vendor changesmust be expeditiously reported to the Quality Assurance Manager.


AppendixDoc. No.:Effective Date:Revision No.:Page:

AA.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

Appendix A.doc

Contract Maintenance Numerical Function Listing:

1. REMOVED

2. Complex machine operations involving the use of planers, shapers, milling machines, etc.

3 REMOVED

4 Hydrostatic test and inspection of pressurized gas cylinders.

5 REMOVED

6. REMOVED

7. Swedging

8. Welding

Approval: Approval:

West Star Aviation________________________ FAA FSDO___________________Accountability Manager Principal Inspector


Blank Page.doc



Appendix:Doc. No.:Effective Date:Revision No.:Page:

BB.010

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

Appendix B, Forms Index.doc

Title: REPAIR STATION FORMS INDEX

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to provide the user of this manual and index to all ofthe forms, tags and stamps referenced in this manual. This index does notencompass all repair station forms, tags and stamps but only those specificallyreferenced in the Repair Station/Quality Control Manual.

FORM, STAMP OR TAG # DESCRIPTION LOCATIONMANUAL Doc. # PG. #

WSF 014A Vendor Audit Form Quality Control 5.090 1 of 1WSF 026 Aircraft Undergoing Maintenance Sheet Quality Control 5.050 2 of 10

WSF 053A Inspection Authority Card Quality Control 5.111 1 of 1WSF 080 Return to Service (145 Sticker) Quality Control 5.030 1 of 7WSF 081 “Not” approved for return to service (145

Sticker) Quality Control 5.030 2 of 7WSF 1022 Operation Check Flight Sticker Quality Control 5.030 2 of 7

FAA Form, (Online) Service Difficulty Report / M or D Entry Form Quality Control 5.100 1 of 1FAA Form 8120-11 Suspected Unapproved Parts Notification Quality Control 5.112 1 of1FAA Form 8130-3 Airworthiness Release Tag Quality Control 5.050 5 of 10

Stamps All Stamps Quality Control 5.060 AllWSF 027 Repair Station & Quality Control Manual

Revision Instruction and Control. Repair Station iv 1 of 1WSF 2161 Repairable Part Tag Quality Control 5.050 6 of 10WSF 2162 Un-airworthy Part Tag Quality Control 5.050 7 of 10WSF 2163 Maintenance Release Tag Quality Control 5.050 8 of 10WSF 2164 Identification Tag Quality Control 5.050 9 of 10WSF 2167 Warranty Core Tag Quality Control 5.050 10 of 10WSF 2171 On-the-Job Training form Quality Control 5.050 1 of 10WSF 2172 Altimeter Correction Card Quality Control 5.050 3 of 10WSF 2173 Airspeed Correction Card Quality Control 5.050 4 of 10WSF 1019 Supplemental Corrective Action Quality Control RemovedWSF 802 Repair or Modification Approval Quality Control 5.070 1 of 1WSF 041 Disposition of Quarantined Parts Quality Control 5.080 1 of 1WSF 1009 “Major Repair” Return to Service Quality Control 5.030 3 of 7WSF 2000 Work Order Form (Front Page) Quality Control 5.020 5 of 6WSF 2001 Work Order Form (Continuation Page) Quality Control 5.020 6 of 6WSF 2006 Work Order Detail report (Corridor) Quality Control 5.020 1 & 2 of 10WSF 2007 Work Order Squawk report (Corridor) Quality Control 5.020 3 of 10WSF 2008 Work Order Step report (Corridor) Quality Control 5.020 4 of 10WSF 018 Inspection Job Aid Quality Control 5.020 7 of 10


Blank Page.doc




CC.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 2

Appendix C, E-signatures.doc

Title: ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE & MANUAL PROCEDURES – Advisory Circular 120-78

NOTE: For detail and references to the Corridor system functionality and nomenclature referto the Corridor Users Manual.

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 West Star will use electronic signatures within the Corridor Work Order System as anacceptable means for signing off individual squawks/steps. The following procedureaddresses how West Star Aviation will maintain the highest level of security whenusing Electronic Signatures. Wet signatures/initials are still acceptable, as required,on any or all West Star forms.

2.0 Electronic Signature Uniqueness:

2.1 The Electronic Signature utilized within the Corridor system is unique by the meansof identification and authentication in two forms of which either can be used to signoff a squawk or step.

2.1.1 The first identification and authentication of a technician is provided by abadge created from the Corridor system and issued to the technician by theIT department or designee. The badge contains the technician’s printedname as well as a bar code that has his name and password encoded bycryptographic means within the bar code. The use of the bar code on thisbadge does not require the technician to be logged into the Corridor system.When scanned by the bar code reader a window on the monitor will display indetail what the technician scanned for verification. The technician’s nameand the date the type of sign off was scanned will be displayed on the WorkOrder detail report and the individual squawk report.

2.1.2 Logging into the Corridor system by way of a unique username and passwordprovides the second identification and authentication of a technician. Oncethis is completed, the technician will locate the work order, the specificsquawk or step within the Corridor system and sign off by selecting the SignOff, Inspect or Double Inspect button as required. The technician’s nameand the date the type of sign off was selected will be displayed within theCorridor work order system, Work Order detail report and the individualsquawk/step report generated by the Corridor system.

3.0 Electronic Signature significance

3.1 The use of the bar code scanner will be considered the means by which a technicianwill affix his/her name deliberately to the Corridor system. The technician will scanthe sign off or type of inspection using a barcode, scan the barcode on the individualsquawk or step and finally the barcode on their badge. Ultimately, this sequence ofscanning will result in signing off a particular squawk or step within the Corridorsystem.

4.0 Electronic Signature Security



CC.010

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 2

Appendix C, E-signatures.doc

4.1 Password: Every six months the IT department will force the technician by programming,to change their password the next time they log in at the 6 month point. If the technicianattempts to use the scanner at the 6-month password change point, he/she will receivean error message prompting them to log in to Corridor to change their password.

4.2 Login In: When it is necessary to login to the Corridor system, the technician will enter aunique username and password. Technicians will not allow other technicians to workwithin the Corridor system under their login. When the technician is finished in theCorridor system, he/she will logout.

4.3 Permissions: There are over 600 individual permissions within the Corridor system. Withapproval from the Quality Assurance Manager the IT department has created permissionprofiles which are assigned to individual technicians within the Corridor system. Thisallows or prevents technicians from accessing different areas of the Corridor system aswell as allowing or preventing different tasks such as inspection authorities.

4.4 Termination of Employment: Upon termination of employment, the IT department willimmediately zero out any and all permissions the employee may have had. Also, theemployee will surrender the Security badge to human resources, which will be forwardedto the Quality Assurance manager or designee for disposal.

4.5 Removing Electronic Signatures: Every effort will be made to have the squawk or stepcomplete and correctly entered before it is signed off and inspected. In the event thiscannot be achieved, select individuals, based on permission profiles will be allowedwithin the Corridor system to remove electronic signatures to move parts, services andlabor to include correcting grammatical errors.

4.6 History: Every time anybody makes a change within the Corridor system it is recorded in“History”. If text was changed within the discrepancy or resolution of a squawk, thesystem will show a before and after. History also contains who made the change, onwhat date and time.

5.0 Electronic Manuals

5.1 Storage & Retrieval: Manual data contained on the server cannot be altered in anyway.5.2 Maintenance & Support: The server which contains all of the technical data for the

company has necessary backups in the way of selected paper manuals and electronicbackups in case of computer outages.

5.3 Access to Manuals: Distribution of the manuals are handled similar to manualsmaintained in a paper format as explained in the Repair Station manual, Doc. No. 1.020.

5.4 Revisions to Manuals: Revisions will be handled through a subscription service. Therevisions will be handed over to the IT department for immediate update of the manual onthe server as required. In addition, the revisions for electronic manuals will be updatedautomatically over the Internet were West Star’s server will connect to the revisionservice server. Revision status of any electronic technical data will be maintained in acomputer database, which is controlled in the Quality Assurance department.

5.5 Training: Floor technicians will be given initial and recurrent training on access and useof the electronic technical manuals. Recurrent training will be once per year.

6.0 Federal Aviation Approval of Electronic Signatures, Recordkeeping and Manuals6.1 Upon acceptance, by the PMI, of the procedures in this manual an entry will be made in

the repair stations operation specifications, specifically in Op Spec paragraph A025 as itrelates to Electronic Signatures and Manuals. This repair station elects not to utilizeElectronic Recordkeeping at this time.

QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL14CFR §145.211

NOTE: ANY AND ALL FORMS, STAMPS OR TAGS REFERENCED IN THIS MANUAL CAN BEFOUND BY USING THE INDEX LOCATED IN APPENDIX B. WEST STAR NUMBERS THEIR

FORMS USING THE PREFIX OF, WSF FOR INTERNAL CONTROL


Blank Page.doc


QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL


i06/01/10

Rev. 61 of 2

i (TOC).doc

TABLE OF CONTENTS

QUALITY CONTROL MANUAL POLICIES & PROCEDURES

NOTE: If viewing this manual in a digital format, click on the individual line items below which are hyperlink to the document

TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................. iLIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES................................................................................... ii

Chapter 1: QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM

Title Page........................................................................................................ 1.000Introduction and Basic Requirement for the Manual ................................... 1.010

Chapter 2: MATERIAL CONTROL

Title Page........................................................................................................ 2.000Incoming Material and Receiving Inspection............................................... 2.010Receiving Inspection................................................................................... 2.020Suspected Unapproved Parts ..................................................................... 2.030Shelf Life Materials ..................................................................................... 2.040Issuance of Parts and Materials from Inventory.......................................... 2.050Tagging and Identification of Parts ............................................................. 2.060Rejected Parts Disposition.......................................................................... 2.070Life Limited Parts Disposition...................................................................... 2.080

Chapter 3: INSPECTION SYSTEM

Title Page........................................................................................................ 3.000Work Order Flow......................................................................................... 3.005Inspection System Flow.............................................................................. 3.010

Preliminary Inspections............................................................................... 3.0Hidden Damage Inspection......................................................................... 4.0In Process Inspection.................................................................................. 5.0Continuity of Inspection............................................................................... 6.0Failed Inspection......................................................................................... 7.0Customer Required Inspection Items.......................................................... 8.0

Inspection Personnel Requirements ........................................................... 3.011Technical Data Control ............................................................................... 3.012Final Inspection and Return to Service of Maintained Articles .................... 3.020Major Repairs & Major Alterations .............................................................. 3.030Critical Inspection Items.............................................................................. 3.040Corrective Action Procedures on Deficiencies ............................................ 3.050Work Performed for Operators Subject to 14CFR Parts 121, 125, 129, or 135 ........................................................................................................ 3.060



i06/01/10

Rev. 62 of 2

i (TOC).doc

Reports of Defects or Unairworthy Conditions ............................................ 3.070Qualifying and Surveiling Non-Certificated Person ..................................... 3.080

Chapter 4: Tooling Calibration System

Title Page........................................................................................................ 4.000Calibration System...................................................................................... 4.010Calibration Labeling .................................................................................... 4.020Calibration Intervals .................................................................................... 4.030Calibration for Multimeters .......................................................................... 4.040Calibration General Requirements.............................................................. 4.050

Chapter 5: REPAIR STATION DOCUMENTATION

Title Page........................................................................................................ 5.000Repair Station Forms .................................................................................. 5.010

Repair Station Forms Revision & Control .................................................. 4.0Repair Station Work Order Forms............................................................... 5.020Work Order Form Instructions for the Corridor System............................... 5.021Work Order Form Instructions..................................................................... 5.022Repair Station Return to Service Forms ..................................................... 5.030Repair Station Log Entries .......................................................................... 5.040Repair Station Tags .................................................................................... 5.050Repair Station Stamps ................................................................................ 5.060Repair & Modification Approval Form (WSF 802) ....................................... 5.070Repair or Modification Approval Form Instruction ....................................... 5.071Disposition of Quarantined Parts Form (WSF 041)..................................... 5.080Vendor Audit Form (WSF 014A) ................................................................. 5.090Online Service Difficulty /M or D Entry Form............................................... 5.100Malfunction or Defect Report (FAA Form 8010-4) REMOVED ................... 5.110Inspection Authorization Card (WSF 053A) ................................................ 5.111Suspected Unapproved Parts Notification (FAA From 8120-11)................. 5.112



ii06/01/10

Rev. 61 of 1

ii (LOEP).doc

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES – APPROVAL / ACCEPTANCE OFPage Date Page Date Page Date Page Date

Doc. No. i Doc. No. 3.011 Doc No. 5.010 1 07/01/081 06/01/10 1 10/01/09 1 10/01/09 2 07/01/082 06/01/10 Doc. No. 3.012 2 10/01/09 3 07/01/08

Doc. No. ii 1 10/01/09 Doc. No. 5.020 4 07/01/081 06/01/10 Doc. No. 3.020 1 06/01/10 5 07/01/08

Doc. No. 1.000 1 07/01/07 2 06/01/10 7 07/01/081 07/01/07 Doc. No. 3.030 3 06/01/10 6 07/01/08

Doc. No. 1.010 1 07/01/08 4 06/01/10 8 07/01/081 06/01/10 2 07/01/08 5 06/01/10 9 07/01/08

Doc. No. 2.000 Doc. No. 3.040 6 06/01/10 10 07/01/081 07/01/07 1 07/01/08 7 06/01/10 11 07/01/08

Doc. No. 2.010 2 07/01/08 Doc. No. 5.021 Doc. No. 5.0601 06/01/10 Doc. No. 3.050 1 06/01/10 1 06/01/102 06/01/10 1 06/01/10 2 06/01/10 2 06/01/10

Doc. No. 2.020 Doc. No. 3.060 3 06/01/101 07/01/07 1 10/01/09 4 06/01/10 Doc. No. 5.0702 07/01/07 2 10/01/09 Doc. No. 5.022 1 07/01/07

1 07/01/07 Doc. No. 5.071Doc. No. 2.030 Doc. No. 3.0702 07/01/07 1 07/01/07

1 07/01/07 1 06/01/10 3 07/01/07 Doc. No. 5.080Doc. No. 2.040 Doc. No. 3.080 4 07/01/07 1 07/01/071 07/01/07 1 06/01/10 5 07/01/07 Doc. No. 5.0902 07/01/07 6 07/01/07 1 07/01/07

Doc. No. 2.050 Doc. No. 4.000 7 07/01/07 2 07/01/071 06/01/10 1 07/01/07 Doc. No. 5.030 3 07/01/07

Doc. No. 2.060 Doc. No. 4.010 1 07/01/08 Doc No. 5.1001 06/01/10 1 10/01/09 2 07/01/08 1 06/01/10

Doc. No. 2.070 2 10/01/09 3 07/01/08 Doc. No. 5.1101 07/01/07 Doc. No 4.020 4 07/01/08 REMOVED2 07/01/07 1 10/01/09 5 07/01/08 Doc. No. 5.111

Doc. No. 2.080 Doc. No. 4.030 6 07/01/08 1 07/01/081 10/01/09 1 10/01/09 7 07/01/08 Doc No. 5.112

Doc. No. 3.000 2 10/01/09 Doc. No. 5.040 1 07/01/071 07/01/07 Doc. No 4.040 1 07/01/07

Doc. No. 3.005 1 07/01/07 2 07/01/071 07/01/08 Doc. No. 4.050 3 07/01/07

Doc. No. 3.010 1 10/01/09 4 07/01/071 06/01/10 2 10/01/09 5 07/01/072 06/01/10 Doc. No. 5.000 6 07/01/073 06/01/10 1 07/01/07 Doc. No. 5.050

Approval: Acceptance of:

West Star________________________ FAA F.S.D.O._________ ________________ Accountability Manager Principal Inspector


Blank Page.doc




11.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

1.000.doc

CHAPTER 1

QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEMINTRODUCTION


Blank Page.doc




11.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

1.010.doc

Title: INTRODUCTION (14CFR §145.211)

1.0 Purpose: This quality control manual includes a description of the policies and proceduresthat will be used by this repair station to meet all requirements of a QualityControl system.


2.1 All Repair Station Key Personnel are required to be thoroughly familiar with the requirementsof this manual and the applicable FAA Regulations.

2.2 The Individual Hangar libraries will have a hard copy of the manual to include,department head supervisors of which all technicians will have access to including theelectronic version located and accessed on the company intranet. There will beadditional copies maintained in the inspection office when a West Star technician istasked to work away from base. This travel copy will be checked out by the technician.This Repair Station Manual will be combined with the Quality Control Manual in onebinder. These manuals will be tracked as one. A list of manual assignments by individualor location will be maintained in the Inspection office.

2.3 Manual holders are responsible for maintaining their assigned manuals to current revisionstatus, and for ensuring that all personnel under their supervision have access to and arefamiliar with the contents of the manual and adhere to its provisions, to include the electronicversion located and accessed on the company intranet.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 This manual will describe the inspection system, material control, contract maintenanceand the use of repair station documentation.

3.1.1 All West Star personnel while performing any maintenance activities for therepair station, regardless of the location where the maintenance is beingperformed will strictly adhere to the procedures listed in this manual.

3.1.2 All maintenance, including inspections performed by West Star, shall beaccomplished in accordance with the manufactures current inspection standards.

3.2 This manual contains the repair station’s quality control policies and procedures and theQuality Control (QC) system to permit this repair station to properly approve workperformed on an article for return to service.

3.2 The maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alteration of civil aviation articles will beperformed in accordance with the applicable Federal Aviation Regulations (FARs). Therepair station will not maintain or alter any article for which it does not hold an appropriaterating.

4.0 Manual Distribution, Control and Revision Processes 14CFR §145.211 (c)(4)

4.1 The revision process for the Quality Control Manual will be accomplished in accordancewith the Repair Station Manual, Chapter 1 Doc. No.: 1.020.


Blank Page.doc




22.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.000.doc

CHAPTER 2

MATERIAL CONTROL


Blank Page.doc




22.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 2

2.010.doc

Title: INCOMING MATERIAL AND RECEIVING INSPECTION (14CFR §FAR 145.211 (c)(1)(i))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To ensure the airworthiness of components, accessories, appliances and hardware that willbe installed on aircraft and to define responsibilities, requirements and procedures governingarticles and materials received by the Repair Station.

Note: Back up personnel for the Scrap Parts and Shelf Life programs, to ensure compliance to thismanual has been assigned to any Quality Assurance inspector within the inspection department.


2.1 The Materials Control Manager is responsible to determine that incoming materials,hardware, parts, components, equipment and other products, intended for installation onaircraft, are subject to a receiving inspection.

2.2 The Materials Control Manager may delegate this inspection function to Product Supportdepartment personnel, identified as Receiving Inspectors on the repair station roster.The Quality Assurance Manager must provide adequate training to the personnel whoperform these inspections for the repair station.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Receiving inspections are normally accomplished when parts are received into theshipping / receiving area of the Product Support Department. Special care must be takento assure that parts, which do not enter the Repair Station in this manner, are subject to areceiving inspection. Following are examples of such situations:

3.1.1 Parts received by production personnel, (e.g. after hours and weekends), will beaccepted only by a receiving inspector. Production personnel must coordinate their partsneeds to the Production Manager for possible receiving inspection support.

3.1.2 Parts purchased by production personnel, from outside sources (i.e. customers),which are intended for installation on aircraft. The person purchasing such parts shallassure that the Repair Station places the parts into quarantine prior to introduction to theRepair Station’s controlled inventory or prior to installation. Only a QA Inspector mayrelease such parts from quarantine. If the part is released from quarantine, the QAInspector shall perform and document the Receiving Inspection.

3.2 All incoming units, parts, components and materials shall be inspected for quality,quantity, conformity to dimensions or specifications (as applicable), conformance to partnumber, serial number, requested specification, purchase order number, state ofpreservation and airworthiness standards.

3.3 Products purchasing agents ordering parts intended for installation or use on aircraft willrequest the manufacturing certification from the parts supplier, on all parts not ordereddirectly from a Type or Production Certificated manufacturer.



22.010

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 2

2.010.doc

3.4 To assist in ensuring parts ordered are appropriate for installation or use on aircraft, theQuality Assurance Manager will maintain a list of “Contract facilities” IAW the RepairStation manual chapter 6, (Contract Maintenance). Organizations listed on the facility list,which do not hold type or production certification will be subject to a periodic qualitycheck. The quality check will be conducted by the Quality Assurance Manager and willinclude at a minimum, verification of the organization parts conformity certification.

3.5 All products will be inspected for compliance to the purchase order. Raw stock shall have amaterial spec sheet. Product inspection shall include, but not be limited to; identification,damage and age control. Traceability must be established for all articles. Parts receivedwith documentation traceable to a recognizable source certifying conformance to FAR part21.303 and where authenticity of the part can be established, constitutes acceptablecertification

3.6 The parts receiving inspector will determine the manufacturer of all aircraft parts andmaterials that are intended for installation on any certificated aircraft by reviewing thedocumentation provided with the parts for FAA approved parts manufacturer'sdocumentation.

3.7 The inspector will determine whether the part or material meets the requirements of FARPart 21.303 (a) and (b) 1, 2, 3 and 4. If the part conforms, it will be accepted and arecord of the inspection will be made on the applicable packing slip by using theReceiving Inspection stamp.

3.8 The part is then received and logged into the repair station parts inventory. If it isdetermined that the part does not conform to the requirements of FAR part 21 or theconformity status is questionable, it will be segregated. Form WSF041 (Disposition ofQuarantined Parts) will be filled out as required and kept with the part until the QAdepartment determines disposition.

3.9 The part will remain segregated and tagged until the Quality Assurance Manager, or hisdesignee, determines the conformity status and its proper disposition. In all cases, thepresence of a receiving stamp and the initials of the receiving inspector or the QualityControl Inspector signifies acceptance of a part.

4.0 Customer Supplied Materials

4.1 It shall be the responsibility of the customer to provide certifications or maintenance releasetags as required, with the material being supplied.

4.2 Customer supplied parts will subjected to the same receiving inspections as any other partordered by West Star. If it is not practical for the part to be brought to the parts room, areceiving inspector will come to were the part is located.

4.3 All paperwork will be brought to the parts room to be appropriately processed into the Corridorsystem.

4.2 Customer supplied material shall be placed in a Quarantined area until released by a QAinspector.

4.3 Customer supplied material that is rejected by receiving inspection will be identified andsegregated from acceptable materials. Customer will be promptly notified to correct problem.



22.020

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 2

2.020.doc

Title: RECEIVING INSPECTIONS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To ensure the airworthiness of components, accessories, appliances and hardwarethat will be installed on aircraft and to define responsibilities, requirements andprocedures governing articles and materials received by the Repair Station.


2.1 It will be the responsibility of the Receiving Inspector to follow the guidelines of thissection.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 New components manufactured under a type or production certificate, or inaccordance with Technical Standard Order (or similar FAA approved technicaldata), or components that have been rebuilt by the manufacturer to productionspecifications, requires a visual receiving inspection.

3.2 Any repaired or overhauled components received from an FAA certified repairstation which are identified as serviceable components (yellow tagged) do notnormally require more than a visual receiving inspection before being acceptedinto the Repair Station Inventory.

3.3 Repaired components that are received from other than an FAA certified repairstation, in addition to the normal receiving inspection, will be segregated andtagged with a “Repairable Part” tag, Form WSF2161.

3.4 The Quality Assurance Manager, or his designee, will be notified and the part willremain segregated and tagged until the Quality Assurance Manager, or hisdesignee, has performed the functional checks and tests necessary and hasapproved the component for return to service.

3.5 The approval for return to service will be complete when a Quality Assurance orQuality Control Inspector has issued the “Maintenance Release” tag, FormWSF2163, for the component before being placed into inventory.

NOTE: Functional checks and tests shall be performed in accordance withinstructions contained in the appropriate manufacturer’s publications.However, if such specific instructions are not available, functional checkrequirements will be determined by the Quality Assurance Manager anddocumented on a work order hard copy to provide a means of recordingcompliance. If suitable test facilities are not available in the repair station,components may be functionally checked in the aircraft. If an aircraft testbed is used to test components, the aircraft must be able to test all of thecomponent manufacturer’s test parameters. If the aircraft cannot performall of the tests required by the manufacturer, then the components will be



22.020

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 2

2.020.doc

sent to the manufacturer or a certificated repair station that has therequired test equipment to perform the tests.

3.6 The Quality Assurance Manager may request a functional check of anycomponent overhauled or repaired outside of West Star.

3.7 Once accepted into inventory, all parts, product, and materials are identified witha bar code sticker. The sticker provides identification of the parts origin and thepurchase order information associated.

3.8 In the case of large quantity items for which singular identification is not practicalsuch as screws, rivets, bolts etc, the sticker will also identify the count or numberof parts associated with that purchase order. The container for those items isidentified and will remain the only container open for that part number until eachpiece has been issued.

4.0 SHIPPING DAMAGE

4.1 Materials that have suffered shipping damages or are otherwise unacceptablewill be tagged using an "Unairworthy Part" tag (Form WSF2162) and returned tothe Supervisor of Product Support, for proper disposition. The receivinginspector may refer any incoming materials of questionable acceptability or originto the Quality Assurance Manager for assistance and guidance in reaching a finaldetermination.



22.030

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

2.030.doc

Title: SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To provide guidelines to the receiving inspector for the disposition of suspectedunapproved parts.


2.1 The proper disposition of suspected unapproved parts will be the responsibility ofthe receiving inspector.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Whenever an aircraft part has been purchased and received by the repair stationand is suspected to be unapproved by the Quality Assurance Manager ordesignee, the repair station will execute FAA form 8120-11.

3.2 The completion and distribution of FAA Form 8120-11, “Suspected UnapprovedParts Notification” form, is accomplished by the Quality Assurance Manager ordesignee. Reporting is accomplished in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular21-29B or its latest revision.

3.3 The part will then be segregated, tagged and disposed of as outlined in theIncoming Material and Receiving Inspection document 2.010.


Blank Page.doc




22.040

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 2

2.040.doc

Title: SHELF LIFE MATERIALS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To provide guidelines to receiving inspectors for proper identification of shelf lifeitems.


2.1 The proper disposition of shelf life items will be the responsibility all receivinginspectors

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Shelf Life limited product: West Star inventory software can accept only two methods of entering shelf

life data into the system. One method is using the cure date indicated on the product. With this

method the shelf life has to be known in order for the system to calculatethe proper expiration date. Known shelf life is first entered into the partmaster under the general tab. This entry is made in days only, i.e. 60quarters = 5475 days. Then the cure date for individual lot numbers areentered, the system will then calculate the expiration date. Labels canthen be printed with the expiration date and be attached to the product.

Method two is used when the expiration date is indicated on the product.With this method first enter the numeral 1 only in the shelf life field underthe general tab in the part master. Then enter the expiration date byindividual lot numbers. Labels can then be printed with the expirationdate and be attached to the product.

Inspect part (s) for shelf life limitations. As with these products it will depend on the vendor, as to which vendor will

recognize life limited parts. Not all vendors consider the same materials lifelimited. Some vendors are more aggressive with their shelf life limitedproduct programs.

Most chemicals, adhesives, sealant, lubricants, etc. West Star uses or willuse are shelf life sensitive.

Some rubber products such as gaskets, hoses, seals, etc, are also lifelimited.

Some complete units, such as fuel pumps, fuel controls, etc. and in somecases some instruments are life sensitive; components within the assemblywill be time sensitive. The vendor normally notes these.

With this type of part, these units will also be serialized. Both shelf life andserial number will have to be verified.

During visual inspection of part, look on the container or paperwork for ‘curedate’, manufacture date’, ‘use by date’ or ‘functionally check after’ stickers orstamps.

All date information written on paperwork must be noted as to what type ofinformation, i.e., cure date, manufacture date, use by date, shelf life, etc.



22.040

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 2

2.040.doc

For product with a date other than an expiration date, notify the purchaserwho will contact the manufacture or distributor to obtain data stating the lifelimit of the product. These documents will then be filed at a central locationwithin each parts room, specific to each production department’s usage. Anda note attached to the part number stating shelf life; date of entry and initialsof who entered the note will be entered into the computer system.

Some product have a life limit but only when it is opened. This product whensold must be marked with a red sharpie as to the date it was sold on the lid ofthe container by the person issuing it to the technician. These products willnot require the indicator on the part record to indicate that it is shelf lifesensitive, however a note explaining the shelf life and how to properly identifythe container when sold must be entered into the computer system.

Upon completion of receiving inspection and pertinent shelf life data noted onvendor paperwork, the receiving inspector will receive the product along witheither the cure date or expiration date, (as described in the first threeparagraphs), into the computer system, which will generate a lot number barcode label that will contain the expiration date of the product.

A report will be run the first work day of each new month indicating whatproduct has expired by lot number. This report will be distributed to partsdepartment personal and any materials or parts determined to be outdatedwill be removed from inventory, adjusted out of the system and disposed ofas directed by the Safety Manager to be in compliance with all federalenvironmental regulations.

4.0 The Team Leader or designee (QC Inspector status is not required), will inspecthis/her assigned flammable-consumable locker at the beginning of each month toensure no shelf life items have expired. If an item is found expired it will bedisposed of in the appropriate colored plastic barrels found throughout thehangar floor.



22.050

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

2.050.doc

Title: ISSUANCE OF PARTS AND MATERIALS FROM INVENTORY

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To provide guidelines to receiving inspectors for proper issuance or parts andmaterials from inventory.

2.0 Procedures:

3.1 Once through the receiving inspection, inventory parts and supplies aresegregated and protected in the storeroom to eliminate possible contamination ordamage. Only parts and supplies that have been through the receivinginspection required by this manual will be issued for a job.

3.2 While issuing parts and materials for use on aircraft and for related maintenance,product support personnel shall handle the parts and materials so as to preventdamage and possible contamination, as applicable. Also, any parts issued to thefloor will have the appropriate documentation accompany the part so thetechnician may place this documentation into the work order, for example 8130.3,statement of conformities, etc.

3.3 As previously discussed, all incoming parts and material are subjected toreceiving inspection. Any parts, which do not pass receiving inspection, aretagged (WSF2162) and placed in the lock-up cage by the Receiving Inspector toawait disposal or return to vendor. A copy of West Star form WSF041“Disposition of Quarantined Parts” shall accompany each quarantined part, whichfails a receiving inspection. Segregation and identification ensures that theseparts or materials are not used or installed on aircraft, engines, or componentsundergoing maintenance by the repair station.

3.4 For shelf life limited materials the red circular adhesive label or marking bypermanent red marker provide a visual warning to product support personnel,technicians and inspectors to check the expiration date. Any materials or partsdetermined to be outdated will be removed from inventory, adjusted out of thesystem and disposed of as directed by the Safety Manager to be in compliancewith all federal environmental regulations.

3.5 Customer supplied parts are to be subjected to the same receiving inspection asany other part ordered and received by West Star.


Blank Page.doc




22.060

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

2.060.doc

Title: TAGGING AND IDENTIFICATION OF PARTS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 This repair station, for segregation and identification of articles, uses thefollowing tags:

FORM # COLOR USE SIGNED BY:WSF026 Orange

SheetPlaced on the glareshield or attached to the side of the aircraftat the start of maintenance. Removed once all departmentwork orders are cleared through QA for OCF or DELIVERY.

QA Inspector

WSF2161 Green Used to identify units or parts that require repairs and ortesting in order to determine airworthiness

All Technicians

WSF2162 Red Used to identify parts determined to be unairworthy andrejected.

Quality ControlInspector

WSF2163 Yellow Used when approving appliances and components notattached to and aircraft, engine or propeller for return toservice.

Quality ControlInspector

WSF2164 Grey Used to identify the origin of serviceable parts that are in astate of disassembly within the repair station undergoingmaintenance. May be attached to the table or cabinet thatcontains such parts.

All Technicians

WSF2167 Blue Used to identify core units or parts with a Warranty value thatis to be returned to originator for warranty consideration/value.

All Technicians

1.2 Detailed instructions and examples of all tags used by the repair station may be found inChapter 5 of this manual.

NOTE: The use of all tags requires that all blocks be filled in. If the information is not availableor is not relevant, “N/A” will be used in those blocks. Do not use the back of any tag for the

identification of any part associated with an aircraft. Use the front of a tag relevant to its needfor identification or status.


Blank Page.doc




22.070

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 2

2.070.doc

Title: REJECTED PARTS DISPOSITION

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this document is to prescribe the methods and practices for thehandling and disposition of rejected aircraft parts by West Star.


2.1 All personnel involved in the disposal of unsalvageable aircraft parts shall befamiliar with the contents of this document.

2.2 Team leaders and/or Lead Technicians shall assure that rejected parts arehandled, labeled, and disposed of according to this document. Team leaders willalso be responsible for ensuring that customers have access to their parts beforedisposal. This is for customer satisfaction purposes; i.e. “Proof” that said partsare indeed unairworthy, and will be disposed of accordingly.

2.3 Department Managers have final responsibility for insuring that rejected parts aredisposed of according to this Certified Procedure.

2.4 The Quality Assurance Manager shall ensure that no unsalvageable or expiredlife-limited parts and materials will be released to any person or organization whomay end up placing the parts and materials back into actual use, due to thecriticality of the part, material failure, and the potential safety threat.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Parts may be “Red Tagged” by a Repair Station Inspector with the appropriate West StarRed Tag, (WSF2162), clearly marked with the following information:

a) Work Order Numberb) Part Namec) Part Numberd) Serial Numbere) Removed Byf) Date Removedg) “N” Numberh) Reason for Rejection

3.2 Each rejected part will either have it’s own red tag, or will be placed in a bin that will betagged and marked (e.g. “Rejected parts only”) by the Team Leader. The “N” numberand Work Order Number shall be marked on the bin. In either case, rejected parts will besegregated from approved parts.



22.070

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 2

2.070.doc

3.3 Method of Disposal

3.3.1 Rejected parts are labeled, “red-tagged”, collected, placed in a secure area,where they will be segregated from serviceable items, destroyed, (to prevent thepossibility of future use), and disposed of accordingly.

3.3.2 Destruction of parts may be accomplished in several different ways:

1) Grinding; 2) Burning;

3) Melting;4) Removal of a major lug or other integral feature;

5) Permanent distortion of parts; 6) Cutting a hole with a cutting torch or saw; or sawing into several small

pieces.

Note: Destruction is not limited to any of the practices mentioned above.

3.3.3 It should also be noted that some rejected/life-limited parts might be released forlegitimate non-flight uses, including training and education, research anddevelopment, or for non-aviation applications. In these cases destruction may notbe appropriate. The following methods will be used to prevent mis-representation:

1) PERMANENTLY marking or stamping the parts, subparts, and material as“NOT SERVICEABLE”, or “UNAIRWORTHY”.

2) Removing original part number identification.3) Removing data plate information.

3.4 Final disposal of rejected parts

3.4.1 Rejected parts will be removed from service area.

3.4.2 They are then stored in a quarantined area, which is segregated from approved parts bythe Team Leader or designee. Only personnel involved in the actual destruction and finaldisposal of the rejected parts shall have access to this quarantined area.

3.4.3 Upon completion of the work scope, the rejected parts will be offered to the customer atwhich time he will be informed that he has final responsibility of the disposition.

3.4.4 If the customer refuses, the rejected parts are then destroyed and disposed of accordingto this section.



22.080

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

2.080.doc

Title: LIFE LIMITED PARTS DISPOSITION

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this document is to prescribe the methods and practices for thehandling and disposition of life limited parts.


2.1 All personnel responsible for the temporary or permanent removal of life limitedparts from type-certificated aircraft shall be familiar with the contents of thisdocument.

2.2 Team leaders and/or Lead Technicians shall assure that life limited parts arehandled, labeled, or disposed of according to this document.

2.3 The Quality Assurance Manager shall ensure that no unsalvageable or expiredlife-limited parts will be released to any person or organization who may end upplacing the parts back into actual use, due to the criticality of the part, materialfailure, and the potential safety threat.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 If the life limited part is to be removed temporarily to facilitate maintenance, the part mustbe identified by using the West Star Gray Tag, (WSF2164 Identification Tag) and clearlymarked as indicated in the Quality Control Manual Doc. No. 5.050 para. 3.9. If the lifelimited part is removed with numerous other parts and placed in a container, on a table orin a cabinet, the identification tag would not be required. However, the table, cabinet orcontainer must be clearly identified with the aircraft information from which the part wasremoved.

3.2 If the life limited part is to be removed for repair, it shall be tagged using the West StarGreen Tag, (WSF2161 Repairable Part Tag) and clearly marked as indicated in theQuality Control Manual Doc. No. 5.050 para 3.6. Then forwarded to the parts room fordisposition to a vendor for repair, overhaul or exchange.

3.3 Life limited parts may be “Red Tagged” by a Repair Station Inspector with the appropriateWest Star Red Tag, (WSF2162 Unairworthy Part), clearly marked as indicated in theQuality Control Manual Doc. No. 5.050 para 3.7. If the part is tagged in this manner, theprocedures indicated in the Quality Control Manual, (Rejected Parts Disposition) Doc.No. 2.070 must be followed.

3.4 All life limited parts must be handled in such a way that the preservation of the life historyof the part is maintained. This must be accomplished with clear and concisedocumentation.


Blank Page.doc




33.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

3.000.doc

CHAPTER 3

INSPECTION SYSTEM


Blank Page.doc




33.005

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

3.005.doc

Title: WORK ORDER SYSTEM FLOW USING THE CORRIDOR PROGRAM

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define sequence and methods to be followed within the Repair Station to ensure astructured Work Order system in the Corridor program. The Corridor system is a windows-based program that manages customer-related information including aircraftmaintenance records, parts/services requests, sales orders, and billing. These recordsare organized through a system of process modules and related data entry windows.

NOTE: West Star, during the course of maintenance, inspections and/or alterations will useElectronic Signatures for individual Squawk/Step sign offs and final return to service on thework order. Ref: Appendix C of this manual for Electronic Signature procedures

2.0 Procedures:

2.1 Sales department will create a work order quote based on customers request ofmaintenance, repair or alteration.

2.2 The customer accepts the quote.2.3 Aircraft arrives and the Central Billing office will create a work order directly from the

quote in the Corridor system.2.4 Squawks/Steps are generated in the Corridor system based on customer incoming

and/or inspection findings. As an option, when discrepancies are discovered, the technician will use WSF 018,

“Inspection Job Aid” form as a way to initially record discrepancies. Once thediscrepancies have been imputed from this form into the Corridor work order system,WSF 018 will be discarded.

2.5 Parts and services are requested through the Corridor system to the purchasingdepartment.

Parts in stock: Request is filled by purchasing and part is delivered to the productionfloor.

Parts not in stock: Request is made to purchasing, part is ordered, received,approved through receiving inspection and delivered to the production floor.

Services: Request is made and filled by the purchasing department. Part serviced isreceived, approved through receiving inspection and delivered to the productionfloor.

2.6 Discrepancies are signed off, inspected and functionally tested as required by authorizedpersonal.

2.7 Quality Assurance inspectors verify content, accuracy and compliance of eachsquawk/step. Once satisfied, will Double Inspect the squawk as required.

2.8 Once Quality Assurance is satisfied, a return to service squawk will be generated in theCorridor System to be signed off by a Qualified Inspector.

2.9 A log entry will be generated from the content of the work order as required, signed off bya Qualified Inspector and the log entry will be given to the owner/operator.

2.10 A work order detail report will be generated before the aircraft departs with a wetsignature from a QA inspector on the last page. This report constitutes the customer’scopy of the signed work order.


Blank Page.doc




33.010

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 3

3.010.doc

Title: INSPECTION SYSTEM FLOW

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define sequence and methods to be followed within the Repair Station to ensureinspection continuity & quality.

NOTE: West Star, during the course of maintenance, inspections and/or alterations will useElectronic Signatures for individual Squawk/Step sign offs and final return to service on workorders. Ref: Appendix C of this manual for Electronic Signature procedures.


2.1 When the customer approves work to be accomplished by the repair station by signingoff the Work Order Quote the Work Order Quote will become the work order in theCorridor work order system. In the event a Work Order Quote has not been generatedthe Central Billing office or Team Leader will open the work order in the Corridor system.In any event the Corridor system will automatically generate a work order number.

2.2 A Maintenance Release Sheet (WSF026) will be issued for each aircraft. Each WSF026sheet will contain the work order number, aircraft registration number, and departmentopening the work order.

2.3 All work orders will be closed and accounted for by the inspection office.

2.4 QA audits and accountability will be ongoing.

2.5 Active aircraft records will be maintained in the inspection office until the aircraft departs.

2.6 Upon completion and departure, copy of work orders, forms, original tags and certificates willbe forwarded to the customer and a copy will be kept in West Star archive records forretention in accordance with FAR 145.219. (Records of work/inspections performed shall beretained for a minimum of two (2) years in paper and/or digital format).

2.7.1 Prior to return to service, all aircraft work documents will be reviewed forproper and sufficient signoff by wet or digital signature.

2.8 QA or QC inspectors as required, shall perform all inspection functions contained in thischapter.

3.0 Preliminary Inspections

3.1 All items to undergo maintenance will be given a preliminary inspection prior to starting work.This inspection will be to determine the state of preservation and to note any obvious defectsto include compliance of all applicable Airworthiness Directives. A functional test may beperformed as part of the preliminary inspection if deemed appropriate. Any discrepanciesresulting from this inspection will be recorded on the work order within the Corridor workorder system. This Preliminary Inspection will be created and signed off in the Corridor WorkOrder System in the form of a squawk.

NOTE: Verification of applicable Airworthiness Directives will be accomplished during the courseof manufacture recommended inspection(s), Overhauls and repairs.



33.010

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 3

3.010.doc

4.0 Hidden Damage Inspection (FAR 145.211(c)(1)(iii)

4.1 Prior to starting work on an aircraft, engine, component, or accessory that has been involvedin an accident, the aircraft, engine, component, or accessory will be subjected to a hiddendamage inspection.

4.2 This inspection will search for hidden damage in areas adjacent to the known damagedareas and/or in the case of deterioration, a thorough review of all similar materials orequipment in a given system or structural area.

4.3 The scope of this inspection will be governed by the type of unit involved with specialconsideration given to previous operating history, malfunction or defect reports, servicebulletins and airworthiness directives applicable to the unit involved.

4.4 The Quality Control Inspector who performs this inspection is responsible for recording alldiscrepancies found on the work order. The performing inspector will sign off the hiddendamage inspection on the work order indicating completion of the hidden damage inspection.

5.0 In Process Inspection

5.1 The appropriately qualified and certificated person (see repair station roster) isresponsible for ensuring that progressive (in-process) inspections are performedproperly, and that the inspection results are acceptable. The requirement for andfrequencies of the in-process inspections shall be determined by the applicablemanufacturer’s Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (e.g., maintenance, repair, andoverhaul manuals), Service Bulletins, service letters, Airworthiness Directives, and/orother data acceptable to or approved by the FAA.

5.2 When a record of an inspection by dimension or test is required by the applicabletechnical data, the results will be recorded in the appropriate section or form andincluded in the repair station’s documentation. The inspections shall be recorded with awet signature, initials or digital signature on the document.

5.3 Whenever an in-process inspection or work scope determines that a maintenance step orfunction has been accomplished incorrectly, the work will be repeated and inspected toensure proper completion.

5.4 Whenever RII’s are performed only inspectors appropriately trained and authorized underthe particular air carrier/commercial operator’s program will be authorized to performrequired inspections for that customer. Those inspectors will be specified by name andoccupational title. The air carrier/commercial operator will provide the RII list, which willbe controlled by the Quality Assurance Manager.

6.0 Continuity of Inspection

6.1 All forms upon which work performed is recorded, have been designed to show the wetsignature, initials or digital signature of the technician or repairman who performs orsupervises the work as well as the wet signature, initials or digital signature of the QualityControl Inspector who accepts/approves the work.

6.2 For work in process on a specific item, all required inspections shall be performed, suchthat the final inspection, to determine airworthiness, does not require disassembly of the



33.010

06/01/10Rev. 63 of 3

3.010.doc

item. A Quality Control Inspector will verify that specified procedures required duringassembly, modifications or repairs were followed and those inspections including NDT,tests and calibrations were performed in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.

6.3 A project involving work other than inspection only, may not be approved for return toservice unless a repair station Quality Control Inspector has accepted the work.

6.3 In order to ensure inspection continuity, a turnover book, or books, will be kept in alocation(s) determined by the Director of Maintenance. The turnover book(s) will be usedat shift change whenever face to face briefing and discussion is not possible in order tobrief the incoming inspector regarding the status of inspection tasks currently in work.The vacating Quality Control Inspector completes the turnover book at the end of theshift. The information entered will be identified by aircraft registration number and willinclude the details of specific inspection tasks that have been started but not completed.Additionally, a Quality Assurance Inspector signs off the “Double Inspect” of the squawkby electronic signature in the Corridor work order system or by initialing the final reviewblock on forms (WSF.2000/2001) to indicate satisfactory review of work order content forcontinuity of inspection.

6.4 The continuity of inspection shall only be accepted upon the Quality Department’sverification of completion of the preliminary, hidden damage and final inspection.

7.0 Final Return to Service

7.1 Upon completion of inspection(s), West Star will create maintenance log entries showingin detail the inspections accomplished, repairs accomplished as a result of thoseinspections either within a log entry or FAA form 337 if the repair is major. Thesemaintenance log entries will meet all the requirements as indicated in 14CFR Part 43.

8.0 Failed Inspection

8.1 In the event an article does not meet the manufactures requirements for airworthiness asa result of an inspection, the OEM manuals will be reviewed for repair to include directparts replacement. If none is found, with the assistance of the QA department,production will develop a repair, the QA inspector will determine if the repair is major orminor. In the event it is major, QA will consult with the engineering department to purserepair approval through a DER and issuance of a FAA form 8110-3 or field approvalthrough the local FSDO office.

9.0 Customer Required Inspection Items (RII) FAR Part 135 - ONLY.

9.1 The customer will furnish the Repair Station a list of RII items, their maintenance inspectioninstructions and/or forms for these items. Only appropriately certificated individuals whohave been properly trained, qualified and authorized may be utilized to inspect these items.The air carrier or commercial operator must designate personnel who are authorized toinspect Required Inspection Items. The mechanic assigned to an RII task shall have suchinspector witness all required phases of the operation.

9.2 All inspections, maintenance and alterations not completed due to work interruptions will beproperly completed prior to approving an article for return to service.


Blank Page.doc




33.011

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

3.011.doc

Title: INSPECTION PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS (14CFR §145.155)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define the inspection personnel requirements for conducting day to day operations at the West StarRepair Station.


2.1 Quality and Production management must ensure a sufficient number of inspectors to inspect the workperformed under the repair station certificate and operations specifications.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Inspection personnel are required to be thoroughly familiar with all inspection methods, techniques andequipment used in their area of responsibility to determine the airworthiness of an article undergoingmaintenance, repair or alterations. All personnel must also maintain proficiency in the use of various types ofinspection aids to be used for inspection of the particular items undergoing inspection. Current specificationsinvolving inspection tolerances, limits and procedures as set forth by the manufacturer of the productundergoing inspection and other forms of inspection information such as FAA airworthiness directives,manufacturers' bulletins, etc., shall be maintained and made available to all inspection personnel.

3.2 Inspection personnel should be considered proficient in their inspection duties assigned within 90 days if thatduty was accomplished within the previous 90 days.

3.3 Inspectors’ proficiency and familiarization will be assured by supervisory personnel by knowing abilities andlimitations of their individual employee’s.

3.3 Inspection personnel assigned to Repair Station Operations are required to familiarize themselves with FAAregulations applicable to such operations with particular emphasis on the following:

FAR Part 21 Certification Procedures For Products and Parts FAR Part 23 Airworthiness Standards: Normal, Utility and Acrobatic Category Airplanes. FAR Part 25 Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Airplanes FAR Part 27 Airworthiness Standards: Normal Category Rotorcraft FAR Part 29 Airworthiness Standards: Transport Category Rotorcraft FAR Part 33 Airworthiness Standards: Aircraft Engines FAR Part 35 Airworthiness Standards: Propellers FAR Part 39 Airworthiness Directives FAR Part 43 Maintenance, Preventive Maintenance, Rebuilding and Alteration FAR Part 45 Identification and Registration Marking FAR Part 65 Certification: Airmen Other Than Flight Crew- members FAR Part 91 General Operating and Flight Rules FAR Part 121 Certification and Operations: Domestic, Flag, and Supplemental Air Carriers and

Commercial Operators of Large Aircraft FAR Part 125 Certification and Operation Rules for Certain Large Airplanes FAR Part 133 Rotorcraft External-Load Operations FAR Part 135 Air Taxi Operators and Commercial Operators FAR Part 137 Agricultural Aircraft Operations FAR Part 145 Repair Stations

3.3 No person may perform inspection functions without an Inspection Authorization (WSF053A) form approvedby the QA Manager.

3.4 No person may perform inspections for which they are not authorized, as indicated on the InspectionAuthorization Card, (WSF053A).


Blank Page.doc




33.012

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

3.012.doc

Title: TECHNICAL DATA CONTROL (14CFR §145.109 (d))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To ensure that all technical data required is current and to the latest revision.

Note: Back up personnel for the Technical Data Program, to ensure compliance with this manual, has been assigned to anyQuality Assurance inspector within the inspection department.


2.1 It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Manager to ensure that all technical data required is current.

2.2 West Star will not begin work on any product unless the mechanic has the current applicable technical data to performthe function.

2.3 All technical data or technical information not controlled will be marked as, "UNCONTROLLED or for “REFERENCEONLY".

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Paper Technical Library

3.1.1 For each department, the Technical Publications Coordinator will maintain the technical library in acurrent condition.

3.1.2 The Technical Publications Coordinator will insert revisions into the paper manuals, as the newrevisions become available.

3.1.3 The Technical Publications Coordinator will notify the Program Managers and Team leads via emailwhen the new revisions have been posted in the manuals.

3.1.4 Libraries include manufacturer’s service/maintenance manuals, service letters, service bulletins,airworthiness directives, FAR’s, manufacturer’s overhaul manuals and installation manuals for aircraftengine or components to be repaired, overhauled, or altered as authorized by the repair stationoperation specifications.

3.1.5 Subscriptions to revisions for such technical manuals will be purchased and maintained.

3.1.6 Manual status will be maintained using a computer database. Verification of subscription statuscurrency will take place each twelve months by the Quality Assurance Manager or designee utilizingthe computer data base as a means to notify production personnel at the beginning of each monthwhich manuals are coming due within the next 30 days of that month.

3.1.7 Federal aviation regulations, aircraft and equipment manufacturer’s inspection and maintenancestandards will be the primary reference for work performed by this repair station.

3.2 Electronic Technical Library

3.2.1 Reference Appendix C of this manual for policies and procedures.


Blank Page.doc




33.020

07/01/07Rev.31 of 1

3.020.doc

Title: FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE OF MAINTAINED ARTICLES (14CFR § 145.211 (vii))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To establish a means of ensuring that the maintained, inspected or altered article, and all associatedpaperwork and log entries are complete and accurate prior to final release of the article per therequirements of 14CFR Part 43.


2.1 It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Inspector closing the work order package to insure that alldocumentation is completed and accounted for and that the maintenance log entries meet therequirements of 14CFR Part 43 and have been reviewed and signed by the Quality Control Inspectorresponsible for the work scope and then place the maintenance log entries into the aircraft, engine, APUor propeller log books as required.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The Quality Assurance Manager will designate personnel of the Repair Station who are authorized tomake entries in the aircraft log and/or provide the aircraft a final inspection and return to service per therequirements of 14 CFR Part 43. Each individual who is authorized must be properly certificated per therequirements of 14 CFR Part 65. The Quality Assurance Manager will maintain a “Return to Service”roster, (WSF009) of authorized personnel updating it as necessary to reflect any personnel changes andadditional capabilities acquired by listed personnel.

Note: Reference the Quality Control Doc. # 3.010 for more detailed description of the Inspection andfinal return to service procedures.

3.2 In the event an Operational Check Flight is required to complete the inspection/ repair/modification, alldocumentation shall be completed and accounted for prior to the flight with the exception ofdocumentation pertaining to the flight itself. After completion of the flight, any discrepancies foundduring the flight will be created in the Corridor work order system that will follow the last originaldiscrepancy to distinguish the discrepancy as one generated by the required flight. The inspector on theflight will record the discrepancy items and the crew will record the flight as required per FAR 91.407(b).Once the flight discrepancies have been corrected a return to service statement will be applied to thework order after the last flight discrepancy as required.

3.3 The West Star (WSF080) Sticker or equivalent statement in the work order shall:

3.3.1 Make reference to only the specific work performed by West Star.

3.3.2 State that the work was properly completed in accordance with the appropriate instructions forcontinued airworthiness or maintenance instructions manual or other FAA approved/accepteddata.

3.3.3 State that insofar as the work performed by West Star, no known unairworthy condition existsand is approved for return to service.

3.3.4 Be signed by a person authorized by West Star Quality Assurance Manager whom can belocated in the personal roster.

Note: It should be emphasized that West Star shall only be responsible for the Return toService of the work performed by West Star.


Blank Page.doc




33.030

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

3.030.doc

Title: MAJOR REPAIRS AND MAJOR ALTERATIONS (14 CFR §43 appendix A)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this section is to address the requirement for Major Repairs andAlterations.


2.1 It will be the responsibility of all repair station personnel to use only FAA-approved technical data when it accomplishes a major repair or major alterationas required in 14CFR §145.201.

2.2 The following personnel have the authority to classify a repair/alteration as Majoror Minor:

Accountability Manager/Quality Assurance Manager Quality Assurance Team Leader Quality Assurance Inspector

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The personnel stated in para. 2.1 of this document will refer to 14 CFRParts 1 and 43 (Appendix A) as guidance to determine if arepair/alteration is classified as major or minor.

3.2 Records of major alterations will be made on FAA Form 337 and majorrepairs as required. After completion, the original FAA Form 337 shall besupplied to the customer. A copy will be made part of the work orderpackage for the repair station records, and a copy will be forwarded to:

Federal Aviation Administration Aircraft RegistryMike Monroney Aeronautical CenterPO Box 25504Oklahoma City, OK 73125

3.3 Those personnel authorized to return to service a major repair oralteration by signing block 7 of the FAA form 337 can be found in therepair station personnel roster (WSF009), and the Inspection Authoritycard (WSF053A), (Ref. forms index in Appendix B of this manual), issuedto each inspector.

4.0 Obtaining Approval to Perform a Major Repair or Alteration:

4.1 All repairs and alterations will be determined major or minor and approved byone of the above stated personnel in para. 2.2.

4.2 The method of approval shall be accomplished using West Star form WSF802(Ref QCM Chapter 5, Doc. # 5.070 for instructions).



33.030

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

3.030.doc

4.3 The personnel listed in para. 2.2 of this document may return the WSF802without approval to the technician if insufficient information is contained on theform.

4.4 The personnel approving the WSF802 will consult with engineering, if required,prior to making the “Method of Approval” decision.

4.5 All proposed repairs and alterations may only be submitted to the personnellisted in para. 2.2 of this document and not engineering. If engineering isrequired, it will be decided by the approval personnel at which time they willforward the WSF802 to the engineering department for resolution.

Note: Technicians requesting approvals for repairs or alterations using the WSF802 form may consult withengineering for appropriate content of the form before submission to the QA department.



33.040

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 2

3.040.doc

Title: CRITICAL INSPECTION ITEMS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 This document defines those maintenance and inspection items that requireinspection by a Category I Quality Control Inspector. These items are defined ascritical inspection items. The position of Category I QC Inspector is also definedin West Star Repair Station Manual Chapter 2, Doc. No. 2.090.


2.1 All West Star technicians shall be familiar with the contents of this document.

2.2 The Quality Assurance Manager shall determine which items are classified asCritical Inspection Items.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The following maintenance/inspection actions require sign off in the Corridorwork order system by a Category I Quality Control Inspector, prior to return toservice.

1) The following major airframe maintenance events: Wing installation Horizontal and vertical stabilizer installation Tip tank or fuel bladder Landing gear and landing gear component installation (excluding wheels and

brakes) Windshield installation Crew seat and seat stop installation Security of fasteners, fittings and hardware – especially correct torque values

and safeties. Cable tensions Integrity of electrical, fuel, hydraulic, etc. connections Correct routing of cables, wires, lines, hoses, etc. Proper operation of pulleys, rod ends, sectors, etc. Proper actuation of affected components and systems Proper alignment of affected items Leak test or certification of the pitot static system to meet the requirements of

14CFR § 91.411 & 91.413. Functional and leak tests for Category 1 items.

2) Installation and rigging of secondary flight controls and trim tabs.3) Installation and rigging of primary flight control actuation systems, such as

cables, control rods, push-pull tubes, etc. NOTE: Servomotors attached tocapstans, which may be removed and re-installed without removing the capstan,are excluded.

4) Installation and rigging of secondary flight control actuation systems.5) Stall warning systems including installation, repair or adjustment.



33.040

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 2

3.040.doc

6) Stall strips, boundary layer energizers, vortex generators, or other wing stalldevices. Included are adjustments and installation of such devices.

7) Modification or repair of any primary structure, including the pressure vessel.This requirement includes manufacturer’s kits and major service bulletins.

8) The following engine maintenance/inspection events: Engine assembly progress inspections. Engine final or “build up” inspections following engine overhaul, hot section

inspection, MPI (TFE Major Periodic Inspection), CZI (TFE Core ZoneInspection) or major disassembly/re-assembly – prior to installation or test cellrun.

Engine final inspections following a test cell run, if the engine is not beinginstalled by West Star.

Engine installation, including all rigging, set up and adjustments. Engine accessory components such as a main fuel control, set up and rigging. Security of fasteners, fittings and hardware – especially correct torque values

and safeties. Integrity of electrical, fuel, hydraulic, etc. connections Correct routing of cables, wires, lines, hoses, etc. Proper operation of pulleys, rod ends, etc. Proper actuation of affected components and systems Proper alignment of affected items

9) Engine Inlet installation.10) Thrust reverser installation and rigging.11) Propeller installation.12) Any additional items, which are specifically listed on a Critical Inspection

Checklist for a specific airframe, engine, or component.

4.0 Critical Inspection Requirements4.2 Critical Inspections may be performed by appropriately qualified Category I

Inspectors with the following exceptions: A Category I Inspector may not perform a Critical Inspection if he or she has

performed maintenance on the portion of the project that requires a CriticalInspection.

4.1 Completion of a Critical Inspection shall be documented and signed off by a Category IInspector in the following way:

When a squawk has been determined to require a Critical Inspection sign off theCategory 1 inspector will sign off by way of wet signature/initial or electronicsignature within the Corridor work order system.

By completing and signing the appropriate portions of the proper Critical InspectionItem Checklist form for the aircraft, engine, or component being inspected.



33.050

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

3.050.doc

Title: CORRECTIVE ACTION PROCEDURES ON DEFICIENCIES (14CFR § 145.211 (ix))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To establish a means of ensuring corrective action for deficiencies.


2.1 It is the responsibility of the Accountability Manager to determine when a correctiveaction is appropriate. Either, prior to the work being approved for return to service orafter the work has been completed and approved for return to service.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Whenever an inspection or work scope determines that a maintenance step orfunction has been accomplished incorrectly, the work will be repeated andinspected to ensure proper completion.

3.2 The process will be reviewed to ensure that the improper work was not the resultof a deficiency in the process instructions(s), facilities, equipment, tooling ormaterial. Although this review will not be documented, it will be the responsibilityof all personnel to bring any deficiencies to the immediate attention of theAccountability Manager.

3.3 Whenever it is discovered that an improper maintenance, preventivemaintenance or alteration action was approved for return to service, this repairstation will immediately rectify the situation with the customer.

3.4 The repair station’s Accountability Manager will determine whether the incidentshould be reported to the FAA under the Voluntary Disclosure procedurecontained in Advisory Circular 00-58 as revised.


Blank Page.doc




33.060

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 2

3.060.doc

Title: PROCEDURES FOR WORK PERFORMED FOR CERTAIN OPERATORS,Subject to Parts 121, 125, 129, or 135 (14CFR §145.205)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define requirements to be used to ensure compliance with certain operators.


2.1 When this repair station performs maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations for aircarriers or commercial operators holding a FAR Part 121,125 or 135 or 129 certificate, it will do soonly with the technical data and methods appropriate to that operator’s FAA-approved program.

2.2 If the repair station determines that a deviation from the operators program is required, the repairstation must notify the operator immediately. This includes technical data used for repairs oralterations. The repair station should concur with the operator that they have no technicalobjections to that deviation.

2.3 If a repair or alteration is not covered in the manufacturer’s manuals, then the repair station willmake a determination if the repair or alteration is major or minor as outlined in the QCM Doc. No.3.030 with concurrence from the operator.

2.4 If the repair station is providing maintenance using an Airworthiness Directive with an alternativemethod of compliance (AMOC) within the AD, the repair station will provide documentation that theAMOC is FAA approved to the operator, which is typically in the form of a letter from the ACOapproving the AMOC.

2.5 West Star will provide all training documentation required by the operator.

2.6 Since air carrier/commercial operators customer requirements are generally set forth on thepurchase order or repair request documentation, this repair station will ensure compliance withthose instructions by:

2.6.1 Ensuring that all air carrier and commercial operator customers are aware of the RepairStation & Quality Control manuals and procedures used to perform and recordmaintenance on articles sent for maintenance, preventive maintenance or alteration.

2.6.2 Documenting in the Work Order Package any special instructions received from the aircarrier or commercial operator to perform and record maintenance, preventivemaintenance or alteration on its articles and for retention and disposition of all associateddocuments.

2.6.3 Asking all new air carrier or commercial operator customers to provide on its purchase orrepair order the exact information to be used in recording and performing maintenance,preventive maintenance or alteration on its behalf;

2.6.4 Keeping a record of all communications between West Star and the owner/operator in thework order file.

2.7 In addition, through audits by the air carriers and commercial operators, this repair station willensure continued compliance with the customer’s requirements with respect to record retention,training of personnel and other matters covered by the customer’s maintenance manualprocedures.

2.8 If there is any question as to what technical data is to be used at any time during performance ofwork, it will be brought to the attention of the Director of Maintenance for resolution with thecustomer.



33.060

10/01/09Rev. 52 of 2

3.060.doc

2.9 Each aircraft owner/operator will provide West Star with a list of RII inspection items.

2.10 Inspectors performing RII inspections for air carriers or commercial operators must be specificallydesignated by name and title as RII qualified by the owner/operator. The decision regarding anyinspection may not be countermanded except by inspection unit, supervisory personnel or byadministrative personnel having overall responsibility for both the inspection unit and maintenancefunctions. The override must be brought to the attention and approved by the owner/operator.



33.070

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

3.070.doc

Title: REPORTS OF DEFECTS OR UNAIRWORTHY CONDITIONS (14CFR §145.221)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To define procedures used when generating and reporting defects or malfunctions found onan aircraft or accessory.

2.0 Responsibility:

2.1 The Quality Assurance Manager or designee, is responsible for completingMalfunction/Defect Reports in accordance with FAR Part §145.221 on the appropriate forms.Such reports will be submitted to the Administrator and the operator within 96 hours afterdiscovery.

2.2 It is the responsibility of any mechanic or inspector to report immediately any and all defectsor malfunctions found on an aircraft or accessory at West Star to the Quality AssuranceManager.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Online-Service Difficulty / M or D Entry Form

3.1.1 Prior to initiating MDR/SDR reports for FAR Part §121, §125 or §135 Operators, QAwill consult with that Operators Quality Representative to determine whether WestStar or the Operator is to file the report. West Star will fill out the MDR/SDRregardless and document on the report who was the Quality Representative thatsent in the report along with date and time.

3.1.2 When West Star is responsible for the filing, West Star will report to the FAA within96 hours after it discovers any serious defect in, or other recurring unairworthycondition of an aircraft, power plant, or propeller, or any component thereof. Thereport will be made utilizing the Online Service Difficulty Report site, describing thedefect or malfunction completely without withholding any pertinent information. Twocopies of the online entry form will be printed. One copy will be kept in the QAdepartment and the second will be forwarded to the FSDO. The use of this form isself explanatory on the Web site:

https://av-info.faa.gov/SDRX/Secured/Login.aspx

Note: See the QA Manager for the user name and password to login into this site

3.1.3 If the defect or malfunction could result in an imminent hazard to flight, the RepairStation will contact the FSDO by phone to ensure they have been notifiedimmediately.

NOTE: A sample of the online form can be located in the Quality Control Manual Doc. No.5.100.


Blank Page.doc




33.080

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

3.080.doc

Title: QUALIFYING AND SURVEILLING NON-CERTIFICATED PERSONS (14CFR §145.211)

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 Establishing a means to qualify and provide surveillance of non-certificated personswho perform maintenance, prevention maintenance, or alterations for the repairstation.

2.0 Responsibility:

2.1 The Quality Assurance Manager in conjunction with the non-certificated personssupervisor is responsible to ensure that any non-certificated persons who performmaintenance, preventative maintenance or alteration for the Repair Station areeither directly supervised or qualified to do so.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Qualifying Non-Certificated persons

3.1.1 The Director of Maintenance is responsible for making the determination ofemploying non-certificated persons at this repair station by review of pastwork or educational history and the interview process.

3.2.1 Once hired by this repair station, the non-certificated person will be assignedto a Supervisor/Team Lead who is responsible for that persons continualsupervised familiarization with Repair Station policy and procedures, whichwill be accomplished by reference of internal policy data, on the job trainingand testing.

3.2.2 If, at a time determined by the non-certificated persons Supervisor/TeamLead, that person is capable of performing the duties required of that personby this repair station, that person would be considered qualified to performthat specific work as assigned.

3.2.3 It will be the responsibility of the non-certificated person’s Supervisor/TeamLead; to perform surveillance and record activities to ensure the person isprogressing in his/her familiarization and training.

3.2.4 Depending on the task assigned and proficiency of a non-certificatedperson, that person will be considered qualified within 90 days.

3.2.5 The non-certificated person(s) will be encourage to acquire their certificationas indicated in 14CFR Part 65. This will be required for them to become aninspector.

Note: 14 CFR 65.101, (a)(5)(i) requires 18 months of practical experience to beeligible for a repairman certificate.


Blank Page.doc




44.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

4.000.doc

CHAPTER 4

CALIBRATION SYSTEM


Blank Page.doc




44.010

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 2

4.010.doc

Title: CALIBRATION SYSTEM (14CFR §145.211 (vii))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To specify procedures for controlling the accuracy of measuring and test equipment,(M&TE), and measurement standards so as to assure their reliability. Any tool used tomeasure, test, repair, or inspect must be calibrated. To ensure compliance of ISO 10012-1:1992(E) (previously known as MIL-STD-45662A) & Federal Aviation Regulationrequirements.

Note: Back up personnel for the Calibration Program, to ensure compliance with this manual, hasbeen assigned to any Quality Assurance inspector within the inspection department.

2.0 References:

2.1 The following documents were used in the preparation of this procedure:

ISO 10012-1: 1992(E) Quality Assurance requirements for measuring equipmentPart 1: Metrological confirmation system for measuring equipmentDated 1993-05-01-as revised.

ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 American National Standard for Calibration – CalibrationLaboratoriesMeasuring and Test Equipment – General RequirementsDated July 27, 1994-as revised.

West Star Aviation Quality Control Manual Dated – as revised.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Any tool, gauge, device, meter, etc. which relays data to the user by means of a dial,digital read out, meter, needle, number, etc. shall be evaluated for the requirement to becalibrated. The following criteria shall be used to evaluate such precision gauges or toolsfor calibration.

3.1.1 Every device described in 3.1, used to determine eligibility for return to service,of any aircraft, aircraft engine, or aircraft component shall be calibrated. Anyitem described in 3.1 used for the final setting of any aircraft, engine, orcomponent, prior to return to service, shall be calibrated.

3.1.2 Any device as described in 3.1 used to set, adjust, test, measure, check,calibrate, etc. an aircraft, engine or component, during maintenance orinspection, which has a specified tolerance or range, shall be calibrated.Examples of words or symbols which denote a tolerance or range are ±, <, >, ≥,less than, greater than, at least, minimum, maximum, within, before, after, etc.

3.1.3 Following is a partial list of items that always require calibration. Torquewrenches, tire and strut gauges, cable tension meters, fuel system calibrationdevices, devices used to check control surface movement, aircraft weighingscales, engine stretch fixtures, cylinder compression test gauges, etc.



44.010

10/01/09Rev. 52 of 2

4.010.doc

3.1.4 If a device is not used as described in 3.1.1 through 3.1.3, calibration is notrequired. Examples of such devices are meters, gauges, etc., which are usedfor trouble shooting purposes only. Extreme caution must be exercised toensure that such devices are never used in a situation requiring acalibrated device.

3.1.5 Some devices with no read-out capability may still require calibration. Any tool orgauge must be calibrated if the device has internal components, which ifnot properly calibrated, will affect the information gathered using thatdevice. An example is an electrical system breakout box, with no meters, dials,etc, but with known internal resistances. If the value of the internal resistancechanges, the device will impart incorrect information. Such an item would requireperiodic calibration of the internal resistance.

3.1.6 Any device as described in 3.1 which is brought into this facility as new will beconsidered in calibration for one year unless it is to be used as a MasterCalibration device. Unless the new device comes from the manufacturer with acertificate of calibration indicating it had been calibrated to a NIST standard, acalibration certificate will be generated for that device.

A tool must also be calibrated if it has components, which if not properly calibrated, willadversely affect the quality of the product produced using that tool. An example of such atool is a terminal crimper, which will fabricate inadequate electrical connections if the dies are notwithin specified dimensions.



44.020

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 1

4.020.doc

Title: CALIBRATION LABELING

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To specify procedures for labeling of measuring and test equipment, (M&TE). Any tool used tomeasure, test, repair, or inspect must be labeled in accordance with the following procedure.

2.0 Labeling Procedures:

2.1 All items described in paragraph 3.0 of this document shall be placarded, labeled or other wisemarked for calibration purposes.

2.2 All items that require calibration, as previously defined, shall be marked in a manner that will endurethe normal use of the device for the period of calibration. The marking will include at least the dateat which calibration is next due.

2.3 Every item that requires calibration shall be labeled or marked in a way that will give the item aunique identity. For example, serial number, asset control number, ID number, etc. For West Star,this number will normally be a “WSC” number. “WSC” denotes that the item is a West Star oremployee tool, and that the item requires calibration, and “WSC” is followed by a unique three-digitnumber. This marking shall be permanent or shall be maintained in a viable and legible manner.

NOTE: As of the date of this revision, tools requiring calibration will have the WSC prefix omitted tobe replaced by the letter “C” as a suffix to a three number identifier. This will identify the tool asrequiring calibration. If the letter “C” is not present, the tool does not require calibration. Inaddition, some tools will have a letter designation preceding the three number identifier, to indicateits use on a particular article. For example: L325C is a tool requiring calibration, (C) and is used inthe Lear program, (L). If there is no prefix letter the tool is employee owned requiring calibration.For example: 123C.

2.4 In the case of instruments, tools, gauges that require calibration before each use, but do not requireperiodic calibration, the device shall be labeled with exactly the following words’ “CALIBRATEBEFORE EACH USE”. Examples of such devices are NDT instruments that must be calibratedwith a specific standard appropriate to each inspection. Such marking shall be permanent or shallbe maintained.

2.5 All items described in 3.1.4 of this document, which are not calibrated, shall be labeled in a mannerthat is visible and legible. Such items shall be marked or labeled with exactly the following words,“REFERENCE ONLY”. No items so labeled may be used for any purpose defined in 3.1.1 through3.1.3 of this document. This marking shall be permanent or maintained.

2.6 In some instances, it may be desirable to indicate those instruments and tools that do not requirecalibration. Examples of such items are those devices with no read-out devices. Such items shallbe marked or labeled with exactly the following words, “NO CALIBRATION REQUIRED”. Caremust be exercised when labeling such devices. No device shall be labeled in this manner withoutthe approval of a Quality Assurance Inspector. The information in 3.1.5 must be considered.

2.7 In some instances, a precision gauge or tool may be marked or labeled with exactly the followingwords, “CALIBRATION LIMITED TO”. This label may be used when a device is only calibrated fora portion of the readout range, or if the calibration accuracy is limited. For example, a gauge maybe limited to ± 4% accuracy, or a 0 to 1000 psi gauge is only used (and calibrated) in the 0 to 500psi range. This label shall be used in conjunction with a normal “Cal. Due” sticker.


Blank Page.doc




44.030

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 2

4.030.doc

Title: CALIBRATION INTERVALS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To specify guidelines for the interval requirements of measuring and test equipment, (M&TE).Any tool used to measure, test, repair, or inspect must follow the guidelines in this document.

2.0 INTERVAL PROCEDURES:

2.1 Each item that requires calibration shall have a calibration interval, which is determinedas follows.

2.1.1 The nominal calibration interval for controlled devices at West Star shall be oneyear (365-day cycle). Exceptions are defined as follows.

2.1.2 Any weight with a fixed mass and density may have a calibration interval of fiveyears. Any device, which uses a weight of fixed mass and density formeasurement, may have a calibration interval of five years. Examples of suchitems are a dead weight tester, a manometer, a flow meter, etc.

2.1.3 When sufficient data has been collected and analyzed, the calibration interval ofany controlled item may be increased. Sufficient data will be defined as follows.Any item that has achieved four calibration cycles, without being out of toleranceor specification, may have the calibration interval increased. In addition, thedevice must not have required repair or adjustment. The initial increase ininterval shall be by 50% beyond the original interval. If the 150% interval ismaintained for two additional calibration cycles, and the unit is withinspecifications and does not require adjustment, the interval may be increased toa maximum of 200% of the original calibration interval. For example, if a gaugecalibrates 4 years in a row, is within specifications, and requires no adjustment,the interval may be increased to 18 months. If the item meets the same criteriafor the next two 18 month calibration intervals, the interval may be increased to amaximum of two years. The calibration interval for torque wrenches shallnot exceed one year.

2.1.4 Any item found to be out of specification at the end of two successive calibrationperiods should have the calibration interval reduced. The initial interval reductionshould be by 50%. The calibration performance of the device should then bemonitored within the provisions of this paragraph and 5.1.3 of this document,until the correct calibration interval is achieved.

2.2 Listed below is equipment with specific calibration intervals.



44.030

10/01/09Rev. 52 of 2

4.030.doc

Equipment Interval

Dead Weight Tester: 60 months

Flow Meters & Manometers*: 60 months

Dead Weights**: 60 months

Master Altimeters: 6 months

Hydraulic Mules: 3 months and 12 months

Propeller Balancer: 6 months

* Applies to devises which use a dead weight for measurement.** Shall be inspected prior to each use to assure that there are no significant physical

changes to the weight.

2.3 Calibrated devices may remain in service no more than 365 days. For example, a device duecalibration on 3/7/XX must be removed from service prior to that date. In this example, the WSCsticker on the calibrated device will indicate, "Date Calibrated 3/7/XX", "Date due 3/1/XX", thefollowing year. The Quality Assurance Manager or designee will issue form WSF125 within thefirst 5 days of each month to each department manager listing those devices, which will be duecalibration within that calendar month.



44.040

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

4.040.doc

Title: MULTIMETER REQUIREMENTS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 To specify calibration requirements for multimeters used at this repair station when the meteris to be used for calibrating a piece of equipment or troubleshooting purposes.

2.0 Requirements:

2.1 Technicians must always first ensure the meter being use meets the minimumrequirement for the intended application. The intended application may require greaterresolution than the meter is capable of. This is evident when it come to meters that arelabeled “Cal. Limited To”.

3.0 Procedure:

3.1 All meters calibrated at West Star that are intended to be used at West Star Aviation willbe calibrated only to the test points listed below and will be labeled “Cal Limited To QCMtable 4.1” and must meet the Mfg’s tolerances for those test points. Calibrations on theaircraft are limited to the highest test point on the table below ant the resolution of themeter being used. This paragraph encompasses many different meters with differentresolutions so the technician must insure the meter being used has the resolution for theapplication.

Table 4.1Volts AC Volts DC Current Resistance

0 Vac 400Hz 0Vdc 200 mAdc 0 ohms2 Vac 5 Vdc 2 Adc 100 ohms

15 Vac 15 Vdc 1K ohms20 Vac 28 Vdc 10K ohms26 Vac 100K ohms115 Vac 1M ohms

3.2 Any meter calibrated at West Star for use by West Star that does not have a Mfg’sperformance specification on file at West Star, will be calibrated at the test points listedbelow and will be labeled “For T/S Only per QCM table 4.2”. The specifications of thistable limits a meter’s use to aircraft troubleshooting only and it cannot be used for thepurposes of an calibration on the aircraft.

Table 4.2Volts AC Volts DC Current Resistance Continuity

0 Vac 400 Hz+.003 Vac

0 Vdc +/- .002 Vdc 200 mAdc+/- 4 mA

0 ohms+/- .2 ohms

0.000 Vdc

2 Vac 400 Hz+/-.04 Vac

5 Vdc +/- .05 Vdc 2 Adc +/- .05 A 100 ohms+/- 1 ohms

26 Vac 400 Hz+/- .52 Vac

28 Vdc +/- .28 Vdc 1000 ohms+/- 10 ohms

115 Vac 400 hz+/- 2.3 Vac

10 K ohms+/- 100 ohms

1 M ohms+/- 10 K ohms


Blank Page.doc




44.050

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 2

4.050.doc

Title: GENERAL CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 Too specify general calibration requirements at West Star.

2.0 MASTER CALIBRATION DEVICES:

2.1 Master Calibration devices shall be defined as those items used expressly for thecalibration of precision gauges and tooling. The Quality Assurance Department shallcontrol such items. Master Calibration items shall be marked with a calibration due date,and shall be calibrated and certified with standards traceable to the National Institute forStandards and Technology (NIST).

2.2 Any device normally in service may be used as a master calibration device if it is freshlycalibrated and has not yet been returned to normal service. After use as a mastercalibration device, the unit may be returned to normal use.

2.3 The calibration interval of Master Calibration Devices shall not exceed 1 year.

2.4 The accuracy of Master Calibration devices shall be at least four times the accuracy ofthe device being calibrated. Master Calibration devices that are at least equal to theaccuracy of the tool or gauge being calibrated may be used with the following provisions:

A correction card must be available for the Master Calibration Device. A correction card shall be created for the device being calibrated. The correction

card shall contain the following information: Unique identification of the device for which the card was created. A list of the true values at which the device is calibrated. A list of the corrected values for each true value.

3.0 PERSONNEL:

3.1 Any person performing calibrations at West Star shall receive adequate instruction andshall be familiar with the requirements of this document. Adequate instruction shall bedetermined by the Quality Assurance Manager or as delegated by him/her.

4.0 DOCUMENTATION:

4.1 The following documentation shall be available and maintained by West Star, asappropriate.

4.2 For each category of precision gauge or tool that is calibrated by West Star personnel, aspecific Operating Standard (OS) shall be in place. For example, procedures for torquewrench calibration. Each specific OS shall contain the detailed instructions necessary forproper and complete calibration of the device detailed therein. The OS shall be approvedby the Quality Assurance Manager, and shall meet the requirements of this document.

4.3 For each item calibrated by West Star personnel, a work sheet shall be completed. Thework sheet shall contain at least the following information

Unique identification of the device being calibrated. Record of, or reference to the calibration points at which the device was checked. Record of, or reference to the values found at the calibration points. Signature of the person performing the calibration.



44.050

10/01/09Rev. 52 of 2

4.050.doc

A Quality Assurance (QA) Inspector shall review the work sheet. The work sheet shallremain on file for the duration of the calibration period. Once the calibration period hasexpired on the work sheet, that work sheet will be maintained on file for no less the 2years.

4.4 A Certificate of Calibration shall be created for each item calibrated at West Star. If theQA Inspector accepts the data presented on the work sheet, he or she may create andsign a Certificate of Calibration. The calibrated and certified item is then eligible for usewithin the repair station.

4.5 All precision gauges and tools meeting any of the use criteria of Section 3.0 (includingSection 3.1.4) must be properly labeled and tracked. Therefore, any such item brought ontoa West Star work site shall first be submitted to the Quality Department for labeling and entryinto the WSF database of calibrated tools. This process applies to all such items whetherpersonally owned, WSF owned, borrowed, leased, or rented. Submittal of the item will beaccompanied by a completed copy of WSF115 along with any existing documentationattesting to the item’s current calibration status (e.g. calibration certificate and/or invoiceshowing purchase date).

5.0 OUT-OF-CALIBRATION CALIBRATED TEST EQUIPMENT:

5.1 When calibrated test equipment is found to be out-of-calibration either by review of thecalibration data base, new purchase, new employee tools or prior to use, the testequipment will immediately be tagged using West Star tag “WSF2162 Un-airworthy Part”.The test equipment will then be surrendered to the tool crib in the 790 Hangar to beplaced in a Quarantine locker until such time the test equipment can be calibrated.

6.0 OUTSIDE CALIBRATION AGENCIES:

6.1 Outside calibration agencies shall be selected and approved as defined in West StarRepair Station Manual. For each item calibrated by an outside agency a Certificate ofCalibration shall be provided. The certificate shall provide information that showstraceability to the NIST.



55.000

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.000.doc

CHAPTER 5

REPAIR STATIONDOCUMENTATION


Blank Page.doc




55.010

10/01/09Rev. 51 of 2

5.010.doc

Title: REPAIR STATION FORMS (14CFR §145.211 (c)(3))

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to prescribe the methods and practices for generating,updating, and controlling forms used by the Repair Station.

2.0 Responsibilities

2.1 All personnel involved in creating, issuing, or revising West Star Forms will be familiarwith the contents of this document.

2.2 The Quality Assurance Manager or his designee shall:2.2.1 Review each new or revised form and assign the appropriate form number to the

document.2.2.2 Add the form to the Forms Manual.2.2.3 Assure that a copy of each new or revised form and a new Forms Manual index

is provided to the Flight Standards District Office (FSDO).2.2.4 Assure that written evidence of FAA acceptance of each new or revised form is

received within 30 days and correct any situations when written evidence is notreceived.

2.3 Technical management personnel shall:2.3.1 Conduct an initial review of each West Star Form prior to issuance.2.3.2 Conduct periodic reviews of forms. Forms will be added, revised, or deleted as

required.

NOTE: In the future, Forms Manuals may be replaced with an electronic copy of each form.The electronic copy of each form will be available in all areas of the company and will bemaintained by the Inspection Department.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 Any employee may request a new or revised form. West Star Forms will bedeveloped, researched and authored at the direction of the Quality AssuranceManager or designee.

3.2 Existing West Star forms have a variety of form number formats and systems. Thesenumbers may be retained until the form is revised. The standard format for new orrevised form numbers shall be as follows

3.2.1 A WSF Number, formatted as follows: WSF.###-M/YY (e.g.WSF.999-4/99)

3.2.2 The ### represents the actual form number. The M/YY representsthe month and year in which the form was issued or the most recentlyrevised.

3.2.3 The page number and the total number of pages – typically Page X ofX.

3.2.4 A descriptive title which states the purpose of the form.

3.3 Revisions to forms will be accomplished by replacing the entire form. A bold verticalline in the left or right margin will be used to indicate the revised portions of the form.



55.010

10/01/09Rev. 52 of 2

5.010.doc

3.4 The Corridor Work order system generates forms automatically through Crystalreporting. Any revisions to those forms will be accomplished as needed through theWest Star “IT” department and approved by the QA department.

4.0 Forms Manual Revision and Control

4.1 The Forms Manual will be maintained in the Inspection office.

4.2 A copy of WSF.001, “List of Forms For CRS WTXR173J”, will be provided in thefront of the manual or similar electronic format.

4.3 As new or revised forms are issued, they will be placed into the manual, along with acopy of WSF.001, which will reflect the latest changes.

QUALTIY CONTROL MANUAL


55.020

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 7

5.020.doc

Title: Work Order Forms

1.0 WSF 2006 Corridor Work Order Detail Report Pg. 1



55.020

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 7

5.020.doc

2.0 WSF 2006 Corridor Work Order Detail Report Pg. 2



55.020

06/01/10Rev. 63 of 7

5.020.doc

3.0 WSF 2007 Corridor Work Order Squawk Report



55.020

06/01/10Rev. 64 of 7

5.020.doc

4.0 WSF 2008 Corridor Work Order Step Report



55.020

06/01/10Rev. 65 of 7

5.020.doc

5.0 Form WSF.2000 – Work Order Form First Page

NOTE: The WSF.2000 & .2001 Work Order forms are only to be used as a backup ifthe computer system fails. It also may be use in the case of weekend drop-ins orafter regular business hours. An aircraft can be returned to service using theseforms as described in this chapter. The information contained on these forms willbe transcribed into the Corridor system as soon as practical.

6.0 Form WSF.2001 – Work Order Form Continuation Page



55.020

06/01/10Rev. 66 of 7

5.020.doc

7.0 Form WSF 018 – Inspection Job Aid



55.020

06/01/10Rev. 67 of 7

5.020.doc

To be used as a tool to initially document work order squawks. This form will bediscarded once squawks have been entered into the work order.


Blank Page.doc




55.021

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 4

5.021.doc

Title: Work Order Forms Instructions for the Corridor system

1.0 Instructions for Completion of Work Order Forms

1.1 The following table shows the definition of each block/space located on the formslisted below. Form samples can be located on doc. No. 5.020 in the QCM.

WSF 2006 Work Order Detail Report (Corridor Report)WSF 2007 Work Order Squawk Report (Corridor Report)WSF 2008 Work Order Step Report (Corridor Report)

1.2 Each number in the first column on the following table corresponds to a numberlocated in one of the block/space on the sample Corridor forms located indocument pages 5.020 in this manual. The numbers in the first column in thefollowing table of instructions may not be sequential. The Corridor systemgenerates these forms automatically and the block/space’s defined in thefollowing table are auto-filled by the Corridor system based on data entry bywhom ever is logged in or whom ever has scanned into the system in regards tolabor or squawk/step sign-offs.

1 Reg.#: Aircraft Registration number

2 Serial #: Aircraft Serial number

3 Work Order: Work Order number

4 Customer: Customer name

5 Address: Customer address, typically for billing purposes

6 Contact Name: Contact name for the customer

7 Item: Created in the Corridor system relating to a department. Squawks are thencreated under the ITEMS.

8 Squawk: Created after the ITEM. The squawk will consist of the Discrepancy,Resolution, required Inspections and the dates those inspections where signed offelectronically.Note: Squawk numbers are automatically generated by the Corridor system relating to the ITEMnumber. Example- 1. Airframe(Item) 1.1 Phase B (Squawk)

9 Steps: Created after the Squawk as required to document progressive steps for theresolution. Steps will be signed off in the same manner as squawks, electronically.Note: Step numbers are automatically generated by the Corridor system relating to the ITEMnumber. Example- 1. Airframe(Item) 1.1 Phase B (Squawk) 1.1.1 Ok to close (Step)



55.021

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 4

5.021.doc

10 Discrepancy: Enter the discrepancy. Discrepancies are discovered through logbookresearch, visual inspection, or verbal discussion with the Owner/Operator. Whenentering discrepancies into the Corridor system, use a description, which completelydescribes the problem. If the problem is complex, a separate discrepancy will need tobe written for each specific problem. When entering discrepancies that have beenobtained from the operator of the aircraft, the discrepancy must be entered using theoperator’s exact description. When visual inspection or troubleshooting reveals thatthe operators’ discrepancy differs from his description or a more specific problem isdiscovered, the discrepancy must be further explained. When a discrepancy calls fora routine inspection item to be accomplished, the description in the discrepancy fieldwill describe the inspection to be accomplished and the interval at which theinspection is required. When a discrepancy calls for compliance with an AirworthinessDirective or Service Bulletin, its description must contain the identifying number, themanufacturer to whom the Directive or Bulletin applies, a description of the subject ofthe Directive or Bulletin, the date of issue and, if the Directive or bulletin is recurring,the interval of occurrence.

11 Resolution: Enter the action taken to correct the discrepancy. The resolution field ofthe work order must be completed at the time that the work is accomplished. Thetechnician performing the work must enter a clear, concise description of the workperformed to correct the discrepancy. The resolution field must also describe, step bystep, the troubleshooting action that took place when applicable. If the personbeginning the work does not complete the work, he/she must describe the workperformed and enter their initial and date at the end of his/her entered description. Ormove their work description to a “Step” under the same squawk. This will allow anindividual sign-off for that portion of the resolution.

12 (Step) Description: Enter the description as a “Discrepancy” of the step beingperformed. A step is a progressive sign off to the resolution of the squawk.

13 (Step) Comments: Enter comments as a “Resolution” to the step being performed.

14 Sign-off: Displays the date the technician electronically “Signed off” the squawk/step.

15 Inspected: Displays the date the technician electronically signed off the “SingleInspection” requirement of the squawk/step.

16 Double Inspected: Displays the date the Quality Assurance Inspector electronicallysigned off the “Double Inspected” requirement of the squawk.

17 Functional Test: Displays the date the technician electronically signed off the“Functional Test” for the squawk.

18 Signed off By: Displays the name of the technician that electronically signed-off thesquawk/step.

19 Inspected By: Displays the name of the technician that electronically signed-off singleinspection requirement of the squawk/step.

20 Double Inspected By: Displays the name of the technician that electronically signed-off double inspection requirement of the squawk.



55.021

06/01/10Rev. 63 of 4

5.021.doc

21 Functional Test By: Displays the name of the technician that electronically signed-offthe functional test requirement of the squawk/step.

22 Part Number Off: Displays the Part Number of the component removed if required inthe squawk.

23 Part Description Off: Displays the description of the part removed

24 Serial Number Off: Displays the Serial number removed

25 Part Number On: Displays the Part Number of the component installed.

26 Part Description On: Displays the description of the part installed

27 Serial Number On: Displays the Serial number installed.

28 Date Opened: Displays the date the Work Order was opened.

29 Date Closed: Displays the date the Work Order was closed.

30 Opened by: Displays who opened the work order

31 Completed by: Displays who completed the squawk. Invoicing only.

32 Contact telephone: Displays customer contact telephone number

33 Manufacture: Displays manufacture of article the squawk was written for.

34 Aircraft total time: Displays aircraft total time

35 Part/Model number: Displays Part/Model number of article the squawk was writtenfor.

36 Total time: Note used at this time. Future enhancement

37 Total cycles: Note used at this time. Future enhancement

38 TSN/TSO: Note used at this time. Future enhancement

39 CSN/CSO: Note used at this time. Future enhancement

40 Page number: Displays page number of squawk

41 Printed: Displays the date the squawk was printed

42 Date in: Displays the date the article was scheduled to arrive at West Star Aviation

43 Date out: Displays the date the article was scheduled to depart/deliver from West StarAviation



55.021

06/01/10Rev. 64 of 4

5.021.doc

44 Account code: Displays account code assigned to the customer.

45 Target date: Displays the target date the article is expected to be completed.

46 Invoice #: Displays the invoice number.

47 Status: Displays the status of the work order. Either Open, Preliminary or Closed.

48 PO#: Note used at this time. Future enhancement

49 Job #: Note used at this time. Future enhancement

50 Posted: Displays the date the work order was posted in accounting

51 Barcode: Scanned by technician when trying to sign off/Inspect a squawk/step or addlabor to that squawk/step.

52 Created: Displays the date the Work Order Detail report was created.

53 Title: Displays info specific to the work order. A required field with optional content

54 Department: Display the department that originally opened the work order

NOTE: Ref. Advisory Circular 43.9 as revised. “14CFR 91.417(a)(1)(i) requires that themaintenance record entry to include, “A description of the work performed”. Thedescription should be in sufficient detail to permit a person unfamiliar with thework to understand what was done, and the methods and procedures used indoing it. To provide for this contingency, the rule permits reference to technical dataacceptable to the administrator in lieu of making a detailed entry.



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 7

5.022.doc

Title: Work Order Forms Instructions

NOTE: The WSF.2000 & .2001 Work Order forms are only to be used as a backup ifthe computer system is unavailable. It also may be use in the case of weekenddrop-ins or after regular business hours. An aircraft can be returned to serviceusing these forms as described in this chapter. The information contained onthese forms will be transcribed into the Corridor system as soon as practical.

1.0 Instructions for Completion of Work Order Forms

1.1 The following table of instructions describes the completion of West StarAviation, Inc. work order forms, as listed below. Form samples can be located ondoc. No. 5.020 in the QCM.

WSF.2000WSF.2001

1.2 Each item number corresponds to a number located in one of the blanks on thesample work order forms, located on the previous pages. The items numbers inthe following table of instructions may not be sequential. The blanks, which mustbe completed, on each work order, are identified by (*) next to the instruction forthat item. If a required blank (marked with (*)) is not applicable to the work beingaccomplished it must be marked as N/A or a line drawn through. Those itemsidentified by (λ) are additional items must be completed on Forms WS2000 if aninspection, which is part of the aircraft’s inspection/maintenance program, isbeing documented, on that particular work order.

* 1 Enter the work order number assigned to the job.

* 2 Enter the registration number of the aircraft to which the work order is opened.

* 3 Enter the total number of pages contained in the work order upon completion of thejob.

* 4 Enter the customer and or contact name.

5 Enter the customer’s permanent mailing address.

6 Enter the phone number at which the customer can be reached while theaircraft/engine is in work.

* 7 Enter the make and model of the aircraft/engine to which the work order has beenopened, (i.e. Cessna 650, Lear 35A, Garrett 331-10).

* 8 Enter the complete serial number of the aircraft/engine to which the work order hasbeen opened, (i.e. 35A-433, 650-0234, P89778)



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 7

5.022.doc

* 9 Enter the date the aircraft/engine is scheduled to arrive at the facility for work.

* 10 Enter the date the aircraft/engine is scheduled to leave West Star (Promised),following completion of the job.

λ 11 Enter the aircraft/engine total time in service.

* 12 Enter the aircraft tach.. time if the aircraft is so equipped.

* 13 Enter the aircraft hour meter reading if the aircraft is so equipped.

λ 14 Enter the total number of landings the aircraft has accumulated since new. (Requiredonly if the aircraft inspection/maintenance program requires scheduled maintenanceor inspection at specific cycle or landing frequencies).

* 15 To be initialed by the repair station inspector performing the preliminary inspection ofthe aircraft/article as required by the Repair Station Inspection Procedures Manual(Chapter 3.030 para. 3.1.1), prior to beginning the work scope.

* 16 To be initialed by the repair station inspector performing the hidden damageinspection. This inspection is required only on aircraft/articles tthhaatt have been involvedin an accident. If the aircraft/article has not been involved in an accident, this blockmust be marked N/A Ref. Chapter 3.030 para. 3.1.2 of this manual.

* 17 To be initialed by the quality assurance department personnel once the aircraftmaintenance record entries have been completed to indicate that the aircraft ormaintenance has been properly approved for return to service.

* 18 To be initialed by quality assurance department personnel once each discrepancy onthe work order has been reviewed and initialed (Block 46), and all of the supportingdocumentation (i.e. inspection guides, run sheets etc.) have been reviewed andcompiled. Initialing of this block by quality assurance personnel indicates the workpackage is complete and ready for filing.

λ 19 Enter the model number of the engine in the blank to the right of the numbercorresponding to the engine position. (Determine engine position number by countingfrom left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

λ 20 Enter the serial number of the engine in the blank to the right of the numbercorresponding to the engine position. (Determine engine position number by countingfrom left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

λ 21 Enter the total time of the engine in the blank to the right of the number correspondingto the engine position. (Determine engine position number by counting from left = 1 toright = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

λ 22 Enter the total cycles accumulated on the engine in the blank to the right of thenumber corresponding to the engine position. (Determine engine position number bycounting from left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 33 of 7

5.022.doc

λ 23 Enter the model number of the propeller in the blank to the right of the numbercorresponding to the propeller position. (Determine Prop position number by countingfrom left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

λ 24 Enter the serial number of the propeller in the blank to the right of the numbercorresponding to the propeller position. (Determine Prop position number by countingfrom left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

λ 25 Enter the total time of the propeller in the blank to the right of the numbercorresponding to the propeller position. (Determine Prop position number by countingfrom left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

26 Enter the total cycles accumulated on the propeller in the blank to the right of thenumber corresponding to the propeller position. (Determine Prop position number bycounting from left = 1 to right = 2 when sitting in the pilot seat).

27 Enter the auxiliary power unit hour meter reading and /or cycles if so equipped.

28 Enter the aircraft heater hour meter reading if so equipped.

29 Enter the aircraft air conditioner hour meter reading if so equipped.

* 30 Enter the next sequential discrepancy number. Various squawk numbering schemesare in place for each West Star Department. Supervisory personnel are familiar withthe correct squawk numbering procedures for their respective departments.

* 31 Enter the work order number assigned to the job. This blank to be filled out tofacilitate data entry by the billing department.

* 32 Enter the reference data used to complete the inspection/maintenance performed,when applicable.

* 33 Enter the discrepancy. Discrepancies are discovered through logbook research,visual inspection, or verbal discussion with the Owner/Operator. When writingdiscrepancies on the work order use a description, which completely describes theproblem. If the problem is complex, a separate discrepancy will need to be written foreach specific problem. When writing discrepancies that have been obtained from theoperator of the aircraft, the discrepancy must be written using the operator’s exactdescription. When visual inspection or troubleshooting reveals that the operators’discrepancy differs from his description or a more specific problem is discovered, thediscrepancy must be further explained in the corrective action block (35). When adiscrepancy calls for a routine inspection item to be accomplished, the description inthe discrepancy block will describe the inspection to be accomplished and the intervalat which the inspection is required. When a discrepancy calls for compliance with anAirworthiness Directive or Service Bulletin, its description must contain the identifyingnumber, the manufacturer to whom the Directive or Bulletin applies, a description ofthe subject of the Directive or Bulletin, the date of issue and, if the Directive or bulletinis recurring, the interval of occurrence.

* 34 To be initialed by the person writing the discrepancy.



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 34 of 7

5.022.doc

* 35 Enter the action taken to correct the discrepancy. The corrective action block of thework order must be completed at the time that the work is accomplished. Thetechnician performing the work must write a clear, concise description of the workperformed to correct the discrepancy. The corrective action block must also describe,step by step, the troubleshooting action that took place when applicable. If the personbeginning the work does not complete the work, he/she must describe the workperformed and initial and date the end of his/her written description. When the spaceprovided in the corrective action block is not sufficient to describe the work performed,a supplemental corrective action sheet (form WS2002) will be used. When asupplemental corrective action sheet is used, the “Supp Box” located in the correctiveaction block on the original discrepancy should be marked with an x or a checkmark toindicated further information exists

* 36 To be initialed by the technician or inspector performing the functional test. Thefunctional test must be performed whenever work has been performed on a systemand the proper operation of that system may have been effected by the workperformed. The functional test must be performed in accordance with the instructionsof the manufacturer contained in the maintenance manual. In the event that morethan one functional test must be performed, or the corrective action requires functionaltests at various stages of the work process, each individual functional test shall benoted in block 35 and initialed by the person performing the functional test. The lastfunctional test must be indicated using the F/T block (36). When a functional test isnot required this block must be marked “N/A” by the repair station inspectorperforming the final inspection for that discrepancy.

* 37 To be initialed by the technician who completes the work. This block may be left blankonly if the technician has initialed and dated within the corrective action, if theinspection truly requires only one set of eyes and that would be the final inspector andif the technician(s) are able to initial using an inspection checklist.

* 38 To be used only when two phases of closure exist as a part of the corrective action.An example of two phases of closure is when a landing gear gearbox is reinstalled.The first repair station inspector must look at the installation of the gearbox and makethe determination that the box and the area surrounding the box are satisfactory, and“OK to Close”. The second phase comes after the cover panels have been reinstalledand work on the area is completed. When the “OK to Close” box is used, we areassured that the items, which are no longer visible, have been properly inspected, andconform to the requirements of the FAA for progressive inspections. When thisprogressive inspection is not necessary, this block must be marked “N/A” by the repairstation inspector performing the final inspection for that discrepancy.

* 39 To be initialed by the repair station inspector approving the item for return to service.It is the responsibility of the person initialing this block to assure all work, including thedocumentation of the discrepancy and corrective action for the discrepancy, has beenaccomplished properly.

* 40 Enter the date the work was accomplished. This is the date the final inspection wascompleted for the item.



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 35 of 7

5.022.doc

* 41 Enter the part number of the component removed.

* 42 Enter the serial number of the component removed.

* 43 Enter the part number of the component installed, when applicable.

* 44 Enter the serial number of the component installed, when applicable.

* 45 To be initialed by Quality Assurance Inspector if a log book entry is warranted andcompleted. If a log book entry is not warranted, “NA” will be placed here.

* 46 To be initialed by a Quality Assurance Inspector upon satisfactory review of thediscrepancy for accuracy and completeness. The discrepancy must be completedand final inspection accomplished by appropriately authorized repair station inspector.

* 47 Enter the date that the page was opened for the work order. The date the first itemwas entered on that page.

* 48 Enter the page number for that page.

49 Mark with an x or check mark to indicate that a supplemental work order sheet (formWS2002) has been used to continue the corrective action description.

* 50 Enter the date that the supplemental work was accomplished.

* 52 Enter the customer’s purchase order number.

* 53 Work Scope / Work Instructions – check the appropriate item that best describes thework to be performed.

* 57 Enter the appropriate nomenclature describing the component to berepaired/overhauled.

* 58 Enter the part number of the component to be repaired/overhauled.

* 59 Enter the model number of the component to be repaired/overhauled.

* 60 Enter the serial number of the component to be repaired/overhauled.

* 61 Enter any out of the ordinary discrepancies noted during the disassembly process.Check for compliance with applicable Service Bulletins and Airworthiness Directives.Indicate verification of Service Bulletin and Airworthiness Directive status by checkingthe appropriate blocks. See item 62.

* 62 Mark off each block, as appropriate, following verification of Service Bulletin andAirworthiness Directive Status. Record any compliance requirements in the WorkInstructions Block of the work order.

* 63 Record the results of functional tests made as required by the appropriate repair oroverhaul instructions.



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 36 of 7

5.022.doc

* 64 Enter the date of completion of the work described. To be dated by the technicianinitialing the appropriate Tech block.

65 Enter the hours worked in order to complete the work.

* 66 When Avionics performs a functional test of equipment in aircraft to verify discrepantoperation, the technician performing the work will place a check or X in the box next to“Ramp Check” and the appropriate additional box on that line to indicate the results ofthe functional test.

* 67 When equipment is removed, from the aircraft to be repaired, the technician removingthe equipment will place a check or X in the box next to “removed” and record the partnumber(s) and serial number(s) of the equipment in the blanks provided.

* 68 When equipment is certified in the aircraft the technician will place a check or X in thebox next to “certified” and record the part number(s) and serial number(s) of theequipment in the blanks provided. A record of the certification is then made in theaircraft tech notes section.

* 69 When rental or loaner equipment is installed in the aircraft to replace the equipmentremoved, the technician installing the equipment will place a check or X in the boxnext to “installed”. He or she will then indicate the equipment is either loaner or rentalequipment, and record the purchase order number(s), part number(s) and serialnumber(s) for the installed equipment in the blanks provided.

* 70 Aircraft Tech Notes is the section for the technician to record the details of repairsmade to correct the discrepancy without removing the equipment. This may includetroubleshooting notes and wire or mounting repairs, circuit breaker replacement, andthe like. When additional space is required for aircraft tech notes, the space iscontinued on the reverse side of the form. ( ) are placed around notes anddescriptions that are not intended to be part of the invoice for the customer which isgenerated from the notes. The boxes at the bottom of the section are to be checkedas appropriate to indicate successful completion of a second ramp check, appropriatemaintenance record entries or reference to the tech notes for other disposition.

* 71 When Avionics performs a functional test of discrepant equipment using the avionicstest bench equipment to verify discrepant operation this section is used. Thetechnician performing the work will place a check or X in the box next to “BenchCheck” and the appropriate additional box on that line to indicate the results of thefunctional test.

* 72 Bench Tech Notes is the section for the technician to record the details of repairsmade to correct equipment discrepancies. When additional space is required foraircraft tech notes, the space is continued on the reverse side of the form. ( ) areplaced around notes and descriptions that are not intended to be part of the invoice forthe customer which is generated from the notes. The boxes at the bottom of thesection are to be checked as appropriate to indicate parts have been ordered andwhether or not exchange or loaner equipment was issued.



55.022

07/01/07Rev. 37 of 7

5.022.doc

* 73 When parts are ordered, including exchange equipment, the parts detail is recordedas appropriate in this area. The boxes at the bottom of this section are to becompleted to indicate mod status, completion of appropriate alignment proceduresand reference to tech notes as required.

* 74 This area is used to indicate what was re-installed in the aircraft following the work.The technician will place a mark in the box next to “installed” and then in theappropriate box to indicate the condition of the unit being installed. The technician willthen record the part number(s) and serial number(s) of the equipment in the blanksprovided.

75 The pricing of parts used and the total number of hours used to complete the work areplaced on this line.

76 To be initialed by a Category I inspector, if the maintenance or inspection described inthe item includes a Critical Inspection item. Reference West Star Certified ProcedureCP 1.004 for the definition of a Critical Inspection item. If the item does not includeCritical Inspection items, this block should be marked “N/A” by the repair stationinspector performing the final inspection for that discrepancy.

77 While performing maintenance, some items will require multiple inspections during theprogression of the corrective action. When an individual inspector completes anecessary inspection, he or she may write a description of the inspection, then initialand date the end of his/her written description.

* Note Upon the completion of any and all maintenance and or inspection, Form/Sticker

F080 will be placed after the last discrepancy/corrective action, signed by theAuthorized QC Inspector and Quality Assurance Inspector for final return to service forthe work performed.


Blank Page.doc




55.030

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 7

5.030.doc

Title: REPAIR STATION RETURN TO SERVICE FORMS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to prescribe the methods and practices for returnto service forms.


2.1 All personnel involved in creating, revising or using return to service forms will befamiliar with the contents of this section.

2.2 The Quality Assurance Manager or his designee shall:2.2.1 Review each new or revised form before use.2.2.2 Add the form to the Forms Manual & electronic format.2.2.3 Assure that a copy of each new or revised form and a new Forms Manual

index is provided to the Flight Standards District Office (FSDO).

3.0 Form F080 – “145 Sticker” Approval for Return to Service

This stamp/sticker is placed after the last discrepancy of the work order.Signature by the QA inspector indicating that the work order has been reviewedand that all corrective actions are adequate, all required signatures are in placeand that all other required information is contained in the work order. The QCInspectors signature indicates that all work is complete, all required inspectionsand/or maintenance have been performed and that the aircraft is airworthy andapproved for returned to service with respect to the work performed. Thecompletion of this sticker in conjunction with the log entry sign off will be used asthe primary means for this repair station returning an aircraft, airframe, aircraftengine, propeller, appliance or component part to service.

I certify that the above stated maintenance and/or inspection was performed inaccordance with the current regulations of the FAA and the aircraft, engine,prop or component identified above was determined to be in an airworthy

condition and approved to return to service with respect to the work performed.

FAA CRS WTXR173J Date___________________

Signed (QC)_______________________________________

Signed (QA)_______________________________________F080-09/04



55.030

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 7

5.030.doc

3.2 Form F081 – “145 Sticker” Not Approved for Return to Service

This label is attached after the last discrepancy of the work order. The QC andQA Inspector’s signatures indicate that all maintenance and/or inspection wascompleted, but the aircraft, airframe, aircraft engine, propeller, appliance orcomponent part is not eligible for approval for return to service by the repairstation.

I certify that the above stated maintenance and/or inspection was performed inaccordance with the current regulations of the Federal Aviation Administration and a

signed list of discrepancies and unairworthy items has been given to the aircraft owneror operator.

FAA CRS WTXR173J Date___________________Signed (QC)_______________________________________

Signed (QA)_______________________________________F081-9/04

3.3 Form F1002 – “OCF Sticker” Operational Check Flight

If required, after completion of maintenance, repair or alteration make an entryinto the work order discrepancy block stating, “Operational Check Flight Due”. Inthe corrective action, state, “Reference aircraft log books, dated ________, forOCF sign off”. This label will be placed in the aircraft logbooks after the last logentry, if required. The Pilot signature & Cert. # indicates a satisfactorycompletion of the OCF. FAA guidelines for this requirement can be found in 14CFR 91.407

OPERATIONAL CHECK FLIGHTWest Star Aviation, Inc.-CRS# WTXR173J

Date______________Performed Operation Check Flight and found the aircraft to be in a satisfactory condition.

Please reference West Star Aviation WO# ______________ for details of maintenance performed.

Pilot Signature _________________________

Cert. #_________________________F1022



55.030

07/01/08Rev. 43 of 7

5.030.doc

3.4 Form WSF 1009 – “Major Repair” Approved for Return to Service

This label is attached to the work order page which contains the corrective actionfor a major repair. This label may only be used in place of a FAA form 337 if thefollowing criteria are met:

The repair was accomplished using FAA approved data.

All of the requirements are met in accordance with FAR Part 43 appendix Bpar. (b).

The aircraft identified above was repaired & inspected in accordance with current FAAregulations, & is approved for return to service for work performed. Ref. Sqk. #______.

Pertinent details are of file at:West Star Aviation, Inc., CRS# WTXR173J

796 Heritage Way Grand Junction, CO 81506W.O.#_____________ Date____/____/____

Signed (QC)_______________________________________

Signed (QA)_______________________________________

WSF # 1009



55.030

07/01/08Rev. 44 of 7

5.030.doc

3.6 FAA Form 8130-3, Authorized Release Certificate

3.6.1 West Star personnel may use FAA Form 8130-3 as an approval for return toservice, in place of West Star form WS2163, when approving Class II and ClassIII products for return to service following maintenance, preventive maintenance,repair or alteration. Class II and Class III parts are defined in 14 CFR 21.321.

3.6.2 FAA Form 8130-3 can only be signed off by Return to Service authorizedCategory 1 QC Inspectors.

3.6.3 Pages 5 through 7 of this document explain in detail the appropriate proceduresin filling out this form. These procedures were derived from FAA Order 8130-21,as revised.



55.030

07/01/08Rev. 45 of 7

5.030.doc

1. Approving National AviationAuthority/Country:

FAA/UNITED STATESAUTHORIZED RELEASE CERTIFICATE

FAA Form 8130-3, AIRWORTHINESS APPROVAL TAG

3. Form Tracking Number:

XXXXX-X.X

4. Organization Name and Address: 796 HERITAGE WAY

Grand Junction, CO 81506 CRS: WTXR173J

5. Work Order/Contract/InvoiceNumber:

XXXXX

6. Item: 7. Description: 8. Part Number: 9. Eligibility:* 10. Quantity: 11. Serial/Batch Number: 12. Status/Work:

1 Wheel Assembly XXXXXXX N/A 1 XXXX REPIARED

13. Remarks:Disassembled tire and wheel assembly. Cleaned and performed NDT inspection of wheel halves and bolts. No discrepancies noted. Installed new tire onto wheel halves with P/N XXXXX.Serviced tire, leak checked good. Accomplished IAW Cessna MM chapter 32 and Cessna NDT manual chapter XX.

14. Certifies the items identified above were manufactured in conformity to:

Approved design data and are in condition for safe operation.

Non-approved design data specified in Block 13.

19. 14 CFR 43.9 Return to Service Other regulation specified in Block 13

Certifies that unless otherwise specified in block 13, the work identified in Block 12 anddescribed in Block 13 was accomplished in accordance with Title 14, Code of FederalRegulations, part 43 and in respect to that work, the items are approved for return toservice.

15. Authorized Signature: 16. Approval/Authorization No.:

20. Authorized Signature:John T. Technician

21. Approval/Certificate No.:

WTXR173J17. Name (Typed or Printed):

18. Date:

22. Name (Typed or Printed):

John T. Technician

23. Date (m/d/y):

XXX/XX/XXXXUser/Installer Responsibilities

It is important to understand that the existence of this document alone does not automatically constitute authority to install the part/component/assembly.

Where the user/installer performs work in accordance with the national regulations of an airworthiness authority different than the airworthiness authority of the country specified in Block 1, it isessential that the user/installer ensures that his/her airworthiness accepts parts/components/assemblies from the airworthiness authority of the country specified in Block1.

Statements in Blocks 14 and 19 do not constitute installation certification. In all cases, aircraft maintenance records must contain an installation certification issued in accordance with the nationalregulations by the user/installer before the aircraft may be flown.

FAA Form 8130-3 (6-01) *Installer must cross-check eligibility with applicable technical data. NSN: 0052-00-012-9005

2.

THIS FORM CONTITUTES A SIGNED COPY OF THE WORK ORDER



55.030

07/01/08Rev. 46 of 7

5.030.doc

BLK # Appropriate Contents of Blocks 1-23 on FAA form 8130-3

1 Approving National Aviation Authority/Country: FAA/United States (Preprinted)

2 Authorized Release Certificate, FAA form 8130-3, Airworthiness Approval Tag.(Preprinted)

3

Form Tracking Number: The number will be unique to each serialized componentand be comprised of the Work Order number, a dash (-) followed by the squawk orstep number. One squawk in the work order per serialized component unless theP/N in Blk. 8 comprises many serialized parts to make a kit/set. In this case, createan attachment to the 8130-3 listing all serialized components of the same P/N.

4 Organization Name and Address: West Star’s physical address. (Preprinted)

5 Work Order/Contract/Invoice Number: Work Order number will be inserted

6Item: West Star is only authorized to use this form for approval for return to serviceand only allowed to issue 1ea 8130-3 for “1” P/N at a time. The number “1” will bepreprinted.

7 Description: Enter the name or description of the product, part or appliance asreferenced in a part catalog or overhaul manual.

8Part Number: Enter the part number of the product, part or appliance. In the caseof an engine or propeller, the model designation may be used. If the part beingworked is a subassembly that does not have a part number of its own, enter thenext higher assembly number followed by the word “subassembly”.

9 Eligibility: Enter N/A. (Preprinted)

10 Quantity: Enter “1” unless there are multiple un-serialized components of the sameP/N in Blk. 8. Or multiple S/N’s of the same P/N that make up a kit/set.

11Serial/Batch Number: Enter a seriaI number here if the article is required to beidentified as such. If no Serial number is entered in the block, enter “N/A”. Enter“See List Attached” if there are multiple Serial numbers that are part of one P/N thatmakes up a kit/set. List those Serial numbers on the attached list.



55.030

07/01/08Rev. 47 of 7

5.030.doc

12

Status/Work: West Star will only enter the following as it relates to a specificsituation. Only one term may be entered in Blk. 12, per P/N, which should reflectthe majority of the work performed by West Star.

Overhauled: A process that ensures the article is in complete conformity withthe applicable service tolerances specified in the type certificate holders orequipment manufacturer’s instructions for continued airworthiness, or in thedata approved or accepted by the authority. The article will be at leastdisassembled, cleaned, inspected, repaired as necessary, reassembled, andtested in accordance with the approved or accepted data.

Repaired: Repair of defect(s) using an applicable standard.

Inspected/Tested: Examination or measurement in accordance with anapplicable standard (for example: visual inspection, functional testing, or benchtesting).

Modified: Alteration of a product, part, or appliance to conform to an applicablestandard.

NOTE: THE APPLICABLE STANDARD MUST BE DESCRIBED IN BLK. 13.

13

Remarks: Describe the work identified in Blk. 12 and associated results necessaryfor the user or installer to determine the airworthiness of the article in relation to thework being certified. This can be done either directly or by reference to supportingdocumentation. If necessary, a separate sheet may be used and referenced fromthe main form 8130-3. The following statement will be on all 8130-3’s issued byWest Star: THIS FORM CONTITUTES A SIGNED COPY OF THE WORK ORDER

NOTE: THE APPLICABLE STANDARD MUST BE DESCRIBED IN THIS BLK.

14-18 Note Used

19 Approval for Return to Service: The box titled 14CFR 43.9 Return to Servicemust be checked indicating which regulations apply to the work performed.

20Authorized Signature: This space will be completed with the signature of theauthorized person. Only persons specifically authorized are permitted to sign thisblock. The approval signature must be applied at the time and place of issuanceand manually applied. Ref. para. 3.6.2 this document.

21 Approval Certificate No.: Enter WTXR173J for West Star. (Preprinted).

22 Name: Enter the typed or printed name of the authorized representative whosesignature appears in Blk. 20.

23 Date (m d y): Enter the date on which the original work was completed using thefollowing format: First three letters of the month, two digit day and four-digit year.


Blank Page.doc




55.040

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 6

5.040.doc

Title: LOG ENTRIES

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to prescribe the methods and practices for logentries.


2.1 All personnel involved in creating, revising or using log entries will be familiar withthe contents of this section.

2.2 The Quality Assurance Manager or his designee shall:2.2.1 Review each new or revised log entry before use.

3.0 Procedures: Log entry examples

3.1 Maintenance Record Entry – ELT Annual Inspection

The following maintenance record entry is used to verify that the ELT system wastested to comply with the requirements of 14 CFR 91.207 (d). The entry maycontain descriptions of other maintenance performed. This entry may only besigned by a Quality Control Inspector who has return to service authorization, asshown on the Roster of Inspection Personnel which can be found in theinspection office. The format of this entry is typical and may vary, if the requiredinformation is present.

N Number WO #:A/C MAKE/MODELS/N: DATE:TTAF: LANDINGS:HOBBS: AVIONICS ENTRY

Tested ELT system to comply with 14 CFR 91.207 (d). Unit meets manufacturer’s specifications. Checked antenna and G-switch. ELT battery expires: (date).

I certify that this aircraft has been inspected as required by 14CFR §91.409 (f)(?), and has been determined to be in an airworthycondition and approved for return to service with respect to the work performed. Pertinent details are on file at this repair stationunder the above work order.

Signature _____________________________________ FAA CERTIFIED REPAIR STATIONWEST STAR AVIATION, INC. WTXR173J796 Heritage WayGrand Junction, CO 81506 (970) 243-7500

3.1 Inspection Record Entry – Static System, Altimeter, Altitude Reporting & Transponder



55.040

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 6

5.040.doc

The following maintenance record entry is used after satisfactory completion ofthe bi-annual tests required for required by 14 CFR 91.411 and 91.413. Thisentry may only be signed by a Quality Control Inspector who has return toservice authorization, as shown on the Roster of Inspection Personnel. Theformat of this entry is typical and may vary, if the required information is present.

N Number WO #:A/C MAKE/MODELS/N: DATE:TTAF: LANDINGS: STATIC SYSTEM, ALTIMETER, ALTITUDE REPORTING & TRANSPONDER PG. 1HOBBS:

The tests and Inspections required by 14 CFR 91.411 and 14 CFR 91.413 have been performed and found to comply withFAR 43, appendices E and F:

Static system(s) tested to: (altitude in feet)Alt #1 PN: SN:Alt #2 PN: SN:Stby Alt. P/N SN:SDC Module: P/N SN:No. 1 ADC: P/N SN:No. 2 ADC: P/N S/N:Encoder tested to: (altitude in feet)Transponder #1 PN: SN:Transponder #2 PN: SN:No. 1 Mode “S” Transponder: P/N S/N:No. 2 Mode “S” Transponder: P/N S/N:

I certify that this aircraft has been inspected as required by 14CFR §91.409 (f)(?), and has been determined to be in an airworthycondition and approved for return to service with respect to the work performed. Pertinent details are on file at this repair stationunder the above work order.

Signature _____________________________________ FAA CERTIFIED REPAIR STATIONWEST STAR AVIATION, INC. WTXR173J796 Heritage Way

Grand Junction, CO 81506 (970) 243-7500

3.1 Inspection Record Entry – Static System, Altimeter, Altitude Reporting & TransponderFor Reduced Vertical Seperation (RVSM)



55.040

07/01/07Rev. 33 of 6

5.040.doc

The following maintenance record entry is used after satisfactory completion oftests for RVSM certification requirements. The format of this entry is typical andmay vary dependent on the requirements of individual RVSM installations.

N Number WO #:A/C MAKE/MODELS/N: DATE:TTAF: LANDINGS: HOBBS: REDUCED VERTICAL SEPARATION MINIMUMS (RVSM)

Removed the following equipment;

Installed the following equipment in accordance with Flight Test Associates, Inc. STC ST01524LA, ST01525LA and ST01526LA perFAA form 337 dated:

Honeywell AZ-252 ADC, P/N: S/N: Honeywell BA-250 Altimeter, P/N: S/N: Honeywell AM-250 Altimeter, P/N: S/N: Honeywell AL-800 Altitude Preselect Controller, P/N: S/N: Aerosonic Standby Altimeter, P/N: S/N: Sandia SAS1-24 Diode Board, P/N S/N Rosemount Pitot/Static Probes (2 ea.), P/N: and S/N: and

Note: Pitot / Static Probes are life limited at 10,000 hours. Removed and reinstalled Autopilot Computer, P/N: S/N: Removed and reinstalled Stab Actuator, P/N: S/N: Removed and reinstalled Pitch Servo, P/N: S/N: Removed and reinstalled pilot and co-pilots airspeed indicators P/N: S/N: and P/N: S/N after being modified per

drawing # 64373-148.

The Tests and Inspections required by CFR 91.411 and CFR 91.413 have been performed and found to comply with Part 43,Appendices E & F and Certified to RVSM standards IAW ???? maintenance manual chapter ??? Rev. ???:

Static system(s) and Automatic Pressure Altitude Reporting Equipment tested to: 45,000 Ft. Honeywell BA-250 Altimeter, P/N: 70310N01D01 S/N: Honeywell AM-250 Altimeter, P/N: 70257N01D01 S/N: Aerosonic Standby Altimeter, P/N: 16650-1150 S/N: Honeywell AZ-252 ADC, P/N: 7024900-30303 S/N: No.1 Transponder P/N: S/N: No.2 Transponder P/N: S/N: No.1 Mode S Transponder P/N: S/N: No.2 Mode S Transponder P/N: S/N:

This RVSM requirement has been complied with by West Star Aviation by modification of the pitot-static andaltimetry system and incorporation of the FAA approved Supplemental Type Certificates, (ST01524LA, ST01525LAand ST01526LA). These STC’s meet the requirements for the Design Data Package, specified in para. 9 of “14CFR§91-RVSM CHG. 1 Interim Guidance Material on the Approval of Operators/Aircraft for RVSM Operations”, datedJune 6, 1999 and has been FAA approved.

I certify the above-described alteration has been inspected/conformed and has been determined to be in an airworthycondition and is approved for return to service with regards to the work performed. Pertinent details are on file at thisrepair station under the above work order.



3.2 Maintenance Record Entry – Static System Break-In



55.040

07/01/07Rev. 34 of 6

5.040.doc

The following maintenance record entry is used after satisfactory completion ofthe tests required by 14 CFR 91.411 (a) (2) (b) for the opening and closing ofstatic systems. The format of this entry is typical and may vary, if the requiredinformation is present.

N Number WO #:A/C MAKE/MODELS/N: DATE:TTAF: LANDINGS: AVIONICS ENTRY PG. 1

The tests and inspections required by 14 CFR 91.411 (a) (2) (b) for the opening and closing of static systems have been performedas follows:- Static system(s) tested to (altitude in feet)

All maintenance performed on this aircraft was performed in accordance with current regulations of the FAA and was determined tobe in an airworthy condition and is approved for return to service with respect to the work performed. Pertinent details are on file atthis repair station under the above work order. A copy of this work order has been given to the operator.



3.3 Inspection Record Entry – Return to Service Following Inspection

The following maintenance record entry is used to return to service an aircraftafter completion of an inspection, which is part of a current inspection programrecommended by the manufacturer per the requirements of 14 CFR § 91.409 (f)(3). The type of inspection (100 hour, Phase A, Annual, etc.) is listed in the bodyof the entry. This entry may only be signed by a Quality Control Inspector whohas return to service authorization, as shown on the Roster of InspectionPersonnel. The format of this entry is typical and may vary, if the requiredinformation is present.

N Number WO #:A/C MAKE/MODELS/N: DATE:TTAF: LANDINGS: (AIRFRAME, ENGINE, PROP OR COMPONENT) ENTRY PG. 1

(DESCRIPTION OF THE INSPECTION(S) AND MAINTENANCE PERFORMED)

I certify that this (Aircraft, Engine, Prop or Component) has been inspected as required by 14 CFR 91.409 (f) (3), and has beendetermined to be in an airworthy condition and is approved for return to service with respect to the work performed. Pertinent detailsare on file at this repair station under the above work order. A copy of this work order has been given to the operator.





55.040

07/01/07Rev. 35 of 6

5.040.doc

3.3 Inspection Record Entry – Return to Service Following Inspection using an approvedaircraft inspection program.

The following maintenance record entry is used to return to service an aircraftafter completion of an inspection, using an approved aircraft inspection programapproved under § 135.419 and currently in use by a person holding an operatingcertificate issued under part 135 per the requirements of §91.409 (f) (2). Thetype of inspection (100 hour, Phase A, Annual, etc.) is listed in the body of theentry. This entry may only be signed by a Quality Control Inspector who hasreturn to service authorization, as shown on the Roster of Inspection Personnel.The format of this entry is typical and may vary, if the required information ispresent.


(DESCRIPTION OF THE INSPECTION(S) AND MAINTENANCE PERFORMED)

I certify that this (Aircraft, Engine, Prop or Component) has been inspected as required by 14 CFR 91.409 (f) (2), and has beendetermined to be in an airworthy condition and is approved for return to service with respect to the work performed. Pertinent detailsare on file at this repair station under the above work order. A copy of this work order has been given to the operator.



3.6 Maintenance Record Entry – Return to Service Following Repair (Airframe)

The following maintenance record entry is used to return to service an aircraftafter completion of repairs as required by 14CFR § 91.405. A description of themaintenance performed is listed in the body of the entry. This entry may only besigned by a Quality Control Inspector who has return to service authorization, asshown on the Roster of Inspection Personnel. The format of this entry is typicaland may vary, if the required information is present.


(DESCRIPTION OF THE MAINTENANCE PERFORMED)All maintenance performed on this (Aircraft, Engine, Prop or Component) was performed in accordance with current regulationsof the FAA and was determined to be in an airworthy condition and is approved for return to service with respect to the workperformed. Pertinent details are on file at this repair station under the above work order. A copy of this work order has been given tothe operator.Signature _____________________________________ FAA CERTIFIED REPAIR STATION

WEST STAR AVIATION, INC. WTXR173J796 Heritage Way




55.040

07/01/07Rev. 36 of 6

5.040.doc

3.9 Record Entry – Unapproved for Return to Service Following Maintenance/Inspection foraircraft engine, propeller, or component.

The following record entry is used upon completion of maintenance and orInspection, but the aircraft, airframe, aircraft engine, propeller, appliance orcomponent part is not eligible for approval for return to service by the repairstation as required by 14CFR § 43.11 (a)(5).

MAKE POSITION #MODEL A/C MAKE MODELSN: NTSN: HR. MTR:CSN: TTAF:O/H DATE: (AIRCRAFT, ENGINE, PROP OR COMPONENT) LANDINGS:

(DESCRIPTION OF THE MAINTENANCE PERFORMED)

I certify that the above stated maintenance and or inspection was performed in accordance with the current regulations of theFederal Aviation Administration and a signed and dated list of discrepancies and unairworthy items has been provided for theaircraft owner or operator. Pertinent details are on file at this repair station under the above work order. A copy of this work orderhas been given to the operator.



4.0 Maintenance Record Entry – Return to Service Following any Inspection

Those maintenance record entries’s used for return to service following anyinspection must be specific in the body of the return to service statement as towhich approved maintenance program was utilized and inserted between theparenthesis as depicted in the examples above.

NOTE: If the aircraft is being inspected under an “Approved Aircraft Inspection Program” the FARreference in the return to service statement on the log entry must be changed to 14CFR §91.409 (f) (2)

and the log entry must state which AAIP.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 10

5.050.doc

Title: REPAIR STATION TAGS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 The purpose of this chapter is to prescribe the methods and practices for the useof repair station tags.


2.1 All personnel involved in using repair station tags will be familiar with the contents ofthis section.

2.2 The Quality Assurance Manager or his designee shall:2.2.1 Review each new or revised tag before use.

3.0 Procedures: Repair Station Tag examples

3.1 Form WSF 150 – On-the-Job-TrainingThis form is utilized to document internal training received coincidental todaily job task assignments (on the job) or classroom training, which isconducted in-house.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 42 of 10

5.050.doc

3.2 F.026 – Maintenance Release Sheet (Tag)

West Star Aviation, Inc. form F.026 is used to caution persons entering theaircraft, for any purpose, that the aircraft is currently undergoing maintenanceand is not safe for operation. One sheet is issued to the aircraft and placed on orin the aircraft by a QA Inspector or his designee prior to maintenance. The sheetneeds to be placed so it is obvious to any person who might attempt to operatethe aircraft. The F.026 form is fluorescent orange in color to provide for quickdetection. The aircraft may have multiple Work Orders opened against it. Alldepartmental work orders will be listed on this sheet and will be cleared byQuality Assurance for the Operational Check Flight (OCF), if the OCF is required,by initialing in the Operational Check Flight box. The Sheet will remain in theaircraft during the OCF. Once the OCF is completed, any additionaldiscrepancies will be cleared by QA and then Delivery box will be initialed by QA.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 43 of 10

5.050.doc

3.3 Tag WS2172 – Altimeter Correction Card

Used to record variations found during altimeter certification process. Acompleted copy of this tag is issued with the altimeter upon completion of thecertification process.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 44 of 10

5.050.doc

3.4 Tag WS2173 – Airspeed Correction Card

Used to record differences in readings found between calibrated test box and theairspeed in question during a variation inspection of airspeed indication devices.A completed copy of this form is provided with the air speed indicator, if theindicator is returned to the customer separate from the aircraft. If the air speedindicator is installed in the aircraft by West Star Aviation, then a copy of this formshall be given to the owner/operator of the aircraft.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 45 of 10

5.050.doc

3.5 FAA Form 8130-3, Airworthiness Approval Tag

REMOVED



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 46 of 10

5.050.doc

3.6 Tag WS2161 – Repairable Part Tag

West Star Aviation, Inc. form WS2161 is used to identify parts that have beenreceived by the repair station in need of repair. WS2161 is also used to identifyparts that have been removed from an aircraft or engine currently in work whenthe part is in need of repair. The Repairable Part Tag may be completed by anyrepair station technician and must contain Work Order Number, Squawk Number,Part Name, Removed By, Date Removed, and Reason Removed at a minimum.It is acceptable to use one tag for an assembly of parts when the assembly is toremain assembled. WS2161 is green in color and may be attached to the part orassembly using string, wire, tie-wrap, or tape as appropriate.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 47 of 10

5.050.doc

3.7 Tag WS2162 – Unairworthy Part Tag

West Star Aviation, Inc. form WS2162 is used to identify parts for which therepair station is rated that have been inspected by a qualified repair stationinspector and determined to be unairworthy. WS2162 is generally used toidentify parts that have exceeded their life limit or have worn to an un-acceptabledimension. The Unairworthy Part Tag must be completed by a repair stationinspector and must be completed in its entirety as applicable. Each Unairworthypart must have its own WS2162 tag. WS2162 is red in color and may beattached to the part or assembly using string, wire, tie-wrap, or tape asappropriate.



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 48 of 10

5.050.doc

3.8 Tag WS2163 – Maintenance Release Tag

West Star Aviation, Inc. form WS2163 is used to identify parts for which therepair station is rated that have been inspected by a qualified repair stationinspector and determined to be airworthy. WS2163 is generally used to identifyparts that have undergone maintenance and repair by the repair station but maybe used to identify parts that are removed serviceable from an FAA typecertificated product. The Maintenance Release Tag may be completed by anyrepair station technician but must be signed by a qualified repair station inspectorin the “Inspected By” blank. The form must be completed in its entirety, asapplicable. When approving an assembly of parts for return to service the tagmust contain the assembly part number and serial number as applicable. Theback of the tag is used to describe the work accomplished. WS2162 is yellow incolor and may be attached to the part or assembly using string, wire, tie-wrap, ortape as appropriate.

3.9 Tag WS2164 – Identification Tag



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 49 of 10

5.050.doc

West Star Aviation, Inc. form WS2164 is used to identify parts that have beenremoved from an aircraft or engine currently in work, when the part is not in needof repair, and will be re-installed to the aircraft or engine upon completion of thecurrent work scope. The Identification Tag may be completed by any repairstation technician, and must contain Work Order Number and N Number at aminimum. It is acceptable to use one tag to identify a table or storage bin thatwill contain several parts removed from the aircraft or engine. WS2164 is gray incolor and may be attached using string, wire, tie-wrap, tape, or clear identificationtag pouches as appropriate.

4.1 Tag WS2167 – Warranty Core Tag



55.050

07/01/08Rev. 4

10 of 10

5.050.doc

West Star Aviation, Inc. form WS2167 is used to identify parts that have beenremoved from an aircraft or engine currently in work, when the part is in need ofrepair and is to be returned to a supplier for warranty credit. The Warranty CoreTag may be completed by any repair station technician, and must contain at leastthe Work Order Number, Squawk Number, Part Name, Removed By, DateRemoved, and Reason Removed. It is acceptable to use one tag for anassembly of parts when the assembly is to remain assembled. WS2167 is bluein color and may be attached to the part or assembly using string, wire, tie-wrap,or tape as appropriate.



55.060

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 2

5.060.doc

Title: REPAIR STATION STAMPS

1.0 Purpose:

1.1 This section describes the stamps used by the Repair Station. Many additional generaluse stamps (such as “Preliminary Draft”, “Copy”, etc.) may be employed in the RepairStation.


2.1 Technicians and inspectors, who use stamps described herein, shall be familiar with therequirements of this document.

3.0 Procedures:

3.1 The following table identifies each stamp by name, provides a sample, and describes thecorrect use. The format of these stamps may vary from stamp to stamp.

WORK ORDER STAMPSNAME SAMPLE DESCRIPTION

FOR BILLINGPURPOSESONLY

For use on work orders used as aninvoice only. May not be used onwork orders, which documentsquawks, corrective actions, orinspections.

REPAIRSTATION

This stamp is used to attach WestStar’s Name and Repair StationNumber to a document.

FOR INFO.PURPOSESONLY…

For use on individual squawks thatare informational only. Thesesquawks are not airworthy and donot require inspection sign off.

4.0 STAMPS USED ON OTHER DOCUMENTS

4.1 The following table identifies each stamp by name, provides a sample, and describes thecorrect use. The format of these stamps may vary from stamp to stamp.

NAME SAMPLE DESCRIPTION

WEIGHT ANDBALANCE…

Used to indicate that thecurrent weight and balanceinformation has beensuperceded by re-weigh or bycalculating a new weight andbalance.

SIGNATUREThis stamp provides themeans to add a signatureblock to a document.

FOR BILLING ONLYNO SIGNATURE REQUIRED

WEST STAR AVIATION, Inc.CRS WTXR173J

WEIGHT AND BALANCE INFOSUPERSEDED DATE_________WEST STAR AVIATION, CRS WTXR173JSIGNATURE________________________

SIGNATURE_____________________WEST STAR AVIATION

Grand Junction, ColoradoCRS No. WTXR173J

FOR INFORMATIONALPURPOSES ONLY.

NOT A DISCREPANCY



55.060

06/01/10Rev. 62 of 2

5.060.doc

NAME SAMPLE DESCRIPTION

RECEIVINGINSPECTION

This stamp is used todocument that an authorizedRepair Station inspectoraccomplished a ReceivingInspection on the parts,components, etc which arelisted on the stampeddocument.

VENDOR

This stamp will be used on thefirst page of a vendor packetreceived from a prospectivevendor. The accountingdepartment will assign theVendor Code. The QualityAssurance Manager ordesignee will assign theReceiving Action Code. Thevendor will be Approved by theQuality Assurance Manager ordesignee and then dated.

AWAY FROMBASE

REMOVED-REF. RSM DOC. 1.030 FORAWAY FROM BASE PROCEDURE

COPY STAMP

This stamp will be placed onthe first page of any documentthat is copied out of acontrolled document. Uponcompletion of the workscopethat the document was use for,the document must be placedin the work order or labeled forreference only or disposed of.

QUALITYASSURANCEINSPECTORSTAMP

This stamp will only be usedby qualified QA inspectorsafter inspection and finalreview of items found in workorders, receiving inspectionsetc. This stamp will be in blueink. Inspector initials may beused in stead of this stamp ifthe stamp comes unavailable.If the stamp is lost or stolen, itmust be reported to the QAManager as soon as possible.

These materials have been inspected andFound to conform with the requirements of14CFR §145.211Receiving Inspector___________________West Star Aviation, Inc.CRS WTXR173JDate________________________________

Vendor Code___________________Approval Status Code___________Function Code_________________Reviewed by___________________Date__________________________ West Star Aviation

CRS WTXR173J

COPY VALID FOR USE WITH:WORK ORDER____________DATED: __________________

WSAEmployee #

QA



25.070

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.070.doc

Title: Repair or Modification Approval Form (WSF .802)


Blank Page.doc




55.071

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.071.doc

Title: Repair or Modification Form (WSF .802) Instructions

1.0 Each item number corresponds to a number located in one of the blanks on thesample .802 form, located on Doc. # 5.070 of the QCM manual. All blanks mustme completed on the form. If not applicable, write in “N/A”.

NOTE: The small letters in the individual boxes indicate which department is responsible.P: Production QA: Quality AssuranceE: Engineering

1 Production personnel will enter the aircraft registration number

2 Production personnel will enter the aircraft Make

3 Production personnel will enter the aircraft Model

4 Production personnel will enter the aircraft Serial Number

5 Production personnel will enter the Work Order number assigned to the aircraft

6 Production personnel will enter the squawk number relating to the Repair or Modification.Multiple squawks are allowed on one .802 form, provided they are distinctly documented.

7 Production personnel will enter reference data proposed for the Repair or Alteration withassistance from QA or engineering if required

8 Production personnel will Sketch/Describe the repair or alteration in detail to include wereapplicable: Location using stations, weight, materials, hardware/fasteners and serializedarticles being removed.

9 Production personnel will print the name of individual which is submitting the form

10 Quality Assurance personnel will enter the initial of QA Inspector approving the repair ormodification

11 Quality Assurance personnel will enter the date of the QA Inspector approval

12 Engineering personnel will enter the initial of engineer approving the repair or modification.Engineering approval may not always be necessary if the QA department has determined thatsufficient approved data is available. If this is the case “N/A” will be placed in this block.

13 Engineering personnel will enter the date of engineering approval

14 Quality Assurance Manager/Accountability Manager, Quality Assurance Team Leader orQuality Assurance Inspector will determine if the repair or alteration is Major or Minor and put acheck were applicable.

15 Quality Assurance with Engineering assistance if required, will make the determination of whattype of paper work will be used to return to service the repair or alteration and put a checkwere applicable.


Blank Page.doc




55.080

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.080.doc

Title: Disposition of Quarantined Parts Form (WSF.041)


Blank Page.doc




55.090

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 3

5.090.doc

Title: Vendor Audit Form, pg. 1 (WSF014)



55.090

07/01/07Rev. 32 of 3

5.090.doc




55.090

07/01/07Rev. 33 of 3

5.090.doc



Blank Page.doc




55.100

06/01/10Rev. 61 of 1

5.100.doc

Title: Online-Service Difficulty / M or D Entry Form (http://av-info.faa.gov/isdr/default.asp)NOTE: Instructions for use of this form is self explanatory on the Web site


Blank Page.doc




55.110

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.110.doc

PAGE NOT USED


Blank Page.doc




55.111

07/01/08Rev. 41 of 1

5.111.doc

Title: Inspection Authority Card

Purpose: This card will be issued to inspectors employed by West Star Aviation once adetermination of qualifications have been made by the employees directsupervisor and the Quality Assurance Manager or designee. The inspectorwill carry this with him/her when away from base. The employee will returnthis card to the QA department if the inspection authorities are revoked orupon termination of employment.

(Name) REPAIR STATION INSPECTION AUTHORITYIA Limited to:Limitations and authority as outlined in theWSA Repair Station & Quality Control Manual

QA APPROVAL:

QA InspectorQC Inspector Category 1 or 2PMA InspectorReturn to ServiceAfter Hours/Away from Base

Inspector Signature:By signing, Inspector acknowledges that Limitations and Authority are as outlined in theWSA Repair Station/Quality Control Manual and as granted by the Quality AssuranceManager. This Inspection Authorization is valid while your are employed by West Star,CRS# WTXR173J, unless sooner suspended or revoked by the Quality AssuranceManager. WSF 053A


Blank Page.doc




55.112

07/01/07Rev. 31 of 1

5.112.doc

Title: Suspected Unapproved Parts Notification, FAA form 8120-11


Blank Page.doc


Rev. 5EASA SUPPLEMENT TO THE FAR-145 Page 1 of 17

WEST STAR REPAIR STATION MANUAL April 13, 2010

Reference: Repair Station & Quality Control Manual

FAA REPAIR STATIONCERTIFICATE NUMBER: WTXR173J

EASA APPROVAL CERTIFICATENUMBER: 145.5010

MANUAL CONTROL NUMBER: _________

This Supplement does not form part of the FAA FAR 145 Repair Station Manual.

Compliance with the FAA approved Supplement together with the FAA FAR-145 repair Station Manualforms the basis of the European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) Part-145 approval for maintenancecarried out by West Star on aircraft, engines, propellers, or components thereof under the regulatorycontrol of EASA.

The States of the EASA Full Member Authorities are; Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France,Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain,Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom.

This supplement was developed using EASA Maintenance Implementation Procedures Guidance (MIP-G). Superceding former JAA TGL22.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page No.

COVER SHEET...............................................................................................................1TABLE OF CONTENTS.................................................................................................. 2

1. LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES ................................................................................... 32. AMENDMENT PROCEDURE.................................................................................... 43. INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................ 44. ACCOUNTABLE MANAGER'S COMMITMENT STATEMENT ................................ 55. ACCEPTANCE BASIS AND LIMITATION ................................................................ 56. ACCESS BY THE EASA AND FAA .......................................................................... 57. CUSTOMER WORK ORDERS AND INSTRUCTIONS.............................................. 58. APPROVED DESIGN ENGINEERING DATA ........................................................... 69. AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVES .............................................................................. 710. MAJOR REPAIRS, ALTERATIONS, AND MODIFICATIONS................................... 711. RELEASE OF COMPONENTS AFTER MAINTENANCE ......................................... 712. VALIDATING THE CERTIFICATE OF AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY ............... 913. RELEASE OF AIRCRAFT AFTER MAINTENANCE................................................. 914. REPORTING OF UNAIRWORTHY CONDITION..................................................... 1015. QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEM ......................................................................... 1016. PROVISION OF HANGAR SPACE FOR AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE .................. 1017. CONTRACTED MAINTENANCE............................................................................. 1118. HUMAN FACTORS ................................................................................................. 1119. AIR CARRIER LINE STATIONS ............................................................................. 1120. WORK AWAY FROM A FIXED LOCATION............................................................ 11APPENDIX 1 – QUALITY MONITORING PROGRAM.................................................. 12



1. LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Page Date Revision Page Date Revision

1 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5 11 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5

2 June 9, 2008 Rev.4 12 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5

3 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5 13 July 1, 2007 Rev.4

4 July 1, 2007 Rev.4 14 July 1, 2007 Rev.4

5 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5 15 July 1, 2007 Rev.4

6 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5 16 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5

7 July 1, 2007 Rev.4 17 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5

8 July 1, 2007 Rev.4

9 July 1, 2007 Rev.4

10 Aril 13, 2010 Rev.5

Note: Appendix 1 contains separate reference documents, which are not included in this list ofeffective pages.

Approved by:

_____________________________ __________________West Star AccountabilityManager Date

Acceptance of:

_____________________________ __________________FAA Flight Standards District Office Date



2. AMENDMENT PROCEDUREThis Supplement shall be revised as required consistent with current operations and EASArequirements. The Quality Assurance Manager will review this Supplement periodically; confirmingthe Supplement is still current and valid for use, or identify needed changes. The Quality AssuranceManager will have any revisions he finds necessary produced in a final form and approved by theAccountability Manager for coordination with the FAA Flight Standards District Offices (“FAA FSDO”)at Salt Lake City, Utah as described below. Each revision to this Supplement will include all pages,which will all bear the new revision number and date.

The Quality Assurance Manager will send two copies of each revision to the Flight StandardsDistrict Office for review. Upon acceptance of the proposed revision, the FAA Flight StandardsDistrict Office will sign and date the appropriate line on the List of Effective Pages. One copy is thenreturned to West Star and the other retained to revise the Flight Standards District Office's copy ofthe Supplement. Receipt of the returned copy from the FAA FSDO by the repair station signifiesrevision of the Flight Standards District Office's copy of the Supplement.

Upon receipt of the FAA accepted revision at West Star, the Quality Assurance Manager willdistribute copies of the revision and attach a copy of West Star form # WSF.027, to each copy.These copies will be distributed to all manual holders. Upon receipt of the revision, each manualholder is responsible for reviewing and inserting the revised Supplement into his/her assignedRepair Station Manual. Once revised, the manual holder must sign and date the Form WSF.027and return it to the Quality Assurance Manager. The Form WSF.027 is used to certify that therevision has been reviewed and is understood by the manual holder and that the Supplement hasbeen inserted into the manual. Returned Form WSF.027 are kept on file in the Quality AssuranceManager office and serve as a means of assuring Repair Station Manual Revision Status Control.

Additions, deletions, or revisions to text in an existing section will be identified by a revision bar inthe margin of the page adjacent to the change, by highlighting the text in red, or both.

3. INTRODUCTIONThis Supplement to the West Star Repair Station Manual is required for continued EASA Part 145approval of maintenance work on all aircraft and components operated under the authority of themembers of the EASA.

The EASA has agreed that the FAA is a recognized authority by means of a bilateral aviation safetyagreement.

The EASA has specified the basic difference between EASA Part 145 and FAR Part 145 to ensureequivalence with EASA Part 145. These differences are outlined in Maintenance ImplementationProcedures (MIPs) agreed between the EASA and FAA and identifies these differences as specialconditions.

Consequently, an FAR Part 145 Repair Station can be EASA accepted, if the Repair Station complieswith the maintenance special conditions beyond FAR Part 145 which are specified initially in the MIP-G,(Maintenance Implementation Procedures).This Supplement therefore reminds West Star that it is performing maintenance in accordance withthe EASA Part 145 Acceptance Certificate and identifies the differences from the FAR’s that need tobe taken into account.



4. ACCOUNTABILITY MANAGER'S COMMITMENT STATEMENTThis Supplement, in conjunction with West Star approved FAA Repair Station Manual, defines theorganization, policy, and procedures upon which EASA acceptance is based.

These procedures are approved by the undersigned, and shall be adhered to, as applicable, whenmaintenance work is being accomplished under the conditions of EASA Part 145.

The West Star Aviation, Inc. procedures do not override the necessity of complying with any additionalrequirements formally published by the EASA and forwarded to West Star.

It is understood that EASA will list this organization in a formal EASA publication as long as the EASA issatisfied that the procedures are being followed and work standards are being maintained. It is furtherunderstood that the EASA reserves the right to revoke the Acceptance Certificate and remove West StarAviation, Inc. from the formal EASA publication if the EASA believes that West Star is not followingacceptable procedures or upholding work standards.

Dave KrogmanAccountability Manager/General Manager

West StarDate: _________________________

5. APPROVAL BASIS AND LIMITATIONThe approval acceptance of maintenance is limited to the scope of work permitted under the currentapproval granted by the FAA to West Star in accordance with FAR Part 145 carried out in locationswithin the United States. EASA approval is based on West Star compliance with FAR Parts 43 and 145,except where varied by EASA special conditions identified in EASA Administrative & Guidance Materialand in the Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA) and Maintenance Implementation Procedures(MIP-G).

6. ACCESS BY THE EASA AND FAAThe EASA or EASA-member EASA staff shall be allowed access to West Star facilities and documentsto verify compliance with procedures and standards and to investigate specific problems. Furthermore,the FAA staff shall be allowed access to ascertain compliance and investigate problems on behalf of theEASA.

7. CUSTOMER WORK ORDERS AND INSTRUCTIONSMaintenance performed by West Star for foreign operators is complicated by the fact that there may beoccasions when non-FAA maintenance requirements, such as a foreign Airworthiness Directive are notknown to West Star. This may occur because the information is not included in the information routinelyreviewed by West Star. Consequently, the customer is responsible to provide explicit instructions for allwork subject to the procedures and requirements of this Supplement.



If there are any questions about the interpretation of a work order or other work instructions, clarificationshall be obtained from the customer before work begins. In general, work orders should specify theinspections, repairs, alterations, overhaul, airworthiness directives, and parts replacements that must becarried out. The Team Leader assigned to the project shall be the primary customer contact and shallassure that all customer instructions are understood.

8. APPROVED DESIGN ENGINEERING DATAApproved design engineering data is either approved by the national aviation authority (equivalent of theFAA) of the Type Certificate holder (typically the original equipment manufacturer), or it is data suppliedby the customer and approved by the appropriate EASA national aviation authority. In all cases, thecustomer is responsible for confirmation that the data is approved.

Repair design data developed by U.S. organizations/persons for use on EU-Registered aircraft and relatedarticles.

8.1 Automatically approved data

All repair design data developed by US organizations/persons for use on an EU-Registered aircraftand related articles are approved by ED Decision 2004/04/CF, as amended by ED Decision2007/. /CF, except for critical component repair design data developed by organizations/personswhich is not the TC/STC holder.

Note: A critical component is defined as a part identified as critical by the design approval holderduring the validation process, or otherwise by the exporting authority. Typically, such componentsinclude parts for which a replacement time, inspection interval, or related procedure is specified in theAirworthiness Limitations section or certification maintenance requirements of the manufacturer’smaintenance manual or Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

For each individual repair design, this EASA approval is based on:1) Major repair data approved by FAA (as substantiated via a FAA letter or properly executed FAAForm 8110-3, 8100-9, or FAA Form 337)2) Minor repair data submitted by the TC/STC holder or appliance design approval holder, or3) Minor repair data determined to be acceptable data (under 14CFR part 43) as determined by aU.S. maintenance organization under FAA’s authorized system.

8.1.1 Limitations:

Regarding the acceptable minor repair design data described in (3) above, an EASAPart 145 maintenance organization located outside the US territory cannot declare that acceptabledata under 14CFR43 may be used on an EU-registered aircraft unless that data has beenpreviously used on an N-registered aircraft. Such data must be approved by EASA or under anEASA DOA for use by an EASA Part 145 maintenance organization located outside the USterritory. Reference to the ED Decisions mentioned above shall be made in the release documentsissued by the EASA 145 approved organization; releasing the relevant EU registered aircraft orcomponent to service.

8.2 Data which requires formal approval

8.2.1 Repair design data on critical components, developed by organizations/persons which are not theTC/STC Holder, shall be submitted to the Agency for approval following the standard applicationprocedure, with an EASA Form 31. Applicants do not need to hold a DOA if the repair data hasbeen approved by the FAA.


WEST STAR REPAIR STATION MANUAL April 13, 20109. AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVESA number of EASA member authorities either issue their own airworthiness directives or accept FAAdirectives and issue additional directives.

West Star shall determine from the customer what airworthiness directives the customer requires to befollowed in the work to be performed, and must hold a copy of those Airworthiness Directives. Thisinformation, if applicable, should be a part of the work order or other instructions. In some cases, it willbe necessary for the customer to supply the information necessary to incorporate airworthiness directiverequirements. If there is no customer, West Star shall comply with the FAA airworthiness directives.

10. MAJOR REPAIRS, ALTERATIONS, AND MODIFICATIONSThe approval of major repairs, alterations, and modifications usually involves EASA member authorities. Therefore, it is essential for the customer to ensure that the appropriate EASA national aviationauthority has provided any required approvals, and that any repair station FAA approved data isacceptable.

West Star shall establish that the customer has obtained the necessary approvals or has initiated actionto do so before West Star begins any work.

11. RELEASE OF COMPONENTS AFTER MAINTENANCERelease to service of components up to and including complete power plants shall be in accordancewith FAR Part 43.9 and the additional requirements of Paragraphs 7 through 10 of this Supplement. Atthe completion of maintenance, West Star will issue an FAA Form No. 8130-3 as a maintenancerelease. Reference Page 18 paragraph 14 of FAA Order 8130.21D (or later revision), for detailedinstructions for completing FAA Form 8130-3.

In addition, Block 13 of the FAA Form 8130-3 must contain the following information:- West Star EASA Approval Certificate- Specify any overhaul, repairs, alterations, or AD’s accomplished- Specify any replacement or PMA parts used- Reference any approved data used to accomplish the work- The following statement:

“West Star” certifies that the work specified in block 12/13 was carried out in accordancewith EASA Part-145 and in respect to that work the component is considered ready forrelease to service under EASA Part-145 Approval Number: “EASA.145.5010“.

Blocks 14 through 18 are not to be used by West Star, and “newly overhauled” should be signed off inblock 20 against the Block 19 maintenance release.

CAUTIONThe use of Parts Manufacturer Approval (PMA) parts on a component may not beapproved by EASA-member NAA.If there are any questions concerning the approval status of parts or components to be used byWest Star the customer shall provide clarification prior to the initiation of the work requiringsuch parts or components.



Below is an example of a typical 8130-3 that will be used by West Star:

West Star will indicate in their personal roster whom has authority to issue an 8130-3 on behalfof the repair station.

Components authorized for use during maintenance should meet the intent of the following:

1. Component means any component part of an aircraft up to and including a completepowerplant and any operational or emergency equipment.

2. Only the following new and used components may be fitted during maintenance.a) New Components

1. New components should be traceable to the OEM as specified in the TypeCertificate (TC) holders Parts Catalogue and be in a satisfactory condition forfitment. The new component should be accompanied by a release document issuedby the OEM or Production Certificate (PC) holder. The release document shouldclearly state that it is issued under the approval of the relevant NAA under whoseregulatory control the OEM or PC holder works.

2. For USA OEM’s and PC holder’s release should be on the FAA Form 8130-3 as anew part.

3. For all EU States OEM’s and PC holder’s release should be in accordance withEASA Part 21.

4. For Canadian OEM’s and PC holder’s release should be on the TC Form 24-0078 asa new part.



5. Standard parts are exempt from the forgoing provisions, except that a conformitystatement should accompany such parts and be in a satisfactory condition forfitment.

6. PMA parts may only be accepted as detailed in EASA Part 21 or any EU/US bilateralagreement.

b) Used components1. Used components should be traceable to maintenance organizations and repair

stations approved by the authority who certified the previous maintenance and/or inthe case of life limited parts certified the life used. The used component should be ina satisfactory condition for fitment and be eligible for fitment as stated in the TCholder’s parts catalogue.

2. Used components from EASA approved USA repair stations should beaccompanied by a FAA form 8130-3 issued as a maintenance release.

3. Used components from an USA repair station not EASA approved should not beused even if accompanied by a FAA form 8130-3.

4. Used components from EASA Part 145 approved maintenance organizations shouldbe accompanied by an EASA from 1 issued as a maintenance release.

12. VALIDATING THE CERTIFICATE OF AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITYNote: This paragraph is applicable only to FAR Part 145 repair stations with an aircraft rating.

While EU aircraft have indefinite C of A’s the C of A’s validity period is verified by means of an“airworthiness review certificate” (ARC). The EASA operator or owner is responsible forensuring the C of A remains valid; however, West Star will ensure that the C of A is valid fromthe expiration date as detailed on the ARC before issue of a release to service as specified inparagraph 13 off this Supplement. West Star will inform the customer if the ARC has expired. If a valid certificate is not available at the time of the release, the release will include areference to the invalid certificate.

13. RELEASE OF AIRCRAFT AFTER MAINTENANCENote: This paragraph is applicable only to FAR Part 145 repair stations with an aircraft rating.

For all work accomplished under this Supplement, the release to service shall be accomplishedin a manner consistent with FAR Part 43.9 and Paragraphs 7 through 10 and Paragraph 12 ofthis Supplement. At the completion of maintenance, the following certification shall be made inthe aircraft maintenance record.

"I certify that the work specified, except as otherwise specified, was carried out inaccordance with FAA airworthiness regulations and with respect to that work the aircraftis considered ready for release to service."

The addition of the phrase "except as otherwise specified" shall be included whenever either orboth of the following circumstances exists:



1. Not all maintenance was accomplished. In that case, the maintenance notaccomplished must be listed on the FAR 43.9 release.

2. The required maintenance was only EASA approved and not FAA approved, forexample, an EASA airworthiness directive not approved by the FAA.

If the customer requires that the maintenance records indicate a release to service inaccordance with EASA Part 145.A.50, the following alternate certification shall be made:

“West Star certifies that the work specified except as otherwise specified was carried outin accordance with EASA Part 145 and in respect to that work the aircraft is consideredready for release to service”

In both cases, West Star shall issue the certification when all required maintenance has beencompleted. Both the EASA acceptance certificate number and the FAA 145 acceptance certificatenumber will be included in all maintenance entries. If it is not possible to complete all requirementmaintenance, information on the incomplete maintenance or remaining airworthiness discrepanciesshall be included in the maintenance record and the operator shall be so informed.

14. REPORTING OF UNAIRWORTHY CONDITIONWhen serious defects are found in EASA aircraft or components, such facts shall be reportedto the EASA-member NAA using Form 8070-1 or other means. The identity of the customermust also be reported to the FAA to allow follow up action by the EASA. The customer and theaircraft design organization must also be notified. These notifications will be made within 72hours of discovery.

15. QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEMA quality monitoring system does not address the same issues as quality control or inspectionsystems. Quality monitoring (QM) is an independent top level review that includes monitoringof the inspection process. A QM system focuses on whether the stated procedures andstandards are actually being followed and whether they are effective in meeting the overallgoals for maintaining airworthy products. The quality monitoring process examines a sample ofproducts and processes to verify that the end products meet all requirements, i.e. that theoverall system works.

West Star Quality Monitoring Program is defined, scheduled and controlled according to therequirements found in Appendix 1 of this supplement.

16. PROVISION OF HANGAR SPACE FOR AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCEHangar space will be available for aircraft operated under the regulatory control of an EUmember state, undergoing maintenance and alteration. Provisions for sufficient hangar spaceshall be made when the contract is signed.



17. CONTRACTED MAINTENANCEIf West Star contracts part of the maintenance of EASA controlled aircraft, to anotherorganization, it will ensure that the other organization is either listed by the EASA for themaintenance that they perform, or such contracted organizations must work under the WestStar Repair Station in accordance with 14CFR 145.217(a)(2)(b), West Star Repair Stationmanual Doc. No. 6.010, 6.020.All organizations contracted by the repair station must be listed by the repair station statingagainst each organization whether it is EASA listed or under the repair station control viaFAR Part 145.217, West Star Repair station Manual Appendix A and West Star’s vendorlisting.

18. HUMAN FACTORS

West Star will provide initial, recurrent and remedial training to all of its employee’s throughformal class room or web based type training. This training will be in for form of initial titledas “Human Factors Introduction”, “Human Factors Dirty Dozen” and “The Curse ofComplacency”. Recurrent training will be occur annually utilizing the “Human Factors DirtyDozen” and “The Curse of Complacency” web based training modules. If the need arisesfor remedial training, all training modules listed above will be required to be taken again.

19. AIR CARRIER LINE STATIONS

This requirement is not applicable to this repair station because West Star does not hold aPart 121 certificate.

20. WORK AWAY FROM A FIXED LOCATION

a) If West Star Aviation is requested to perform maintenance on an EU registeredaircraft or article located outside the continental United States or its territories WestStar Aviation may work away from its fixed location in the following cases.1. For a one time special circumstance:

As West Star Aviation does not have a written procedure in this supplementfor work away from station then West Star Aviation must notify EASA inadvance of doing the work. The notification must describe the work to beperformed, the date of the work, the customer, and certify to the EASA thatWest Star Aviation will follow all existing procedures in their current RepairStation Manual and EASA Supplement. EASA will review the application andWest Star Aviation will be notified in writing with a copy to the FAA eitheraccepting or rejecting the request. If the request is rejected then the reasonsfor so doing will be specified in the letter.

2. On a reoccurring basis, follow the convention established in the preceding


WEST STAR REPAIR STATION MANUAL April 13, 2010paragraph when necessary subject to the FAA Operations Specification D100being in place for this work and only to perform emergency or non-routinemaintenance, to be defined for this guidance as urgent defect rectification or toprovide assistance for an EU Registered aircraft or articles intended for fitment onEU registered aircraft. The procedural requirements that the repair station shoulduse are defined in the FAA RSM. It is permissible to prevent duplication to make across reference to the RSM procedures in the EASA supplement for this aspect.

3. Domestic work away from station procedures for this repair station can be locatedin the West Star Repair Station manual Doc. No. 1.030.

b) Any time West Star Aviation conducts any maintenance, Inspection, Repair orAlteration on an EASA registered aircraft, the Quality Assurance department willensure that all elements of this EASA Supplement are followed with the use of WestStar Form WSF 057 “EASA requirements Check List”.

Note: This paragraph is not applicable to Line Stations where paragraph 19 is applicable.

APPENDIX 1 – QUALITY MONITORING PROGRAMThe primary objective of the QM system is to enable West Star Aviation to satisfy itself that it can

deliver a safe product and that it remains in compliance with FAR 43, FAR 145 and the EASASpecial conditions.

1.0 PURPOSE, SCOPE, AND LIMITATIONS

1.1 The primary objective of the QM system is to enable West Star Aviaiton to satisfy itself that it candeliver a safe product and that it remains in compliance with FAR 43, FAR 145 and the EASASpecial conditions. In addition, this document defines the scope, responsibilities, and details of theQuality Monitoring (QM) Program for West Star Certified Repair Station. This program is not areplacement for, or part of the QA/QC system defined in West Star Repair Station Manual. Rather theQuality Monitoring Program emphasizes the examination of the Repair Station QA/QC system. WestStar QM Program is an ongoing process designed to define and correct problem areas. Uppermanagement involvement is an integral part of the QM Program, which helps to assure independenceof the program. In addition, this Program fulfills the Quality Monitoring (QM) requirements of EASA(European Aviation Safety Agency).

1.2 This document is proprietary to West Star. No other agencies, companies or individuals may use thisProgram without the written permission of West Star. All internal evaluation data gathered by WestStar is proprietary and may not be used without the written permission of West Star. Only the GeneralManager may grant written permission.

1.3 All portions of the operation of West Star Repair Station are within the purview of the QM Program. Periodic evaluation of all Repair Station operations shall be undertaken, problems defined, correctiveactions specified and reports generated for upper management by the QM Program. Non technicalportions of West Star operations, which may adversely affect the proper functioning of the RepairStation, may also be subject to the QM Program. Specific Repair Station functions controlled underthis program includes the following items.

Facilities and equipment Repair Station authority and limitations versus actual practice


WEST STAR REPAIR STATION MANUAL April 13, 2010 Controls over any deviation authority Qualification and training of Repair Station personnel Repair Station staffing levels Technical publications Continuity of work and supervision during personnel changes Supplier selection, designation as an “Approved Vendor”, and surveillance Parts and material handling Inspection and quality control processes Proper control of precision gauge and tool calibration Appropriate tool and equipment availability Maintenance release processes Defect reporting

2.0 DEFINITION OF TERMS

Many of the terms used for the QM Program may appear to have obvious meaning. However, toavoid ambiguity and to assure consistency, the following definitions shall apply. Note that thesedefinitions may differ from common usage and usage in other documents.

FINDING A conclusion, supported by evidence, which shows that a process, policy, procedure,product, etc is not in compliance with West Star Repair Station Manual or other FAA standards. Allfindings must be corrected.

CONCERN A conclusion concerning a portion of the Repair Station Quality System which is judged tobe a weakness and to have the potential of becoming and item of noncompliance (a finding).

OBSERVATION An element of the QM Program which merits special notice. The notice is normallya positive remark of commendation, which deserves the attention of management. In addition,observations may highlight features, which should be adopted in other portions of the Repair Station.

RECOMMENDATION A specific suggested action that addresses a deficiency, either a concern or afinding. Recommendations from an internal evaluation should be considered for implementation.

CONTROL A key procedure, responsibility, or decision-making position within West Star QMProgram. Effective controls reduce the probability of action contrary to established requirements andreduce the adverse consequences of such deviations, when they occur. Controls should be theprimary focus of internal evaluations.

INSPECTION A critical examination of an object for conformance with a standard. Results of QMProgram inspections are reported only in terms of findings.

AUDIT A controlled examination of processes, records and transactions to verify compliance withWest Star Repair Station Manual and FAA requirements. Auditing measures against a definedstandard, but does not analyze the standard.

EVALUATION A controlled examination of all aspects of a process, both positive and negative,including a review of standards, if appropriate. The scope of an evaluation is greater than an audit. An audit is a tool to be used during an evaluation.

UPPER MANAGEMENT The General Manager or his upper management designee shall fulfil thisposition in the QM Program. This person shall have the authority to resolve issues and take actionand can be held accountable for Repair Station quality issues. This person must be informed andaware of Corrective Action Plans, findings, concerns, and follow-up actions undertaken as a result ofthe Quality Monitoring Program.



UPPER MANAGEMENT(GENERAL MANAGER

3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES

3.1 The personnel structure of West Star Quality Monitoring Program is defined in this section. For purposes of Quality Monitoring, the following Organization Chart shall apply.

INTERNAL QUALITY MONITORING PROGRAM, ORGANIZATION CHART

3.1.1 Upper Management (General Manager)The upper management position for the QM Program will normally be the General Manager.The General Manager may prescribe that another person of the same approximatemanagement level as himself fill the responsibilities of upper management position within theQM Program. The General Manager has overall accountability for the QM Program, and hasall authorities given to the QM Manager.

3.1.2 Quality Monitoring (QM) ManagerAssignment of a person to fulfill the Quality Monitoring Manager position is at the discretion ofthe General Manager and shall report to the General Manager. Unless otherwise specified,the Quality Monitoring Manager will be a qualified contract person or the Quality AssuranceManager for the Repair Station. The QM Manager will normally oversee the routineoperations of the QM Program, which includes the following specific items.

To provide overall supervision of QM Program functions. Develop internal evaluation schedules. Perform or cause to be performed internal evaluations, audits, and inspections, including

identifying and recording findings or concerns. Collecting evidence to substantiate findings or concerns. Facilitate the development of Corrective Action Plans. Recommend or assist with the development of solutions to findings or concerns. Verify the implementation of solutions consistent with the Corrective Action Plan and

ensure that the prescribed solutions resolve the issues. Maintain and update internal evaluation files. Assure that upper management receives the prescribed reports and is kept informed of

urgent issues.

PRODUCTION INSPECTION(QA/QC)

PARTS

QUALITY MONITORINGMANGER

(QUALITY ASSURANCEMANGER)


WEST STAR REPAIR STATION MANUAL April 13, 20103.1.3 Qualified Evaluator (QE)

The QM Manager shall have the responsibility for assessing and qualifying personnel who aredesignated as Qualified Evaluators within the QM Program. Qualified Evaluators may bequalified contract or West Star personnel. Members of the Inspection Department will normallyfill the QE positions. The general duties of a QE are to assist the QM Manager in conductingevaluations of the Repair Station Quality System, by providing assessment based on theguidance material provided. In addition, the QE may be given any specific duties asdetermined by the QM Manager.

4.0 PROCEDURES

4.1 Persons involved with Quality Monitoring Program, with the exception of the GeneralManager, must meet minimum qualification requirements. Those qualification requirementsshall be as follows.

4.2 Quality Monitoring ManagerThe QM Manager should have at least 5 years of management experience in a QualityAssurance, Quality Control, or Quality Monitoring position. Typical positions, which wouldqualify, are Quality Assurance Manager, Quality Assurance Inspector. The General Manager,or his designee, shall be responsible for assessing the qualifications of the QM Manager.

4.3 Qualified EvaluatorsGeneral inspection experience is not sufficient qualification to receive the designation ofQualified Examiner. QE’s shall receive specific training in the evaluation of quality systems. The scope and duration of the training and the necessary experience levels for QEqualification shall be at the discretion of the QM Manager. The training might include theelements of the following:

In-house or on-the-job training College courses Home study course material (e.g. material and programs available from the American

Society of Quality (ASQ))Industry seminars and workshops Appropriate FAA courses and seminars

Certifications such as Certified Quality Auditor from the American Society of Quality are desirable.

5.0 QM PROGRAM SCHEDULES

5.1 The minimum evaluation interval for each applicable Repair Station organization shall be oneyear. In the event of unsatisfactory findings, the interval may be increased according to theurgency of the discrepancy. The following Repair Station areas or departments shall besubject to audit, as listed below.

Group 1 Turbine Airframe Maintenance Turbine Engine Maintenance

Group 2 Accessory Overhaul and Maintenance Parts Departments

Group 3 Avionics Install Avionics Repair (Bench)

Group 4 Interior Department Paint Department



5.2 Each group will normally be audited at the beginning of the corresponding quarter. Audits andcorrective actions should be completed before the beginning of the next quarter. Planneddeviations to this standard schedule shall be in place prior to December 15th of the prior year. The QM Manager may deviate from this schedule, as he deems necessary.

6.0 TYPES OF QUALITY EVALUATIONS

6.1 Periodic Quality EvaluationsPeriodic Quality Evaluations shall be conducted at regularly scheduled intervals. Control ofthe scope and details of periodic evaluations shall be defined by West Star Internal QualityAudit Report, document number WSF.015- (as revised). The interval and timing of PeriodicQuality Evaluations shall be as defined in 5.0 of this document.

6.2 Special Quality EvaluationsThe need for Special Quality Evaluations shall be determined by the QM Manager or theGeneral Manager. This type of audit may be driven by such issues as adverse internaltrends, FAA concerns, or industry trends. The scope of Special Quality Evaluations shall bedetermined by the QM Manager, and will normally constitute a portion of the Periodic QualityEvaluation as defined by WSF.015.

6.3 Follow-up EvaluationsFollow-up Evaluations are mandatory after an unsatisfactory finding generated by anytype of audit. The purpose of a Follow-up Evaluation is to assure that the prescribedcorrective action has been taken and that the corrective action was sufficient to solve theproblem. The schedule of the Follow-up Evaluation shall be determined by the QM Managerand shall be set according to the urgency of the deficiency being addressed.

7.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION PLANS

7.1 GeneralCorrective Action Plans (CAP) shall be developed in response to all unsatisfactory findings orother concerns. The purpose of a CAP is to define the corrective action required and toprescribe an effective and timely implementation of the corrective action. This will beconducted using West Star Form WSF .050. A CAP shall be developed in conjunction withupper management, QM personnel, the QA Department, and management of the technicaldepartment involved. The QM Manager or a designated Inspection Department person shallbe responsible to facilitate the CAP development. In the event that elements of the CAP arecontroversial and the subject of significant objections from any of the CAP developmentparticipants, the General Manager shall have final decision making powers and responsibility.

The individual assigned to oversee the development of a CAP (QM Manager) shall facilitatethe process by:

Ensuring that the Corrective Action Plan is developed in a timely manner. Verify that the CAP includes all of the elements in 6.2 of this document. Monitor the implementation of the corrective actions. Provide the General Manager with an independent assessment of CAP development and

implementation. Initiating scheduled and/or unscheduled Follow-up Evaluations to ensure the

effectiveness of the corrective steps specified in the CAP.

7.2 Plan ElementsAll Corrective Action Plans shall contain at least the following elements:



A detailed description of the findings or concerns, and the method of discovery. Analysis of evidence to determine the root cause(s) of the problem. Identification of planned corrective actions to be taken in response to the finding or

concern. An implementation schedule, including a timeframe for putting corrective steps in place. Designation of the individual responsible for implementing each of the corrective steps. A report to the General Manager detailing the problem, the corrective actions taken and

the results of follow-up inspections.8.0 RECORDS

8.1 GeneralThe purpose of records in the Quality Monitoring Program is to provide the necessary tools todocument the detection of problems and the creation of solutions. For each periodic, specialor follow-up evaluation, a report with details of the findings must be generated. In addition, awritten record of the Corrective Action Plan must exist.

8.2 Internal Quality Audit ReportWest Star form number WSF.015 provides the scope, detail and definition of each internalevaluation. All or portions of the form may be used as is deemed appropriate by the QMManager for the type of audit being conducted.

8.3 Internal Quality Audit Finding ReportEach internal evaluation shall be consummated by generating a formal Finding Report. Thisrecord shall be accomplished using West Star form number WSF.016.

8.4 Corrective Action Plan ReportEach corrective action plan shall be developed and recorded using West Star forms numberWSF.050. This report will provide the structure and format to assist in developing a CorrectiveAction Plan and the means to formally record the CAP.

8.5 Report RetentionIt will be the responsibility of West Star’s Quality Assurance Manager to retain any and allreports generated as a result of the Quality Monitoring System for no less than two years. Those reports will be maintained in the Quality Assurance Managers office.

EASA SUPPLEMENT

Blank Page.doc


European Aviation Safety Agency Guidance for the BASA/MIP Agreement (MIP-G)

Page 1 of 21 Amendment dated 09 March 2007

European Aviation Safety Agency

Guidance material for the US / European Bilateral Aviation Safety

Agreement (BASA) and

Maintenance Implementation Procedures (MIP)

MIP Guidance (MIP-G) (Superseding former JAA TGL 22)

Interim Note 1 It is the responsibility of all EASA Part-145 approval holders to ensure that their supplement meets the requirements of the MIP-G.

The repair station should contact the local FAA FSDO for acceptance of any EASA Part-145 supplement amendments in accordance with this guidance.

Contents

Introduction 3 Section 1 Special conditions applicable to US Repair Stations 3 Section 2 Application for EASA Part-145 Approval 4 Section 3 Continuation of EASA Part-145 Approval 5 Section 4 Amendment of EASA Part-145 Approval 5 Section 5 Revocation and suspension 6 Section 6 Appeal and conflict resolution 6 Appendix 1 EASA Example Supplement 7 Appendix 2 EASA Form 16 Application Form 17 Appendix 3 EASA Form 9 FAA Recommendation 19

Maintenance Implementation Procedures Guidance (MIP-G)

EASA APPROVAL OF FAR-145 APPROVED REPAIR STATIONS LOCATED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

Introduction This Guidance details how an FAA Certificated FAR Part 145 repair station primarily located in the USA and subject to the terms of the Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA) and Maintenance Implementation Procedures (MIP) concluded between the USA and Europe, may qualify to be approved in accordance with European Commission Regulation (EC) No 2042/2003 Annex II, EASA Part-145 (hereinafter referred to as EASA Part-145) The FAA and EASA have established the differences between EASA Part-145 and Title 14 of US Code of Regulations, Part 145 (hereinafter referred to as FAR Part 145) and these differences are listed in the Maintenance Implementation Procedures (MIP) as agreed between the FAA and EASA. As a result a USA based FAA Certificated FAR Part 145 repair station when in compliance with EASA published maintenance special conditions may apply for the grant of an EASA Part-145 approval. Section 1 EASA maintenance special conditions for the Approval of maintenance from FAA Certificated FAR Part 145 repair stations in accordance with the BASA/MIP agreement 1.1 EASA Special Conditions Applicable to U.S.-Based Repair Stations EASA agrees that an FAA approved repair station that applies to work on a civil aeronautical product under the regulatory control of EASA is eligible for an EASA approval certificate if the FAA endorses via EASA procedures that the repair station complies with all of the following Special Conditions: (a) The repair station shall hold a valid FAA repair station certificate issued in accordance with the current

FAR Part 145 issued as a final rule and shall demonstrate the need for the EASA Part-145 approval. (b) Repair stations with airframe/aircraft or limited airframe ratings shall have appropriate covered

hangar(s) for the base maintenance of aircraft. (c) The repair station shall comply with the current Commission Regulation regarding EASA fees and

charges.1 (d) The repair station shall provide a supplement to its Repair Station Manual (RSM) accepted by the

FAA on behalf of EASA. The supplement must contain a statement by the accountable manager of the repair station, as defined in the current version of EASA Part-145.A.30 (a), which commits the repair station to compliance with the MIP and these special conditions. The supplement shall include the following:

(i) Detailed procedures for the operation of an independent quality monitoring system. (ii) Procedures for the release or approval for return to service that meet the requirements of

EASA Part-145.A.50 for aircraft and the use of the FAA Form 8130-3 for aircraft components, and any other information required by the owner or operator as appropriate.

(iii) For airframe/aircraft rated facilities, procedures to ensure that the certificate of airworthiness

and the Airworthiness Review certificate are valid prior to the issue of a release to service document.

(iv) Procedures to ensure that repairs and modifications as defined by EASA requirements are

accomplished in accordance with data approved by EASA. (v) A procedure for the repair station to ensure that the FAA approved initial and recurrent training

program and any revision thereto includes human factors training. (vi) Procedures for reporting unairworthy conditions as required by EASA Part-145.A.60 on civil

aeronautical products to the EASA, aircraft design organization, and the customer or operator.

1 The EU fees and charges Regulation applicable to EASA can be found at www.easa.europa.eu

(vii) Procedures to ensure completeness of, and compliance with, the customer or operator work

order or contract including notified EASA airworthiness directives and other notified mandatory instructions.

(viii) For FAR 121 carriers, which are also FAR 145 approved and subject to this MIP procedures,

detailing the approval of line stations within the United States. (ix) The repair station must specify the items to be contracted and have procedures in place to ensure that contractors meet the terms of these implementation procedures; that is, using an EASA approved Part-145 organization or, if using an organisation which does not hold an EASA Part-145 approval, the repair station returning the product to service is responsible for ensuring its airworthiness.

(e) The EASA Part-145 approval certification shall not exceed the scope of the ratings and limitations contained in the FAR part 145 certificate.

1.2. To continue to be approved in accordance with EASA Part-145, via the terms of this MIP, the repair station shall comply with all of the following Special Conditions: (a) Allow EASA, or the FAA on behalf of EASA, to inspect it for continued compliance with the

requirements of the FAR Part 145 and these Special Conditions, (i.e., EASA Part-145). (b) Accept that investigation and enforcement action may be taken by EASA in accordance with any

relevant EC regulations and EASA procedures. (c) Cooperate with any EASA investigation or enforcement action. (d) Continue to comply with FAR part 145 and these Special Conditions. Section 2 Guidance for initial application for an EASA Part-145 Approval Applicant actions

2.1 The repair station should demonstrate the need for an EASA Part-145 Approval which may be in the form of a letter of intent, a work order or a contract with details of the relevant customer. A relevant customer may be an EASA Part-145 Approved maintenance organisation or a European operator. The repair station should complete 2 copies of the EASA Form 16. (See appendix 2) 2.2 The repair station should establish an EASA Supplement based upon the example EASA Supplement (see appendix 1). 2.3 The 2 copies of EASA Form 16 plus the proposed EASA Supplement, the evidence of need as specified in paragraph 2.1 and a copy of the Air Agency Certificate and associated Operations Specifications should be sent to the supervising FAA Flight Standards District Office (FSDO) at least 60 days prior to the date initial Approval is required. 2.4 Compliance with the EASA fees and charges Regulation should be demonstrated. The EASA fees and charges regulation can be found at www.easa.europa.eu FAA actions 2.5 When satisfied with both the EASA Supplement and the evidence of need and subject to the satisfactory outcome of any audit carried out by the FAA, the FAA will make a recommendation to EASA on an EASA Form 9 (appendix 3). Note 1: The recommendation package from the FAA should include a copy of the completed EASA Form 9, a copy of the completed EASA Form 16 and a copy of the Air Agency Certificate and Associated Operations Specifications.

EASA actions 2.6 On receipt of a completed recommendation from the FAA and subject to satisfactory compliance with the EASA fees and charges regulation, the Agency will issue an EASA Part-145 Approval Certificate to the repair station. Section 3 Guidance for Continuation of the EASA Part-145 Approval Applicant actions 3.1 Every two year period the repair station should show that there is a need for an EASA Part-145 Approval by either complying with paragraph 2.1 or submitting evidence of having carried out maintenance for a paragraph 2.1 relevant customer in the form of a copy of an issued FAA Form 8130-3 to such customer. Evidence of need is assessed by the FAA. 3.2 The repair station should complete the EASA Form 16 in duplicate. 3.3 Every two year period the repair station should demonstrate compliance with the EASA fees and charges Regulation. The EASA fees and charges regulation can be found at www.easa.europa.eu 3.4 The repair station should check that the EASA Supplement reflects the repair station procedures and activities. Any changes will require amendment of the EASA Supplement. 3.5 The 2 copies of EASA Form 16 and the evidence of need as specified in paragraph 2.1 plus any amendment to the EASA Supplement, if appropriate, and a copy of the Air Agency Certificate and associated Operations Specifications should be sent to the supervising FAA District Office at least 60 days prior to the end of the current two year continuation cycle of the EASA Part-145 approval. FAA actions 3.6 Following the satisfactory outcome of the required two year audit carried out by the FAA District Office, and subject to any amendments to the supplement being accepted by the FAA, the FAA will recommend continuation of the EASA Part-145 Approval to the Agency. Note 1: The recommendation package should include a copy of the completed EASA Form 9, a copy of the completed EASA Form 16 and a copy of the Air Agency Certificate and associated operations specifications if any changes have occurred. EASA actions 3.7 On receipt of a completed recommendation from the FAA and subject to compliance with EASA fees and charges regulation the EASA Manager of Applications (MAC) will issue a letter verifying continuation of the approval for a further two year period subject to continued compliance with the terms of the BASA/MIP agreement. Section 4 Amendment guidance for Name change, Address change, Repair Station number change, etc. of the EASA Part-145 Approval. 4.1 Proceed as per paragraph 2, initial Approval, except where stated otherwise in paragraphs 4.2 and 4.3. 4.2 Any amendment involving the EASA Supplement should be submitted to the supervising FAA District Office for approval. 4.3 Evidence of need as specified in paragraph 2.1 is not required for the amendment process. Note: To action changes under this section EASA will require a recommendation from the FAA. The recommendation package should include a copy of the completed EASA Form 9, a copy of the completed EASA Form 16 and a copy of the revised Air Agency Certificate and associated Operations Specifications.

Section 5 Revocation and suspension An EASA Part-145 Approval shall be suspended or revoked by EASA if the certificate becomes invalid under the conditions specified in the BASA/MIP agreement, or if the organisation fails to comply with the Agency’s fees and charges Regulation. It should also be noted that FAA revocation of the FAR Part 145 Certificate automatically invalidates the EASA Part-145 Approval Certificate. There is no right of appeal to EASA when the FAA revokes or limits any FAA FAR Part 145 Repair Station Certificate. EASA shall notify the holder of an EASA Part-145 Approval in writing about any suspension or revocation including the option for the organisation to appeal against the decision in accordance with Article 35 of Regulation No 1592/2002. Section 6 Appeal and conflict resolution If the Maintenance Organisation Approval holder does not accept the suspension or revocation, he/she may request the Executive Director of EASA to initiate a conflict resolution process. The Executive Director shall, after consultation of the Panel of Experts in maintenance matters, provide his decision with respect to the suspension/revocation. If the holder of the Maintenance Organisation Approval still does not accept the EASA Executive Director decision about suspension/revocation, he/she may appeal according to the related appeal provisions of Regulation EC No 1592/2002.

Appendix 1 to EASA MIP Guidance Example Supplement


EASA SUPPLEMENT REFERENCE NO. ..........

TO FAA FAR-145 REPAIR STATION MANUAL REFERENCE NO. .......... Company Name and Facility Address: FAA REPAIR STATION NO. This Supplement does not form part of the FAA FAR-145 Repair Station Manual. Compliance with the FAA approved Supplement together with the FAA FAR-145 Repair Station Manual forms the basis of the European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) Part-145 approval. This supplement forms part of the applicant’s obligations for EASA Part-145 approval as specified in the EASA MIP Guidance. The cover page of the EASA Supplement should include the intent of the above statement Note: This example EASA supplement gives guidance on the subjects which need to be addressed and translated into working procedures to ensure compliance with the EASA special conditions. The supplement must therefore be customised to satisfy the specific repair station procedures.

Appendix 1 to EASA MIP Guidance Example Supplement A. INDEX 1. LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Self Explanatory 2. AMENDMENT PROCEDURE This paragraph should specify that amendments must be submitted to the FAA FSDO for Approval

and that working practises and procedures must be reflected in the FAR 145 Repair Station Manual and, if appropriate, in this EASA Supplement. In addition this paragraph should identify who within the organisation is responsible for amendment action and for ensuring the FAA Approval process is carried out.

Failure to ensure that the FAR 145 Repair Station Manual and this EASA Supplement are kept up

to date in respect of regulatory changes and that the Repair Station staff comply with the procedures therein could invalidate the EASA Approval.

3. INTRODUCTION This paragraph should address why the supplement is necessary. EASA Part-145 is a European

requirement similar to FAR Part 145 The Maintenance Implementation Procedures (MIP) agreed between the FAA and EASA specifies

the basic differences between EASA Part-145 and FAR Part 145 and identifies these differences as special conditions.

A FAR Part 145 repair station can be EASA Part-145 approved when the repair station complies with the maintenance special conditions as detailed in this procedure and in addition to complying with FAR Part 145 and 43.

This supplement is therefore intended to ensure that the organisation is working in accordance with

the EASA Part-145 Approval Certificate and to identify the differences from FAR's that need to be taken into account.

4. ACCOUNTABLE MANAGER'S COMMITMENT STATEMENT This paragraph represents the agreement by the Accountable Manager that the organisation will

comply with the conditions specified in the Supplement whilst operating in accordance with the EASA Part-145 approval. It includes recognition of the consequences of failing to meet either requirements or standards.

The accountable manager is usually the organisation's Chief Executive Officer (CEO) or President but can, in the largest organisation be the Vice President (Engineering) so long as he/she is on the corporate Board and has full financial authority.

An acceptable statement for this paragraph would be: "This Supplement in conjunction with the approved FAA FAR 145 Inspection Procedures Manual

Ref. ...... defines the organisation and procedures upon which EASA approval is based. These procedures are approved by the undersigned, and must be adhered to, as applicable, when

maintenance work/orders are being progressed under the conditions of the EASA Part-145 approval.

It is accepted that the repair station’s procedures do not override the necessity of complying with

any additional requirements formally published by the EASA and notified to this organisation from time to time.

It is understood that the EASA will issue an Approval Certificate and list this repair station in an


EASA published list whilst the EASA is satisfied that the procedures are being followed and work standards maintained. It is further understood that EASA reserves the right to revoke the Approval Certificate if EASA considers that procedures are not followed or standards not upheld."

Signed by the Accountable Manager / for and on behalf of the repair station. Please note that whenever the accountable manager is replaced the new accountable manager

must sign the statement to ensure continuous EASA Part-145 Approval. 5. APPROVAL BASIS AND LIMITATION EASA approval is based upon compliance with FAR Part 145 and FAR Part 43 except where varied

by the conditions specified in the EASA BASA/MIP guidance. The approval of maintenance is limited to the scope of work permitted under the current Certificate

issued by the FAA to the repair station in accordance with FAR Part 145 for work carried out within the USA, and the limitations specified on the EASA Part-145 approval certificate.

6. ACCESS BY EASA AND FAA Identify the fact that EASA staff should be allowed access to the repair station for the purpose of

ascertaining compliance with procedures and standards and to investigate specific problems. The paragraph should also specify that FAA staff may access the repair station to investigate on

behalf of the EASA. 7. WORK ORDERS / CONTRACTS The repair station should receive a work order from the customer which it can understand. Work

orders should specify the inspections, repairs, alterations, overhaul, airworthiness directives and parts replacements that should be carried out.

The repair station should ensure that it has received a clear work order from the customer and

should nominate a technical person or persons in the repair station with responsibility for communicating with the customer in cases of doubt.

The customer remains responsible for correctly informing the repair station by work order of all

required maintenance and alterations. 8. APPROVED DESIGN ENGINEERING DATA For the EASA approved design engineering data is normally data supplied by the Original

Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) or data approved by the National Aviation Authority of the Type Certificate Holder (or equivalent) or data supplied by the customer and approved by the EASA. In all cases the customer is responsible for confirmation that the data is approved.

Repair design data developed by U.S. organisations/persons for use on EU-Registered aircraft and related articles 1. Automatically approved data All repair design data developed by US organisations/persons for use on an EU-Registered aircraft and related articles are approved by ED Decision 2004/04/CF, as amended by ED Decision 2007/../CF, except for critical component repair design data developed by organisations/persons which are not the TC/STC holder. Note: A critical component is defined as a part identified as critical by the design approval holder during the validation process, or otherwise by the exporting authority. Typically, such components include parts for which a replacement time, inspection interval, or related procedure is specified in the Airworthiness Limitations section or certification maintenance requirements of the manufacturer’s maintenance manual or Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.


For each individual repair design, this EASA approval is based on: 1) Major repair data approved by FAA (as substantiated via an FAA letter or properly executed FAA

Form 8110-3, 8100-9, or FAA Form 337) 2) Minor repair data submitted by the TC/STC holder or appliance design approval holder, or 3) Minor repair data determined to be acceptable data (under 14CFR part 43) as determined by a

U.S. maintenance organisation under FAA’s authorized system. Limitations: Regarding the acceptable minor repair design data described in (3) above, an EASA Part 145 maintenance organisation located outside the US territory cannot declare that acceptable data under 14CFR43 may be used on an EU-registered aircraft unless that data has been previously used on a N-registered aircraft. Such data must be approved by EASA or under an EASA DOA for use by an EASA Part 145 maintenance organisation located outside the US territory. Reference to the ED Decisions mentioned above shall be made in the release documents issued by the EASA 145 approved organisation; releasing the relevant EU registered aircraft or component to service. 2. Data which requires formal approval Repair design data on critical components, developed by organisations/persons which are not the TC/STC Holder, shall be submitted to the Agency for approval following the standard application procedure, with an EASA Form 31. Applicants do not need to hold a DOA if the repair data has been approved by the FAA.

9. AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVES The supplement must address the need for the repair station to hold a copy of all Airworthiness

Directives the customer requires embodied. It may be necessary for the customer to supply non FAA Airworthiness Directives.

The customer is responsible for specifying any Airworthiness Directive compliance required during

maintenance through the work order. 10. MAJOR REPAIRS / ALTERATIONS / MODIFICATIONS This paragraph should specify: "that the customer has obtained or is in the process of obtaining any

necessary approvals from the EASA or has confirmed that the repair station FAA approved data is acceptable."

11. RELEASE OF COMPONENTS AFTER MAINTENANCE Release to service of components up to and including complete powerplants shall be carried out in

accordance with FAR 43.9 except that paragraphs 7 to 10 of this Supplement shall also be taken into account. At the completion of maintenance an FAA Form 8130-3 shall be issued as a maintenance release by the repair station.

The FAA Form 8130-3 should include the EASA Part-145 release to service certifying statement

with the EASA Part-145 Approval Certificate number in block 13, and specify any overhaul, repairs, alterations, Airworthiness Directives, replacement parts, PMA parts and quote the reference and issue/revision of the approved data used.

An example completed 8130-3 shall be included by the repair station in the supplement.

Instructions shall be included in the supplement specifying that blocks 14 through 18 are not to be used by the repair station and that “newly overhauled” should be signed off in block 20 against the block 19 maintenance release.

The signature of the person returning the component to service shall be in block 20 with the FAA

Repair Station Certificate number in block 21.

Appendix 1 to EASA MIP Guidance Example Supplement The status of the component (repaired, inspected, overhauled etc.) shall appear in block 12 with

any relevant comments including detailed references to approved data, ADs etc. in block 13. Example: “Overhauled in accordance with CMM 111, section X, Rev 2, S/B 23 & FAA AD xyz complied with. Full details held on WO 456.”

Block 13 shall also contain the following statement:: “Certifies that the work specified in block 12/13 was carried out in accordance with EASA Part-145

and in respect to that work the component is considered ready for release to service under EASA Part-145 Approval Number: “EASA.145…….. “.

(The BASA/MIP procedure only recognises the dual release 8130-3 for component maintenance

release) The repair station shall identify in the Repair Station Manual roster those staff that are authorised to

issue the Form on behalf of the repair station. Note: The supplement should include information regarding the acceptability of components

authorised for use during maintenance, which should meet the intent of the following:

1. Component means any component part of an aircraft up to and including a complete powerplant and any operational or emergency equipment.

2. Only the following new and used components may be fitted during maintenance. 3. New Components 3.1 New components should be traceable to the OEM as specified in the Type Certificate (TC)

holders Parts Catalogue and be in a satisfactory condition for fitment. The new component should be accompanied by a release document issued by the OEM or Production Certificate (PC) holder. The release document should clearly state that it is issued under the approval of the relevant NAA under whose regulatory control the OEM or PC holder works.

3.2 For USA OEMs and PC holders release should be on the FAA Form 8130-3 as a new part. 3.3 For all EU States OEMs and PC holders release should be in accordance with EASA Part-21. 3.4 For Canadian OEMs and PC holders release should be on the TC Form 24-0078 as a new

part. 3.5 Standard parts are exempt from the forgoing provisions, except that such parts should be

accompanied by a conformity statement and be in a satisfactory condition for fitment. 3.6 PMA parts may only be accepted as detailed in EASA Part-21 or any EU/US bilateral

agreement. 4. Used Components 4.1 Used components should be traceable to maintenance organisations and repair stations

approved by the Authority who certified the previous maintenance and/or in the case of life limited parts certified the life used. The used component should be in a satisfactory condition for fitment and be eligible for fitment as stated in the TC holders Parts Catalogue.

4.2 Used components from EASA approved USA repair stations should be accompanied by an

FAA Form 8130-3 issued as a maintenance release. 4.3 Used components from a USA repair station not EASA approved should not be used even if

accompanied by an FAA Form 8130-3 4.4 Used components from EASA Part-145 approved maintenance organisations should be

accompanied by an EASA Form 1 issued as a maintenance release.

Appendix 1 to EASA MIP Guidance Example Supplement 12. CERTIFICATE OF AIRWORTHINESS (C of A) VALIDITY Whilst EU aircraft have indefinite C of A’s the C of A’s validity period is verified by means of an

“airworthiness review certificate” (ARC). The EASA Operator or owner is responsible for ensuring the C of A remains valid but the repair station should ensure that the C of A is valid from the expiry date as detailed on the ARC before issue of a release to service as specified in paragraph 13. If the ARC has expired, the customer should be informed before issue of a release to service as specified in paragraph 13.

This paragraph is only applicable to repair stations with airframe/aircraft and/or limited airframe

rating. 13. RELEASE OF AIRCRAFT AFTER MAINTENANCE Release to service of aircraft should be carried out in accordance with FAR 43.9 except that

paragraphs 7 to 10 and 12 of this supplement must be taken into account. At the completion of maintenance the following certification should be made in the aircraft maintenance record.

Return to Service in Accordance with FAR 43.9: "Certifies that the work specified except as otherwise specified was carried out in accordance with FAA airworthiness regulations, and in respect to that work the aircraft is considered ready for release to service." Please note that the sub clause "except as otherwise specified" is intended for use with two types

of deviations as follows: a) The case where all required maintenance was not carried out. The maintenance not carried

out must be listed on the FAR 43.9 Return to Service. b) The case where the particular maintenance requirement was only EASA approved and not

FAA approved. Example: an EASA Airworthiness Directive not approved by the FAA. Where the customer operator requires his/her paperwork to be signed the following alternate

certification can be made. Release to Service in Accordance with EASA Part-145.A.50: "Certifies that the work specified except as otherwise specified was carried out in accordance with

EASA Part-145 and in respect to that work the aircraft is considered ready for release to service." In all cases the repair station must issue the certification when all required maintenance has been

carried out except that if it was not possible to complete all maintenance then such details must be endorsed on the Release to Service and the operator informed.

The EASA Part-145 Approval Certificate Number and the FAA FAR Part 145 Certificate Number

must be quoted in all cases, whether it is a FAR 43 Return to Service or an EASA Part-145 Release to Service.

This paragraph is only applicable to repair stations with airframe and/or limited airframe rating. 14. REPORTING OF UNAIRWORTHY CONDITIONS When serious defects are found in EU regulated aircraft or components then such fact must be

reported to EASA, the aircraft design organization, and the customer or operator within 72 hours. When reporting to the EASA the identity of the customer must be included to allow follow up action.

15. QUALITY MONITORING SYSTEM The primary objective of the QM system is to enable the organisation to satisfy itself that it can

deliver a safe product and that it remains in compliance with FAR 43, FAR 145 and the EASA Special conditions.

There are two elements to the system: (1) An independent audit system (2) A management/control and follow up system.

Appendix 1 to EASA MIP Guidance Example Supplement The independent audit system is a process of sample audits of all aspects of the repair station's

ability to carry out all maintenance to the required standards. It represents an overview of the complete maintenance system and does not replace the need for mechanics to ensure that theycarry out maintenance to the required standard nor does it replace any associated inspection / quality control system. Independence should be established by ensuring that audits are not carried out by the personnel responsible for the function, procedure or product being audited.

The audit system should cover the following: 1. Procedural audits. The audits will monitor compliance with required aircraft/aircraft component standards and

adequacy of the maintenance procedures to ensure that such procedures invoke good maintenance practices and airworthy aircraft/aircraft components.

2. Product audits. The sample check of a product means to witness any relevant testing and visually inspect the product and associated documentation. The sample check should not involve repeat disassembly

or testing unless the sample check identifies findings requiring such action. It is acceptable to use personnel from one section/department to audit the work and products of

another section/ department in accordance with a procedure under this paragraph which defines the audit programme.

The process of sample audits may be carried out once per year as a single exercise or subdivided

over a year period in accordance with an audit programme. All applicable FAR 43/145 Paragraphs and the EASA special conditions as detailed in the EASA/FAA MIP should be checked

at least once per year against each primary product line. Repair stations with less than 10 people may contract the audit function to a person acceptable to

EASA who is not employed by the repair station, but, in this case the audit of all applicable FAR 43/145 paragraphs and EASA special conditions as detailed in the EASA/FAA MIP must be carried

out twice per year. A primary product line is any one aircraft or engine or avionic or mechanical product line where the

systems and procedures are very similar throughout that product line. The management control follow up system which must not be contracted to outside persons

consists of a system to ensure that all findings/discrepancies resulting from the independent audit system are corrected in a timely manner and to enable the accountable manager to remain informed of the state of compliance and any safety issues. The accountable manager should hold routine meetings to check the progress on clearing outstanding findings/discrepancies except that in the larger repair stations such meetings may be delegated on a day to day basis to the quality manager as long as the accountable manager meets at least once per year with the senior staff involved to review the overall performance.

Where the repair station has associated line stations the system should describe how these are

integrated into the system and should specify the need to audit each line station at least once per year.

Note that when applicable each line station that is used by an aircraft operated under the regulatory

control of an EU operator in accordance with the conditions of the EASA/FAA MIP should be listed giving its location and the basic maintenance capability at each such location.

Any line station process or procedure that differs from the processes or procedures specified in the

FAR-145 Repair station manual or is not referenced in the manual needs to be specified. The quality monitoring system as specified in paragraph 15 must be extended to include the need

for the accepted organisation to audit the listed line station locations. One example of the particular product line should be used as the basis of each audit except in the

case of stores audits when a random selection of parts should be used for the audit. It therefore follows that a repair station maintaining aircraft and engines (off aircraft) and mechanical parts (off aircraft) would need to carry out 3 audit sample checks each year with the particular product type changed each year. An example audit programme is attached.

Appendix 1 to EASA MIP Guidance Example Supplement A report should be raised for each audit carried out describing what was checked and any resulting

findings/discrepancies. The report should be sent to the relevant department(s) for rectification action giving target rectification dates. The relevant department(s) is (are) required to rectify the findings/discrepancies and inform the quality department.

The example overleaf details an example of an audit programme which can be applied in the

aircraft hangars, engine workshops and component workshops. It should be understood that not all subjects will apply in all cases and the example audit programme should be used as a starting basis after which it can be altered to fit the particular type of repair station.

A product should be selected in each hangar and each workshop and the example audit

programme applied at least once per year (twice per year in the case of a repair station with less than 10 people and which chooses to contract the audit to an outside person) except that in the case of procedures which are common throughout the repair station the procedure need only be audited once per year if there are no problems.

16. PROVISION OF HANGAR SPACE FOR AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE Hangar space should be available for aircraft operated under the regulatory control of an EU

Member State undergoing maintenance and/or alteration. There is a need to ensure hangar space will be available at the time of maintenance and alterations, when the contract is agreed with the customer. This is only applicable to repair stations with airframe and/or limited airframe ratings.

17. CONTRACTED MAINTENANCE

This section should describe the procedures the repair station will use to ensure that the items to be contracted are specified and that the contracts meet the terms of the implementation procedures. Note: When part of the maintenance is contracted to another organisation, the repair station must ensure that the other organisation(s) are approved to EASA Part-145 for the maintenance they carry out. If maintenance is contracted to a Non EASA Approved organisation then this is considered to be a Non–Certificated Facility and must be controlled under the provisions described in FAR 145.217 (a) 2 (b). All organisations contracted by the repair station shall be listed by the repair station stating against each organisation whether it is EASA approved or under the repair station control via these procedures. Note: To prevent duplication with the FAA Repair Station Manual and the EASA Supplement it is permissible to make a cross reference to the RSM procedures in the EASA Supplement making a clear reference to where they are to be found,

18. HUMAN FACTORS

Procedures must be in place to detect and rectify maintenance errors that may endanger the safe operation of aircraft. Procedures must also address resources, human performance limitations and shift changeover and how personnel are trained to ensure an understanding of the application of human factors principles.

19. AIR CARRIER LINE STATIONS

Line stations located in the USA as part of a US FAR Part 121 Air Carrier operation can only be accepted if the air carrier holds an FAA FAR Part 145 Certificate for at least one of its main maintenance facilities valid for the aircraft type(s) and scope of work relevant to the line station(s) and the line station(s) comply with para 4, as applicable and can show that the quality monitoring system covers the air carrier certificate, the FAR Part 145 certificate and the line stations. The EASA Supplement must include a procedure which clearly demonstrates that the quality system covers all stated activities. The organisation should contact EASA if it wishes to have a line station approved that is located outside both the USA and the EU. All line stations associated with the EASA Part-145 approval need


to be listed in the EASA Supplement together with associated aircraft type and primary maintenance capability. Line stations located in the EU Member States are not accepted under this process.

20. Work away from a Fixed Location

1. If a repair station is requested to perform maintenance on an EU registered aircraft or article located outside the continental United States or its territories the repair station may work away from its fixed location in the following cases.

a. For a one time special circumstance. If the EASA supplement does not have a written procedure for work away from station then the repair station must notify EASA in advance of doing the work. The notification must describe the work to be performed, the date of the work, the customer, and certify to the EASA that the repair station will follow all existing procedures in their current Repair Station Manual and EASA Supplement. EASA will review the application and the organization will be notified in writing with a copy to the FAA either accepting or rejecting the request. If the request is rejected then the reasons for so doing will be specified in the letter.

b. On a reoccurring basis when necessary subject to the FAA Operations Specification D100 being in place for this work and only to perform emergency or non-routine maintenance, to be defined for this guidance as urgent defect rectification or to provide assistance for an EU Registered aircraft or articles intended for fitment on EU registered aircraft. The procedural requirements that the repair station should use are defined in the FAA RSM. It is permissible to prevent duplication to make a cross reference to the RSM procedures in the EASA supplement for this aspect.

Note: This paragraph is not applicable to Line Stations where paragraph 19 is applicable


Example audit plan

AUDIT SUBJECT

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY ETC.

CFR 145.51 & 53 Change of Certificate

CFR 145.55 & 57 Renewal of Certificate

CFR 145.105 Changes of Facility/Location

CFR 145.103 Facilities

CFR.145.103 Special Facilities

CFR 145.151 & 153 Personnel

CFR 145.159 Repairman

CFR 145.161 Records of Personnel

CFR 145.155 & 211 Inspection system

CFR 145.109 & 217 Equipment & Material

CFR 145.107 & 201 & 203 Compliance with Certificate

CFR 145.109 & 201 Standards - See FAR 43

CFR145.157 & 213 Inspection of Work

CFR 145.21Work Records & Retention

CFR 145.221 Reporting Defects

FAR 43.2 Overhaul

FAR 43.3 Persons Auth to Perform Maintenance etc.

FAR 43.5 Approval for Return to Service

Key:

See associated audit reports for details

Carried out Corrective action required

Audit Completed/Closed

Audit Scheduled


Example audit plan/ continued

AUDIT SUBJECT

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY ETC

FAR 43.7 Persons Auth to Return to Service

FAR 43.9 Content of Maintenance & Alteration Records

FAR 43.12 Falsification of Records

FAR 43.13 Standards

FAR 43.15 Additional standards

EASA Supp 4 Current Acc Manager Statement Signature

EASA Supp 7 Customer Work Orders

EASA Supp 8 EASA Approved Data

EASA Supp 9 EASA Airworthiness Directives

EASA Supp 10 EASA Approved Major Repairs & Alterations

EASA Supp 11 Component Release on FAA 8130-3

EASA Supp 13 Aircraft Release or Return to Service

EASA Supp 14 Reporting Defects to EASA & Customer

EASA Supp 15 Quality Audit System

EASA Supp 16 Hangar space

EASA Supp 17 Contracted maintenance

EASA Supp 18 Human factors

EASA Supp 19 Air carrier line stations

EASA Supp 20 Work Away from Base

Key: See associated audit reports for details

Carried out Corrective action required

Audit Completed/Closed

Audit Scheduled

Appendix 2 to EASA BASA/MIP Guidance (MIP-G) Form 16 Application Form


European Aviation Safety Agency USA Repair Station application for initial / continuation / amendment of EASA Part-145 approval in accordance with the FAA / EASA MIP agreement.

EASA Form 16

1. FAR 145 Repair station name: FAR 145 certificate number: 2. Address of repair station: 3. Mailing Address (if different from 2 above): 4. Tel: Fax: E-Mail: 5. Please select the type of application and complete the appropriate section of the form 16 a. Initial □ b. Continuation □ c. Amendment □ 5a. Initial application (Please give a brief summary of the organisation history, work capability and number of staff employed associated with the approval.) 5b. Continuation EASA Cert No: 5c. Amendment (Please detail the reason for amendment) EASA Cert No:

Appendix 2 to EASA BASA/MIP Guidance (MIP-G) Form 16 Application Form

6. Position and name of the (proposed*) accountable manager I wish to apply on behalf of this repair station for approval by the European Aviation Safety Agency as An EASA Part-145 approved maintenance organisation in accordance with the Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement and the Maintenance Implementation Procedures concluded between the United States and Europe. I understand that when certifying work for a European Union customer, the repair station is required to work in accordance with FAR Part 43 and 145 except where varied by the EASA special conditions specified in the MIP Guidance and accept that failure to comply could result in EASA enforcement action against this repair station. 7. Signature of the (proposed*) accountable manager Place Date (* Only applicable in the case of an initial Part-145 application where the Accountable Manager has not been accepted by the FAA. However the form should be signed for each application.) Note 1-address to which the application form should be sent Manager Applications and Certifications European Aviation Safety Agency Postfach 10 12 53 D-50452 Cologne Germany Fax: +49 221 89990 999 or 0049 221 89990 99 (Please use the standard international dialling code) E-Mail: [email protected] Note 1-information on fees and charges For information regarding the current fees and charges please refer to the EASA fees and charges Regulation which can be found on the EASA web site www.easa.europa.eu

Appendix 3 to EASA BASA/MIP Guidance EASA Form 9


FAA STATUS REPORT ON AN EASA APPROVED FAR PART 145 REPAIR STATION OR APPLICATION FOR EASA APPROVAL

EASA Form 9

REPAIR STATION DETAILS: Name:

Address:

Tel: Fax: FAA Cert:

If known, EASA Cert No:

COMPLIANCE STATUS: (Tick relevant box) Yes No N/A

1. FARs Part 43 & 145

2. Evidence of need shown

3. FAA access satisfactory

4. Accountable Manager signature in Supplement

5. Work orders clear

6. Work orders followed

7. FAA approved data used except for items 9, 10, 11 & 12

8. FAA ADs used on original USA TC products

9. Foreign ADs used on original foreign TC products

10. Additional EASA ADs on any TC Product

11. Major repairs EASA approved

12. Major alterations EASA approved

13. Component maintenance release complete

14. FAA Form 8130-3 used for component release

15. Awareness of Airworthiness Certificate validity

16. Aircraft maintenance release complete

17. Reporting serious defects to EASA

18. Quality Monitoring System working

19. EU regulated aircraft hangared

20. Contracted Maintenance control

21. Aircraft components used comply with EASA Supplement item 11

22. Human Factors

FAA OVERSIGHT AUDIT: The last FAA audit of this repair station was completed on EASA SUPPLEMENT STATUS: The EASA Supplement of this repair station has been examined and found to comply with the intent of the EASA Supplement Example contained in appendix 1 to the EASA MIP Guidance.

Appendix 3 to EASA BASA/MIP Guidance EASA Form 9

FAA STATUS REPORT ON AN EASA APPROVED FAR PART 145 REPAIR STATION OR APPLICATION FOR EASA APPROVAL

EASA Form 9

FINDINGS / DISCREPANCIES STATUS: The following significant findings / discrepancies were found during the preceding 2 year audit period and corrected as indicated (state “None” if there are none): FINDINGS / DISCREPANCY DETAILS

DATE CORRECTED

FILE REF.

RECOMMENDATION: This repair station is considered to be in compliance with FAR Part 43/145 and the EASA supplementary conditions with no significant findings / discrepancies outstanding at this time. It is therefore recommended that EASA approves the repair station / continues the repair station approval. PI Signature: Date: PI Name: FSDO: E-Mail: Tel No.: Fax No: NON RECOMMENDATION: (Only used in the case of an organisation already holding EASA approval.) This repair station has one or more significant findings / discrepancies outstanding as detailed above and may be or is being subjected to FAA enforcement action. EASA may therefore wish to review their current EASA approval of the repair station. PI Signature: Date: PI Name: FSDO: E-Mail: Tel No.: Fax No:

Rev. 1Page 1 of 11July 01, 2007

CANADIAN SUPPLEMENT TO THEWEST STAR REPAIR STATION MANUAL

CANADIAN SUPPLEMENTTO THE

WEST STARREPAIR STATION MANUAL

Reference: Repair Station & Quality Control Manual

FAA REPAIR STATIONCERTIFICATE NUMBER: WTXR173J

REVISION LEVEL: Rev. 1

MANUAL CONTROL NUMBER:



TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page No.

1. LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES.............................................................................. 32. REVISION AND CONTROL ................................................................................. 43. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 44. SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ANY PERSON REQUIRED TO

COMPLY WITH THIS SUPPLEMENT.................................................................. 54.1 TCCA SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO U.S. BASED REPAIR

STATIONS AND MECHANIC CERTIFICATE HOLDERS.................................... 64.2 REPAIR STATIONS PERFORMING MAINTENANCE, PREVENATATIVE

MAINTENANCE AND ALTERATIONS FOR CAR IV OR CARVIICOMMERCIAL OPERATORS ............................................................................. 6

4.3 INVESTIGATION AND ENFORCEMENT............................................................. 75 DEFINITIONS....................................................................................................... 86 ACCESS BY TCCA AND THE FAA..................................................................... 97 CUSTOMER WORK ORDERS AND INSTRUCTIONS ........................................ 98 APPROVED DESIGN ENGINEERING DATA.................................................... 109 AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVES....................................................................... 1010 MAJOR REPAIRS, ALTERATIONS AND MODIFICATIONS ............................ 1011 RELEASE OF COMPONENETS AFTER MAINTENANCE................................ 10

APPENDIX A- ADVISORY CIRCULAR 43-10 AS REVISED



2. REVISON AND CONTROLThis Supplement shall be revised as required consistent with current operations and Canadianrequirements. The Quality Assurance Manager will review this Supplement periodically; confirmingthe Supplement is still current and valid for use, or identify needed changes. The Quality AssuranceManager will have any revisions he finds necessary produced in a final form for coordination with theFAA Flight Standards District Offices (“FAA FSDO”) at Salt Lake City, Utah as described below.Each revision to this Supplement will include all pages, which will all bear the new revision numberand date.

The Quality Assurance Manager will send two copies of each revision to the Flight StandardsDistrict Office for review. Upon acceptance of the proposed revision, the FAA Flight StandardsDistrict Office will sign and date the appropriate line on the List of Effective Pages. One copy is thenreturned to West Star and the other retained to revise the Flight Standards District Office's copy ofthe Supplement. Receipt of the returned copy from the FAA FSDO by the repair station signifiesrevision of the Flight Standards District Office's copy of the Supplement.

Upon receipt of the FAA accepted revision at West Star, the Quality Assurance Manager willdistribute copies of the revision to the IT department to be posted on the company intranet and allpaper copies will be distributed to all manual holders as required. Upon receipt of the revision, eachmanual holder is responsible for reviewing and inserting the revised Supplement into his/herassigned Repair Station Manual.

Additions, deletions, or revisions to text in an existing section will be identified by a revision bar inthe margin of the page adjacent to the change, by highlighting the text in red, or both.

Failure to ensure that the 14 CFR part 145 Repair Station/Quality Control Manual, and this TCCASupplement are kept up to date in respect of regulatory changes, and that the applicable staff of therepair station comply with the procedures therein, could invalidate the TCCA approval.

3. INTRODUCTIONThis supplement is prepared in accordance with the latest revision of FAA Advisory Circular 43-10,(as revised), and the current revision will be inserted into this supplement as Appendix A. Thissupplement shall be referenced at all times when maintenance, preventive maintenance, oralterations are completed on Canadian registered aircraft.

All maintenance completed by the Repair Station on Canadian registered aircraft is completed inaccordance with the latest revision of the manufacturer’s maintenance manual, other data approvedby the FAA, and/or the Special Conditions set forth in this Supplement, as required by the MIP.

To be able to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations on Canadianaeronautical products, this repair station must meet the applicable requirements contained in CAR571 and CAR 573.



This supplement contains procedures unique to the Canadian aeronautical products, specifictraining requirements, and reporting requirements.

This repair stations maintains the standards set forth in the Repair Station/Quality Control Manualand requirements of the MIP for Canadian registered aircraft.

4.0. SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ANY PERSON REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITHTHIS SUPPLEMENT.

a. Only FAA or TCCA-approved or acceptable parts or components as applicable areused to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations to United States orCanadian aeronautical products.

b. Maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations must be performed inaccordance with current ICA or manufacturers’ recommendations that will return theaeronautical product to its original or properly altered condition.

c. Maintenance or alterations must be certified by an approval for return to service or amaintenance release that meets the requirements of 14 CFR part 43, sections 43.9 and43.11 or CAR 571.10, as applicable, for aircraft and the use of the FAA Form 8130–3 orTCCA Authorized Release Certificate for aircraft components, and any other informationrequired by the owner or operator, as appropriate. For the purposes of compliance withthis supplement, the requirements of 14 CFR part 43, sections 43.9, 43.11, and CAR571.10 are considered equivalent.

d. Where maintenance or alterations are performed by a maintenance organization, themaintenance organization must hold a valid FAA repair station certificate or CanadianAMO certificate issued in accordance with the most current 14 CFR part 145 issued as afinal rule, or applicable CAR.

e. Major repairs and alterations on U.S. aeronautical products must be recorded on FAAForm 337 and a copy provided to the owner/operator of the aircraft and a copy sent tothe FAA by mail or electronic means within 48 hours of the aircraft’s return to service.

f. Major repairs or alterations performed on a Canadian aeronautical product must berecorded on FAA Form 337 or in accordance with Standard 571, appendix L, and sent tothe TCCA within 48 hours by mail or electronic means.

g. Maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations performed on an aeronauticalproduct under the control of a 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air carrier must be performed inaccordance with that air carrier’s manual.

h. Any serious defects or unairworthy conditions on civil aeronautical products must bereported to the FAA or TCCA, as applicable.



i. FAA-approved repair stations should submit reports of any suspected unapprovedparts found on Canadian aeronautical products to the air operator concerned, forreporting to Transport Canada in accordance with the operator’s approved procedures.

4.1. TCCA SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO U.S.-BASED REPAIR STATIONS ANDMECHANIC CERTIFICATE HOLDERS.

a. The TCCA agrees that an FAA-certificated repair station or mechanic certificate holdermay perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations (with the exceptionof annual inspections) on a civil aeronautical product under the regulatory control of theTCCA and approve that product for return to service if the repair station or mechaniccertificate holder complies with the following special conditions:

All repairs and alterations as defined by TCCA requirements must beaccomplished in accordance with data approved by or acceptable to the TCCA.

In the case of work performed by a repair station, the work will not exceed thescope of the ratings and limitations contained in the 14 CFR part 145 certificateand authorized functions listed on the repair station Capabilities List or operationsspecifications.

In the case of a major repair or alteration performed by a mechanic certificateholder, the mechanic may perform the work. However, a mechanic certificateholder with inspection authorization must approve the product for return toservice.

In the case of maintenance or alterations performed on aircraft operated incommercial air service pursuant to Part IV or Part VII of the CAR’s, a repairstation that meets the additional requirements specified in paragraphs 4.2 and 4.3shall perform the work.

4.2. REPAIR STATIONS PERFORMING MAINTENANCE, PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, ANDALTERATIONS FOR CAR IV OR CAR VII COMMERCIAL OPERATORS.

4.2.1. In addition to the other requirements specified in this supplement, a repair stationperforming maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations on aircraft operating incommercial air service under CAR IV or CAR VII shall have:

a. Procedures to ensure compliance with the air operator’s work order or contract,including notified TCCA airworthiness directives and other notified mandatoryinstructions contained in TCCA-approved air carriers’ manuals;



b. Procedures to ensure that all current airworthiness directives published by theTCCA that are applicable to the work being performed are available to maintenancepersonnel;

c. Procedures to ensure that major repairs and major alterations as defined in CAR Iare accomplished in accordance with data approved by the TCCA;

d. Procedures to ensure that major repairs and major alterations are reported toTCCA using FAA Form 337 or an equivalent method acceptable to TCCA;

e. Procedures for the reporting to the TCCA any serious defects or unairworthyconditions on civil aeronautical products;

f. Procedures to ensure compliance with the manufacturer’s maintenance manuals orICA, and handling deviations; and

g. A training program that ensures each employee assigned to perform maintenance,preventive maintenance, or alterations is capable of performing the assigned task,and that each person who approves an aircraft for return to service followingmaintenance or alteration has been trained on the aircraft type. Records of suchtraining must be retained for a minimum of 2 years.

4.3. TO HOLD A REPAIR STATION AUTHORIZATION TO MAINTAIN COMMERCIALLYOPERATED CANADIAN AIRCRAFT.

a. The repair station must continue to comply with 14 CFR part 145 and these specialconditions.

b. The repair station must allow the TCCA, or the FAA on behalf of the TCCA, to inspectit for continued compliance with 14 CFR part 145 and these special conditions and tomake its manual and the supplement required by these special conditions available forinspection.

c. Investigations and enforcement by the TCCA may be undertaken in accordance withTCCA rules and directives.

d. The repair station must cooperate with any investigation or enforcement action.

5.0 DEFINITIONS- For the purposes of this supplement (and notwithstanding definitionscontained in 14 CFR or the CARs), the following definitions apply:

a. ACA—Aircraft Certification Authority issued by an AMO under CAR 573.



b. Alteration or Modification—Making a change to the construction, configuration,performance, environmental characteristics, or operating limitations of the affected civilaeronautical product.

c. CAR—Canadian Aviation Regulations.

d. CFR—Code of Federal Regulations, specifically in Title 14 of the Code of FederalRegulations, parts 1 through 199.

e. Civil Aeronautical Product—Any civil aircraft, aircraft engine, or propeller orsubassembly, appliance, material, part, or component to be installed thereon.

f. Compliance with 14 CFR Part 43—Compliance with the latest issue of CAR 571 andthe FAA special conditions as set forth in this supplement and associated TCCAguidance material, as applicable.

g. Compliance with 14 CFR Part 145—In the case of a Canadian organization,compliance with the latest issue of CAR 573 and the FAA special conditions as set forthin this supplement and associated TCCA guidance material as applicable whenmaintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations are performed in Canada.

h. Compliance with CAR 571—Compliance with the latest issue of 14 CFR part 43 andthe TCCA special conditions as set forth in this supplement, recognizing that advisorycirculars (AC) provide additional guidance in this area.

i. Compliance with CAR 573—In the case of a part 145 repair station, compliance withthe latest issue of 14 CFR part 145 and the TCCA special conditions as set forth in thissupplement when maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations are performed inthe United States, recognizing that AC's provide additional guidance in this area.

j. Data Approved by the FAA—Data that is approved by the Administrator or theAdministrator’s designated representative.

k. Data Approved by the TCCA—Data that is approved by the TCCA or by a person ororganization delegated or approved by the TCCA for that purpose.

l. FAA Acceptable—Data that is acceptable to the Administrator, such as serviceinformation recommended by a type certificate (TC) holder, or industry standard datathat supports eligibility of installation of standard parts (such as bolts and nuts)conforming to established industry or U.S. specifications.

m. FAA-Certificated Airman—An individual issued a mechanic certificate or repairmancertificate by the FAA, under 14 CFR part 65.



n. Maintenance—The performance of inspection, overhaul, repair, preservation, and thereplacement of parts, materials, appliances, or components of a civil aeronauticalproduct to ensure the continued airworthiness of that product, excluding alterations ormodifications.

o. MPM—Maintenance Policy Manual approved by TCCA for an AMO.

p. Preventive Maintenance—Simple or minor preservation, operations and thereplacement of small standard parts not involving complex assembly operations.

q. RCA—Restricted Certification Authority issued by TCCA under CAR 571.11.

r. Required Inspection Items—The items of maintenance and alterations that must beinspected by a person other than the one who performed the work. These items includeat least those that could result in a failure, malfunction, or defect endangering the safeoperation of the aircraft, if not performed properly or if improper parts or materials areused.

s. TCCA-Transport Canada Civil Aviation

6. ACCESS BY TCCA AND THE FAATCCA and the FAA shall be allowed access to West Star facilities and documents to verify compliancewith procedures and standards and to investigate specific problems. Furthermore, the FAA staff shall beallowed access to ascertain compliance and investigate problems on behalf of TCCA.

7. CUSTOMER WORK ORDERS AND INSTRUCTIONSMaintenance performed by West Star for foreign operators is complicated by the fact that there may beoccasions when non-FAA maintenance requirements, such as a foreign Airworthiness Directive are notknown to West Star. This may occur because the information is not included in the information routinelyreviewed by West Star. Consequently, the customer is responsible to provide explicit instructions for allwork subject to the procedures and requirements of this Supplement.

If there are any questions about the interpretation of a work order or other work instructions, clarificationshall be obtained from the customer before work begins. In general, work orders should specify theinspections, repairs, alterations, overhaul, airworthiness directives, and parts replacements that must becarried out. The Team Leader assigned to the project shall be the primary customer contact and shallassure that all customer instructions are understood.

8. APPROVED DESIGN ENGINEERING DATAApproved design engineering data is either approved by the national aviation authority (equivalent of theFAA) of the Type Certificate holder (typically the original equipment manufacturer), or it is data supplied



by the customer and approved by the appropriate TCCA national aviation authority.

If there are any questions concerning the approval status of design engineering data to be used byWest Star, the customer shall provide clarification prior to the initiation of the work requiring suchdata.

9. AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVESTCCA authorities either issue their own airworthiness directives or accept FAA directives and issueadditional directives.

West Star shall determine from the customer what airworthiness directives the customer requires to befollowed in the work to be performed. This information, if applicable, should be a part of the work orderor other instructions. In some cases, it will be necessary for the customer to supply the informationnecessary to incorporate airworthiness directive requirements.

10. MAJOR REPAIRS, ALTERATIONS, AND MODIFICATIONSThe approval of major repairs, alterations, and modifications will involve TCCA authorities. Therefore, itis essential for the customer to ensure that the appropriate TCCA has provided any required approvals.

West Star shall establish that the customer has obtained the necessary approvals or has initiated actionto do so before West Star begins any work.

11. RELEASE OF COMPONENTS AFTER MAINTENANCERelease to service of components up to and including complete power plants shall be in accordancewith FAR Part 43.9. At the completion of maintenance, West Star will issue FAA Form 8130-3 asrequired. Reference FAA order 8130.21 (or later revision), for detailed instructions for completing FAAForm 8130-3.

If there are any questions concerning the approval status of parts or components to be used by WestStar, the customer shall provide clarification prior to the initiation of the work requiring such parts orcomponents.



APPENDIX AAdvisory Circular 43-10, (As Revised)

United States-Canadian BASA/MIP Maintenance(Attached)

Canadian Supplement

Blank Page.doc


Advisory Circular

Subject: United States−Canadian BASA/MIP Maintenance

Date: 10/3/06 Initiated by: AFS-300

AC No: 43-10B

This advisory circular (AC) provides air carriers, repair stations, and certificated airmen with recommended procedures for maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations (excluding annual inspections) performed on United States aeronautical products located in Canada by Canadian Approved Maintenance Organizations (AMO) and Aircraft Maintenance Engineers (AME) and Canadian aeronautical products located in the United States by U.S. repair stations and certificated airmen.

The AC was developed to provide guidance relating to the Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement (BASA) and accompanying Maintenance Implementation Procedures (MIP) between the United States and Canada.

This AC is not mandatory and does not constitute a regulation. This AC presents recommendations for an acceptable means, but not the only means, to comply with the MIP.

ORIGINAL SIGNED BY James J. Ballough Director, Flight Standards Service

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

CONTENTS

PART 1. GENERAL.......................................................................................................................1

PART 2. BILATERAL AVIATION SAFETY AGREEMENT (BASA) ......................................3

Chapter 1. General Information ...............................................................................................3

Chapter 2. BASA ......................................................................................................................3

Chapter 3. Maintenance Implementation Procedures ...............................................................4

Chapter 4. U.S. Repair Stations ................................................................................................4

Chapter 5. Canadian Approved Maintenance Organizations....................................................5

Chapter 6. U.S.-Certificated Airmen ........................................................................................7

Chapter 7. Canadian Aircraft Maintenance Engineers .............................................................7

PART 3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS................................................................................................9

Chapter 1. General Information About Part 3...........................................................................9

Chapter 2. Special Conditions for U.S. Aeronautical Products ................................................9

Chapter 3. Special Conditions for Canadian Aeronautical Products ......................................10

PART 4. ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION ........................................................................11

APPENDIX 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS (2 Pages).................................................................1

APPENDIX 2. DEFINITIONS (2 Pages) ....................................................................................1

APPENDIX 3. ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS (1 Page).............................................1

APPENDIX 4. IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES (18 Pages) ..........................................1

Page iii (and iv)

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

PART 1. GENERAL

100. ORGANIZATION. This AC has four parts. Part 1 contains general information about the AC. Part 2 addresses the BASA between the United States and Canada. Each chapter within part 2 addresses a separate operational aspect of maintenance related to the United States–Canadian BASA/MIP. Part 3 addresses special conditions related to performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations on U.S. or Canadian aeronautical products. Part 4 tells how to get more information regarding this AC. Finally, the appendices contain useful information such as the regulatory basis of the AC, a list of related publications, related definitions, and acronyms. Also contained in the appendices is a copy of the BASA and the MIP.

101. CANCELLATION. AC 43-10A, Mechanical Work Performed on U.S. and Canadian Registered Aircraft, dated February 25, 1983, is canceled.

Par 100 Page 1 (and 2)

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

PART 2. BILATERAL AVIATION SAFETY AGREEMENT (BASA)

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION

100. Part 2 of this AC gives guidance on the implementation of maintenance procedures negotiated with the BASA. This applies to U.S. repair stations, U.S.-or FAA-certificated airmen, Canadian AMOs, and Canadian AMEs.

101. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) recommends that persons maintaining U.S. or Canadian aeronautical products be familiar with the BASA and the associated MIP. In particular, U.S. air carriers should ensure that Canadian AMOs comply with the requirements of any special conditions listed in the MIP and procedures contained in the air carrier manual.

CHAPTER 2. BASA

200. The United States and Canada, to facilitate acceptance by each country of airworthiness approvals along with environmental testing and approval of civil aeronautical products, entered into the BASA. The BASA also includes the approvals and monitoring of maintenance facilities and alteration or modification facilities, maintenance personnel, and airmen of the other party. The BASA Executive Agreement may be found at http://www.faa.gov/aircraft/air_cert/international/bilateral_agreements/.

201. Each contracting party designated its civil aviation authority as the executive agent to implement this agreement. For the United States of America, the executive agent is the FAA of the Department of Transportation (DOT). For the Government of Canada, the executive agent is the Transport Canada Civil Aviation (TCCA) of the Department of Transport.

202. The FAA and the TCCA acknowledge that oversight of repair stations, FAA-certificated airmen, AMOs, and AMEs is necessary to ensure quality of work performed and adherence to the regulatory requirements of each party. To facilitate this, each party agrees to provide access on an unconditional basis to repair stations, FAA-certificated airmen, AMOs, AMEs, and noncertificated maintenance facilities performing maintenance on a U.S. or Canadian aeronautical product. Notification of visits to maintenance facilities needs to be made to the regulatory oversight agency for the repair facility being inspected. With this notification each authority may conduct independent inspections. Also, each authority may review the other authority’s surveillance records and other pertinent information for compliance to the MIP. The inspection will be conducted to ascertain that the performance of maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations are performed in accordance with the special conditions set forth in the MIP. The inspection is limited to the performance of work on the U.S. or Canadian aeronautical product. The inspection will not include determining the validity of the repair station, FAA-certificated airman, AMO, or AME certification or rating approvals.

a. Repair stations, certificated airmen, AMOs, and AMEs remain subject to the regulatory requirements and enforcement procedures described in subparagraphs 3.0.2b and 3.1.2b of the

Par 100 Page 3

AC 43-10B 10/3/06

MIP. FAA personnel will use the guidance in FAA Order 2150.3, Compliance and Enforcement Program, to process any enforcement actions against an AMO or AME.

b. The FAA and TCCA will conduct periodic joint evaluations of each other’s continued compliance with the terms of the MIP. Such evaluations may include visits to repair stations/certificated airmen/AMOs/AMEs to ensure the accurate application of the MIP.

CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES

300. This chapter describes the FAA and the TCCA procedures for implementing the maintenance and alteration or modification provisions of the Agreement for the Promotion of Aviation Safety (BASA) between the Government of the United States and the Government of Canada, signed 12 June 2000. The objective of the MIP is to outline the terms and conditions under which the FAA and the TCCA can accept each other’s inspections and evaluations of U.S. repair stations and Canadian AMOs along with FAA-certificated airmen and Canadian AMEs.

301. The authorization for the MIP is Article III of the BASA. The FAA and the TCCA have assessed each other’s standards and systems relating to the approval of repair stations/AMOs/AMEs and FAA-certificated airmen that perform maintenance and alterations or modifications on civil aeronautical products, and as a result, have established an understanding of such standards and systems.

302. The MIP may be amended by mutual consent of the FAA and the TCCA. Significant revision by either authority to its organization, regulations, procedures, or standards may affect the basis on which the MIP is executed. Accordingly, each authority agrees to promptly advise the other of plans for such changes, and to give an opportunity for comment. Upon notice of such changes by one authority, the other authority may request consultation to review the need for amendment to the MIP.

303. The legal standards for safety regulation by the TCCA are contained in Canadian Aviation Regulations (CAR) and are explained in ancillary documents and procedures. The legal standards for safety regulation by the FAA are contained in Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) and are explained in ancillary documents and procedures.

CHAPTER 4. U.S. REPAIR STATIONS

400. A person who applies for a repair station certificate must meet the requirements of 14 CFR part 145. These requirements include the manner of application, facility requirements, personnel requirements, quality control, and training requirements. Along with the certification requirements of part 145, applicants should use AC 145-9, Guide for Developing and Evaluating Repair Station and Quality Control Manuals, and AC 145-10, Repair Station Training Program.

401. To be able to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations on Canadian aeronautical products, repair stations must meet the applicable requirements contained in CAR 571 and 573. This may require revision to a repair station manual to incorporate a supplement to accommodate these requirements. The supplement may contain procedures unique to the Canadian aeronautical products, specific training requirements, and reporting

Page 4 Par 202

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

requirements. This supplement may need approval by both the FAA and TCCA. The special condition in part 3, chapters 1 and 3 of the MIP, specify these unique requirements.

CHAPTER 5. CANADIAN APPROVED MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATIONS

500. APPLICANTS.

a. An applicant for an AMO certificate or for an amendment of an AMO certificate makes an application in the form and manner specified in ch. 573 of the Airworthiness Manual. In addition, a person who holds an AMO certificate issued in accordance with CAR 573 cannot provide a service that is outside the scope of the person’s AMO certificate.

b. An applicant has to submit to the TCCA with an application, a copy of its maintenance policy manual (MPM) that is required by subsection 573.10(1). The TCCA then issues to a maintenance organization an AMO certificate authorizing the maintenance of specified aeronautical products or the provision of specified maintenance services.

501. RATINGS. The AMO certificate will specify any category in which ratings have been issued and lists the aeronautical products that the AMO is authorized to maintain or the maintenance services that the AMO is authorized to perform. The scope of the work that may be performed under each rating specified on the AMO certificate is determined by limitations that are set out in the certificate. Unless an expiration date is specified in an AMO certificate, the certificate remains in effect until it is surrendered, suspended, or canceled. A capabilities list or other list will identify by make, model, or other nomenclature designated by the article manufacturer the articles on which the AMO is authorized to perform maintenance. The list is located in the AMO’s manual or as a referenced stand-alone document. The AMO must have the proper equipment, personnel, housing/facilities, materials, and technical data to maintain each article on the list. The list is an extension of the AMO’s certificate and its use depends on the AMO establishing procedures for conducting self-audits of its facility and capabilities, which are approved and accepted by the TCCA.

502. FACILITIES. An AMO certificate holder must provide the facilities and equipment specified in chapter 573 of the Airworthiness Manual associated with the work to be performed. Except in cases provided for in an MPM, work will be performed in the AMO’s facilities. If unforeseen circumstances do not permit the work to be performed in those facilities and the safety of the aircraft is not affected, the work may be performed elsewhere. An AMO will use the standards equivalent to those of the manufacturer of an aeronautical product for the performance of work. Those standards are identified in the CARs.

503. CONTRACTING. An AMO must have the material and equipment necessary to perform the functions appropriate to its rating, but need not have the tools and equipment for functions it is authorized to contract out. An AMO may contract functions to TCCA certificated facilities and non-TCCA certificated sources as authorized and identified in its FAA Supplement to its manual. “Contracting” encompasses “subcontracting” as specified in TCCA requirements. TCCA will approve the list of functions to be contracted. Before contracting out a maintenance function, the AMO should:

a. Establish procedures to qualify the contractor.

Par 401 Page 5

AC 43-10B 10/3/06

b. Establish procedures to audit the contractor.

c. List the contractor in its FAA Supplement.

d. Provide technical training for receiving inspection personnel in contracted functions.

e. Establish inspection procedures that provide enough technical detail so an airworthiness determination can be made based on a technical review of contractor-source documentation.

504. CONTRACTING TO NON-TCCA CERTIFICATED SOURCES.

a. If an AMO contracts work to a non-TCCA certificated source or another AMO, the AMO must be appropriately rated to perform the work. The AMO is responsible for the following:

(1) Approving return to service items on which work has been performed.

(2) Ensuring each item’s airworthiness.

b. Any non-TCCA certificated source to which work is contracted must be under the control of the AMO’s quality monitoring system for the work performed. The AMO must inspect each item on which contracted work has been performed to ensure the airworthiness of the item. Receiving inspection procedures must enable the AMO to make an airworthiness determination of each item received. If the AMO cannot determine the quality of contracted work, the work can be contracted only to a TCCA certificated facility that is able to inspect the work performed for compliance with CAR 571.

505. CONTRACTING TO TCCA CERTIFICATED FACILITIES. If an AMO contracts functions to another organization that is TCCA certificated, that organization is responsible for approval for return to service of each item on which work has been performed. The AMO should be able to determine that the TCCA certificated organization to which work is contracted is properly certificated to perform the work. Through the AMO’s receiving inspection procedures, the AMO must properly process items received from a TCCA certificated facility.

506. AUDITS, TRAINING, AND RECORDS. The AMO should establish procedures to audit contractors and ensure that they comply with operators’ manuals, manufacturers’ manuals, and instructions for continued airworthiness (ICA). The AMO also must provide technical training for receiving inspection personnel who inspect contracted out functions. The organization also must establish a method of recording contracted work to ensure the records are retained for 2 years.

507. MAINTENANCE RELEASE. A maintenance release cannot be signed unless a person is authorized to sign in accordance with an MPM established by the holder of an AMO certificate issued under subsection 573.02. The AMO must have a rating for a category appropriate to the work performed. The person must have successfully completed a course of maintenance training that has been approved by the TCCA and that is applicable to the type of aircraft, engine, or system on which the maintenance is performed.

Page 6 Par 503

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

CHAPTER 6. U.S.-CERTIFICATED AIRMEN

600. The requirements for a mechanic certificate and ratings, and the privileges, limitations, and general operating rules for certificated mechanics, are prescribed in 14 CFR part 65. When performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations on Canadian aeronautical products, the airman must comply with the appropriate sections of CAR 571.

601. Maintenance performed on Canadian aeronautical products by FAA-certificated airmen must comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations or other TCCA-approved data. This applies to all maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations, with the exception of annual inspections. The airman who performed the work cannot approve major repairs or alterations for return to service. An airman with Inspection Authorization must make the return to service certification.

602. Part 65 prescribes recency of experience requirements for certificated airman. These requirements state that the airman must have performed or supervised the work within the last 24 months. The airman may have supervised in an executive capacity the performance of work on an aircraft. In lieu of these requirements, the airman must be found able to perform the work by the FAA.

CHAPTER 7. CANADIAN AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE ENGINEERS

700. To gain an AME license, a person must submit an application in form and manner specified in chapter 566 of the TCCA’s Airworthiness Manual. This also applies to any endorsement of an AME license with a rating. The CARs state that an AME cannot exercise the privileges of an AME license unless the person holds an AME license, exercises the privileges in accordance with the ratings and any limitations endorsed on the license, exercises the privileges in accordance with Part V of the CARs. Any person who does not meet the conditions specified may sign a maintenance release if the person holds a restricted certification authority issued in accordance with Part V of the CARs. An AME license is valid for the period specified in the license.

701. Recency of experience requirements in the CARs state that privileges cannot be exercised unless a person has had a license for the preceding 24 months. Also, the holder of the license must have, for at least 6 months within the preceding 24 months, performed or supervised aircraft maintenance, or supervised in an executive capacity the performance of aircraft maintenance. The AME may also have served as an aviation maintenance instructor or supervised another aviation maintenance instructor in an aircraft maintenance-training course provided by an AMO.

702. AMEs are authorized to return aircraft to service. The AME cannot permit anyone whom the AME supervises to sign a maintenance release, unless the standards of airworthiness applicable to the maintenance performed and stated in chapter 571 of the Airworthiness Manual have been complied with and the maintenance release meets the applicable requirements specified in section 571.10 of the Airworthiness Manual.

Par 600 Page 7

AC 43-10B 10/3/06

a. AMEs cannot sign a maintenance release for specialized maintenance unless the requirements of section 571.04 have been met. The exception to this is provided in its subsections 2 and 7; no person other than the holder of an aircraft maintenance engineer (AME) license issued under part IV, specifying a rating appropriate to the aeronautical product being maintained, can sign a maintenance release as required by section 571.10.

b. If a maintenance release is signed by a person with respect of work performed by another person, the person signing the maintenance release must personally observe the work to the extent necessary to ensure that it is performed in accordance with the requirements of any applicable standards of airworthiness and, specifically, the requirements of sections 571.02 and 571.10.

703. RESTRICTED CERTIFICATION AUTHORITY. A person who is not the holder of an AME license specifying a rating appropriate to the aeronautical product being maintained may sign a maintenance release if the person holds a restricted certification authority. The TCCA must issue a restricted certification authority and specify therein its validity period and the scope of the work that may be performed, if:

a. Application is made in accordance with section 571.11 of the Airworthiness Manual;

b. The applicant demonstrates to the TCCA that there is no holder of an AME license specifying a rating appropriate to the aeronautical product being maintained available within a geographical area accessible within 1 hour by surface transportation;

c. The person to whom the restricted certification authority is to be issued has received the training and has the knowledge equivalent to that of a holder of an AME license specifying a rating appropriate to the aeronautical product being maintained; and

d. The level of aviation safety is not affected by the issuance of the restricted certification authority.

Page 8 Par 702

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

PART 3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PART 3

100. Part 3 provides guidance on the special conditions that must be complied with when performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations on aeronautical products from the United States or Canada. These special conditions apply to Canadian AMOs and AMEs as well as U.S. repair stations and certificated airmen. These special conditions can be found in appendix 4 of this AC. Only FAA or TCCA-approved or acceptable parts or components as applicable are used to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations to U.S. or Canadian aeronautical products.

101. Both Canadian AMOs and AMEs along with U.S. repair stations and certificated airmen must comply with the special conditions specified in the MIP. Certain conditions are applicable to both maintenance entities.

CHAPTER 2. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR U.S AERONAUTICAL PRODUCTS

200. FAA special conditions are applicable to Canadian-based AMOs and AMEs. These special conditions are required to be complied with to meet the requirements of 14 CFR part 43. These special conditions are in addition to any requirements of CAR 571 and 573. An AMO that applies to work on an aeronautical product under the regulatory control of the FAA may perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations (with exception of annual inspections) on that product. In order to perform maintenance, the AMO must hold a valid AMO certificate issued by the TCCA in compliance with the most current CAR 571 and 573.

201. AMOs that perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations for 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air carriers in commercial operations must have these additional items that include procedures to ensure compliance with part 121 or 135 air carriers’ manuals. The AMO will have a TCCA-approved FAA Supplement to its MPM that will specify how maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations are to be performed on U.S. aeronautical products. This supplement will include procedures to show separation of quality control functions from other maintenance functions, including the separation of maintenance from inspection on those items identified as required inspection items as defined by the part 121 or 135 air carrier/customer, if performing maintenance for air carriers in accordance with the requirements of part 121, subpart L or part 135, subpart J.

202. To continue to hold an AMO authorization to maintain U.S.-certificated products, the FAA, or the TCCA on behalf of the FAA, may inspect it for continued compliance with CAR 571, 573 and the special conditions. Investigations and enforcement by the FAA may be undertaken in accordance with FAA rules and directives and the AMO must cooperate with any investigation or enforcement action.

203. To perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations on U.S. aeronautical products, Canadian AMEs must comply with the FAA special conditions. The AME must,

Par 100 Page 9

AC 43-10B 10/3/06

among other requirements, ensure only FAA-approved parts or components are used. In addition, the AME must use the current manufacturer’s recommendations or ICA. Other special conditions are contained in the MIP located in appendix 4.

CHAPTER 3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR CANADIAN AERONAUTICAL PRODUCTS

300. An FAA-approved repair station or FAA-certificated airman may perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations (with exception of annual inspections) on a civil aeronautical product under the regulatory control of the TCCA. The TCCA acceptance will not exceed the scope of the ratings and limitations contained in the 14 CFR part 145 certificate, and authorized functions will be listed on the repair station capabilities list. Procedures must be included in the repair station manual that meets the requirements of the special conditions in the MIP (see appendix 4). FAA-certificated airmen must comply with the current CARs when performing maintenance on Canadian aeronautical products.

301. A repair station that performs maintenance on Canadian air carriers operating in commercial air service under CAR IV or CAR VII must include in its manual a supplement that describes the procedures specified in the MIP, or explains where in the repair station manual those procedures are described, and is approved by the FAA.

302. A repair station or FAA-certificated airman may continue to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations on Canadian aeronautical products if inspection by the TCCA is allowed and the repair station cooperates with any investigation or enforcement action taken by the TCCA.

Page 10 Par 203

10/3/06 AC 43-10B

PART 4. ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION

100. The Air Carrier Maintenance Branch, AFS-330, developed this AC. For information concerning this AC, contact AFS-330 at 202-267-3546.

101. Submit direct comments regarding this AC to:

U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration Aircraft Maintenance Division, AFS-300 800 Independence Avenue, SW. Washington, DC 20591

Par 100 Page 11 (and 12)

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 1

APPENDIX 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. TITLE 14 CFR PARTS. You may view and print 14 CFR parts 43, 121, and 145 and Aircraft Certification Service and Flight Standards Service ACs on the FAA Web page located at http://www.airweb.faa.gov/rgl.

2. ADVISORY CIRCULARS. You may obtain copies of the current editions of these ACs from the United States Department of Transportation, Subsequent Distribution Center, SVC-121.23, Ardmore East Business Center, 3341 Q 75th Avenue, Landover, Maryland 20785.

(1) AC 00.2–15, Advisory Circular Checklist.

(2) AC 00–44, Status of Federal Aviation Regulations.

(3) AC 00–58, Voluntary Disclosure Reporting Program.

(4) AC 20–62, Eligibility, Quality, and Identification of Aeronautical Replacement Parts.

(5) AC 21–1, Production Certificates.

(6) AC 21–29, Detecting and Reporting Suspected Unapproved Parts.

(7) AC 120–16, Air Carrier Maintenance Programs.

(8) AC 140–7, FAA Certificated Repair Stations Directory.

(9) AC 145–9, Guide for Developing and Evaluating Repair Station and Quality Control Manuals.

3. FAA FORMS.

(1) FAA Form 337, Major Repair and Alteration.

(2) FAA Form 8130–3, Authorized Release Certificate, Airworthiness Approval Tag.

4. FAA ORDERS. You may purchase copies of the current versions of these documents from the Superintendent of Documents, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15250-7954.

(1) Order WA 0000.5, Washington Headquarters Directives Checklist.

(2) Order 8000.85, FAA Program for the Establishment of a MIP Under the Provisions of a BASA.

(3) Order 8110.53, Reciprocal Acceptance of Repair Design Data Approvals Between FAA and TCCA.

(4) Order 8120.2, Production Approval and Certificate Management Procedures.

(5) Order 8300.10, Airworthiness Inspector’s Handbook.

Page 1

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 1

5. CANADIAN PUBLICATIONS.

(1) Canadian Aviation Regulations 571 and 573.

(2) Canadian Aviation Regulations Part IV and VII.

(3) Transport Canada Maintenance Staff Instruction (MSI) 58.

(4) TCCA Authorized Release Certificate.

(5) TCCA Form 24–0078.

Page 2

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 2

APPENDIX 2. DEFINITIONS

a. ACA. Aircraft Certification Authority issued by an Approved Maintenance Organization (AMO) under Canadian Aviation Regulation (CAR) 573.

b. Alteration or Modification. Making a change to the construction, configuration, performance, environmental characteristics, or operating limitations of the affected civil aeronautical product.

c. CAR. Canadian Aviation Regulations.

d. CFR. Code of Federal Regulations. This AC references Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations, parts 1 through 199.

e. Civil Aeronautical Product. Any civil aircraft, aircraft engine, or propeller or subassembly, appliance, material, part, or component to be installed thereon.

f. Compliance with 14 CFR Part 43. Compliance with the latest issue of CAR 571 and the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) special conditions as set forth in the maintenance implementation procedures (MIP) and associated Transport Canada Civil Aviation (TCCA) guidance material, as applicable.

g. Compliance with 14 CFR Part 145. In the case of a Canadian organization, compliance with the latest issue of CAR 573 and the FAA special conditions as set forth in the MIP and associated TCCA guidance material as applicable when maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations are performed in Canada.

h. Compliance with CAR 571. Compliance with the latest issue of 14 CFR part 43 and the TCCA special conditions as set forth in the MIP recognizing that advisory circulars (AC) provide additional guidance in this area.

i. Compliance with CAR 573. In the case of a part 145 repair station, compliance with the latest issue of 14 CFR part 145 and the TCCA special conditions as set forth in the MIP when maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations are performed in the United States recognizing that ACs provide additional guidance in this area.

j. Data Approved by the FAA. Data that is approved by the Administrator or the Administrator’s designated representative in accordance with the BASA/IPS.

k. Data Approved by the TCCA. Data that is approved by the TCCA or by an organization approved by the TCCA for that purpose in accordance with the IPA.

l. FAA Acceptable Data. Data that is acceptable to the Administrator, such as service information recommended by a type certificate holder or industry standard data that supports eligibility of installation of standards parts (such as bolts and nuts) conforming to established industry or U.S. specifications.

Page 1

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 2

m. FAA-Certificated Airman. An individual issued a mechanic certificate or repairman certificate by the FAA under 14 CFR part 65.

n. Maintenance. The performance of inspection, overhaul, repair, preservation, and the replacement of parts, materials, appliances, or components of a civil aeronautical product to ensure the continued airworthiness of that product, excluding alterations or modifications.

o. MPM. Maintenance Policy Manual approved by TCCA for an AMO.

p. Preventive Maintenance. Simple or minor preservation, operations, and the replacement of small standards parts not involving complex assembly operations.

q. Required Inspection Items. The items of maintenance and alterations, which must be inspected by a person other than the one who performed the work, and includes at least those that could result in a failure, malfunction, or defect endangering the safe operation of the aircraft, if not performed properly or if improper parts or materials are used.

r. RCA. Restricted Certification Authority issued by TCCA under CAR 571.11.

s. SCA. Shop Certification Authority issued by an AMO under CAR 573.

t. Special Conditions. These are contained in chapter 3 of this MIP. FAA special conditions are those requirements in 14 CFR part 43, 121, and 145 that the FAA has determined are not contained in CAR 571 and 573. TCCA special conditions are those requirements in CAR 571 that the TCCA has determined are not contained in 14 CFR part 43 or 145.

u. United States. In a geographical sense, (1) the States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the possessions, including the territorial waters, and (2) the airspace of those areas.

Page 2

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3. ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

14 CFR Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations

AC advisory circular

AME Aircraft Maintenance Engineers

AMO Approved Maintenance Organization

BASA Bilateral Aviation Safety Agreement

CAR Canadian Aviation Regulations

FAA Federal Aviation Administration

MIP Maintenance Implementation Procedures

MPM maintenance policy manual

TCCA Transport Canada Civil Aviation

U.S. United States

Page 1 (and 2)

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

APPENDIX 4. IMPLEMENTATION PROCEDURES

MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION

PROCEDURES

Under the Agreement Between

the Government of the United States of America

and

the Government of Canada

for Promotion of Aviation Safety

Page 1 (and 2)

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

CONTENTS

Chapter 1—General .........................................................................................................................5

1.0. Purpose.....................................................................................................................................5

1.1. Authorization ...........................................................................................................................5

1.2. Entry into Force and Termination............................................................................................5

1.3. Amendments ............................................................................................................................5

1.4. National Requirements.............................................................................................................6

1.5. Accountability..........................................................................................................................6

1.6. Resolution of Disagreements ...................................................................................................7

1.7. Definitions................................................................................................................................7

Chapter 2—Reciprocal Acceptance of Findings of Compliance.....................................................9

2.0. General.....................................................................................................................................9

2.1. Eligibility Requirements ..........................................................................................................9

Chapter 3—Special Conditions........................................................................................................9

3.0. Special Conditions Applicable to any Person Required to Comply with this MIP .................9

3.1. TCCA Special Conditions Applicable to U.S..-Based Repair Stations and Mechanic Certificate Holders ........................................................................................................10

3.2. Repair Stations Performing Maintenance, Preventive Maintenance, and Alterations for CAR IV or CAR VII Commercial Operators ................................................................................11

3.3. To Hold a Repair Station Authorization to Maintain Commercially Operated Canadian Aircraft...........................................................................................................................................12

3.4. Effectivity ..............................................................................................................................12

3.5. FAA Special Conditions Applicable to Canadian-Based AMOs and AMEs ........................12

3.6. AMO Performing Maintenance, Preventive Maintenance, and Alterations for 14 CFR part 121 or 135 Air Carriers in Commercial Operations ...............................................................13

3.7. To Hold an AMO Authorization to Maintain U. S. Aeronautical Products ..........................14

3.8. Effectivity ..............................................................................................................................14

Page 3

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

Chapter 4—Mutual Cooperation and Technical Assistance..........................................................14

4.0. Periodic Meetings ..................................................................................................................14

4.1. Information ............................................................................................................................15

4.2. Technical Evaluation Assistance ...........................................................................................15

4.3. Exchange of Information .......................................................................................................15

4.4. Establishing and Amending Regulations, Policies, and Guidelines ......................................15

4.5. Urgent or Unusual Situations.................................................................................................15

4.6. Notification of Noncompliance and Safety Issues.................................................................15

4.7. Protection of Proprietary Data, Freedom of Information Act (FOIA), and Access to Information Act Requests..............................................................................................16

4.8. Accident/Incident Investigation Requests..............................................................................16

Chapter 5—Inspection and Continuing Validity Provisions .........................................................17

5.0. Inspection Provisions .............................................................................................................17

5.1. Continuing Validity ...............................................................................................................17

Chapter 6—Authority ....................................................................................................................18

Page 4

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL

1.0. PURPOSE.

a. This document sets forth the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and the Transport Canada, Civil Aviation Directorate (TCCA) procedures for implementing the maintenance and alteration or modification provisions of the Agreement for the Promotion of Aviation Safety between the Government of the United States (U.S.) and the Government of Canada signed June 12, 2000. The Agreement provides, in pertinent part, that the FAA and the TCCA will pursue mutual cooperation and technical assistance in evaluation and acceptance of each other’s systems, TCCA acceptance, and continued monitoring of maintenance and alteration or modification facilities.

b. The objective of these Maintenance Implementation Procedures (MIP), in accordance with the Agreement, is to outline the terms and conditions under which the FAA and the TCCA can accept each other’s inspections and evaluations of United States repair stations and Canadian Aircraft Maintenance Organizations (AMO) along with FAA certificated airmen and Canadian Aviation Maintenance Engineers (AME) for findings of compliance, thereby reducing redundant regulatory oversight, without adversely affecting aviation safety.

1.1. AUTHORIZATION. The authorization for this MIP is Article III of the Agreement for the Promotion of Aviation Safety, and in that respect, the FAA and the TCCA have assessed each other’s standards and systems relating to the approval of repair stations/AMOs/AMEs and FAA certificated airmen that perform maintenance and alterations or modifications on civil aeronautical products, and as a result, have established an understanding of such standards and systems.

1.2. ENTRY INTO FORCE AND TERMINATION. This MIP shall enter into force 60 days after the date of the last signature and shall remain in force until terminated. The MIP may be terminated upon 60 days’ written notice by either the FAA or the TCCA. Termination of this MIP will not affect the validity of activity conducted under its provisions prior to termination.

1.3. AMENDMENTS.

a. This MIP may be amended by mutual consent of the FAA and the TCCA. Appendices also may supplement them. The details of any such amendment or appendix shall be recorded and signed by the representatives identified in paragraph 1.5b, or their designees.

b. Suggestions for improvement are welcome and can be addressed to either of the offices described in paragraph 1.5.

c. The FAA and the TCCA recognize that significant revision by either authority to its organization, regulations, procedures, or standards may affect the basis on which this MIP is executed. Accordingly, each authority agrees to promptly advise the other authority of plans for such changes, and to give an opportunity for comment. Upon notice of such changes by one authority, the other authority may request consultation to review the need for amendment to this MIP.

Page 5

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

1.4. NATIONAL REQUIREMENTS.

a. The legal standards for safety regulation by the TCCA are contained in Canadian Aviation Regulations (CAR) and are explained in ancillary documents and procedures.

b. The legal standards for safety regulation by the FAA are contained in Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) and are explained in ancillary documents and procedures.

1.5. ACCOUNTABILITY.

a. The designated offices for the technical implementation of this MIP are:

(1) For the FAA: FAA, Flight Standards Service Aircraft Maintenance Division, AFS-300 800 Independence Avenue, SW. Washington, DC 20591 phone +1–202–267–3546 fax +1–202–267–5115

(2) For the TCCA: Aircraft Maintenance and Manufacturing (AARP) Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Ottawa, ON K1A 0N8 Canada phone 1–613–952–4371 fax +1–613–952–3298

b. The designated offices for the technical coordination of this MIP are:

(1) For the FAA: FAA, Flight Standards Service International Programs and Policy Division, AFS-50 800 Independence Avenue, SW. Washington, DC 20591 phone +1–202–385–8070 fax +1–202–493–5888

(2) For the TCCA: Aircraft Maintenance and Manufacturing (AARP) Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Ottawa, ON K1A 0N8 Canada phone +1–613–952–4371 fax +1–613–952–3298

c. The designated offices for the administrative coordination of this MIP are:

(1) For the FAA: FAA, Assistant Administrator for International Aviation, API-1 800 Independence Avenue, SW. Washington, DC 20591 phone +1–202–385–8900 fax +1–202–267–7198

Page 6

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

(2) For the TCCA: Aircraft Maintenance and Manufacturing (AARP) Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Ottawa, ON K1A 0N8 Canada phone +1–613–952–4371 fax +1–613–952–3298

1.6. RESOLUTION OF DISAGREEMENTS. As stated in Article IV of the Agreement for the Promotion of Aviation Safety, any disagreement over the interpretation or application of this MIP shall be resolved by consultation between the FAA and the TCCA. If appropriate, resolution of such disagreements will be recorded as an amendment or appendix to this MIP, in accordance with paragraph 1.3.

1.7. DEFINITIONS. For the purposes of this MIP (and notwithstanding definitions contained in 14 CFR or the CARs), the following definitions apply:

a. ACA—Aircraft Certification Authority issued by an AMO under CAR 573.

b. Alteration or Modification—Making a change to the construction, configuration, performance, environmental characteristics, or operating limitations of the affected civil aeronautical product.

c. CAR—Canadian Aviation Regulations.

d. CFR—Code of Federal Regulations, specifically in Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations, parts 1 through 199.

e. Civil Aeronautical Product—Any civil aircraft, aircraft engine, or propeller or subassembly, appliance, material, part, or component to be installed thereon.

f. Compliance with 14 CFR Part 43—Compliance with the latest issue of CAR 571 and the FAA special conditions as set forth in this MIP and associated TCCA guidance material, as applicable.

g. Compliance with 14 CFR Part 145—In the case of a Canadian organization, compliance with the latest issue of CAR 573 and the FAA special conditions as set forth in this MIP and associated TCCA guidance material as applicable when maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations are performed in Canada.

h. Compliance with CAR 571—Compliance with the latest issue of 14 CFR part 43 and the TCCA special conditions as set forth in this MIP, recognizing that advisory circulars (AC) provide additional guidance in this area.

i. Compliance with CAR 573—In the case of a part 145 repair station, compliance with the latest issue of 14 CFR part 145 and the TCCA special conditions as set forth in this MIP when maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations are performed in the United States, recognizing that ACs provide additional guidance in this area.

Page 7

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

j. Data Approved by the FAA—Data that is approved by the Administrator or the Administrator’s designated representative.

k. Data Approved by the TCCA—Data that is approved by the TCCA or by a person or organization delegated or approved by the TCCA for that purpose.

l. FAA Acceptable—Data that is acceptable to the Administrator, such as service information recommended by a type certificate (TC) holder, or industry standard data that supports eligibility of installation of standard parts (such as bolts and nuts) conforming to established industry or U.S. specifications.

m. FAA-Certificated Airman—An individual issued a mechanic certificate or repairman certificate by the FAA, under 14 CFR part 65.

n. Maintenance—The performance of inspection, overhaul, repair, preservation, and the replacement of parts, materials, appliances, or components of a civil aeronautical product to ensure the continued airworthiness of that product, excluding alterations or modifications.

o. MPM—Maintenance Policy Manual approved by TCCA for an AMO.

p. Preventive Maintenance—Simple or minor preservation, operations, and the replacement of small standard parts not involving complex assembly operations.

q. RCA—Restricted Certification Authority issued by TCCA under CAR 571.11.

r. Required Inspection Items—The items of maintenance and alterations that must be inspected by a person other than the one who performed the work. These items include at least those that could result in a failure, malfunction, or defect endangering the safe operation of the aircraft, if not performed properly or if improper parts or materials are used.

s. SCA—Shop Certification Authority issued by an AMO under CAR 573.

t. Special Conditions—See chapter 3 of this MIP. FAA special conditions are those requirements in 14 CFR parts 43, 121, and 145 that the FAA has determined are not contained in CARs 571 and 573. TCCA special conditions are those requirements in CARs 571 and 573 that the TCCA has determined are not contained in 14 CFR part 43 or 145.

u. United States—In a geographical sense, (1) the States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the possessions, including the territorial waters, and (2) the airspace of those areas.

Page 8

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

CHAPTER 2. RECIPROCAL ACCEPTANCE OF FINDINGS OF COMPLIANCE

2.0. GENERAL.

a. The FAA and the TCCA agree, subject to the terms of this MIP to accept each other’s inspections and monitoring for findings of compliance with their respective requirements as the basis for the acceptance of eligible repair stations/AMOs/AMEs and FAA-certificated airmen.

b. Maintenance and alterations performed on a civil aeronautical product under the regulatory control of the TCCA may be accomplished and that product returned to service by an FAA-certificated repair station or FAA-certificated airman that is properly trained, qualified, and authorized to perform that work when the product is located in the United States.

c. Maintenance and alterations or modifications performed on a civil aeronautical product under the regulatory control of the FAA may be accomplished and that product returned to service by a TCCA AMO or AME that has been certificated by the TCCA and is properly trained, qualified, and authorized to perform the work when the product is located in Canada.

2.1. ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.

a. The FAA agrees that an AMO or AME that has been approved or rated for maintenance and alteration or modification work by the TCCA in accordance with CARs 571 and 573, and complies with the special conditions set forth in chapter 3, paragraph 3.1, will be eligible to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alteration work on aeronautical products under the regulatory authority of the FAA.

b. The TCCA agrees that a repair station or FAA-certificated airman that is authorized and qualified to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alteration work by the FAA, and complies with the special conditions set forth in chapter 3, paragraph 3.0, will be eligible to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alteration work on aeronautical products under the regulatory authority of the TCCA.

CHAPTER 3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS

3.0. SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ANY PERSON REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITH THIS MIP.

a. Only FAA or TCCA-approved or acceptable parts or components as applicable are used to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations to United States or Canadian aeronautical products.

b. Maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations must be performed in accordance with current ICA or manufacturers’ recommendations that will return the aeronautical product to its original or properly altered condition.

c. Maintenance or alterations must be certified by an approval for return to service or a maintenance release that meets the requirements of 14 CFR part 43, sections 43.9 and 43.11 or

Page 9

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

CAR 571.10, as applicable, for aircraft and the use of the FAA Form 8130–3 or TCCA Authorized Release Certificate for aircraft components, and any other information required by the owner or operator, as appropriate. For the purposes of compliance with this MIP, the requirements of 14 CFR part 43, sections 43.9, 43.11, and CAR 571.10 are considered equivalent.

d. Where maintenance or alterations are performed by a maintenance organization, the maintenance organization must hold a valid FAA repair station certificate or Canadian AMO certificate issued in accordance with the most current 14 CFR part 145 issued as a final rule, or applicable CAR.

e. Major repairs and alterations on U.S. aeronautical products must be recorded on FAA Form 337 and a copy provided to the owner/operator of the aircraft and a copy sent to the FAA by mail or electronic means within 48 hours of the aircraft’s return to service.

f. Major repairs or alterations performed on a Canadian aeronautical product must be recorded on FAA Form 337 or in accordance with Standard 571, appendix L, and sent to the TCCA within 48 hours by mail or electronic means.

g. Maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations performed on an aeronautical product under the control of a 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air carrier must be performed in accordance with that air carrier’s manual.

h. Any serious defects or unairworthy conditions on civil aeronautical products must be reported to the FAA or TCCA, as applicable.

i. AMOs should submit reports to the FAA under the FAA Suspected Unapproved Parts (SUP) program detailed in Advisory Circular (AC) 21-29, Detecting and Reporting Suspected Unapproved Parts, in respect of any such parts found on a U.S. aeronautical product, in accordance with AC 21-29. SUP information should be reported on FAA Form 8120-11, Suspected Unapproved Parts Notification.

j. FAA-approved repair stations should submit reports of any suspected unapproved parts found on Canadian aeronautical products to the air operator concerned, for reporting to Transport Canada in accordance with the operator’s approved procedures.

3.1. TCCA SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO U.S.-BASED REPAIR STATIONS AND MECHANIC CERTIFICATE HOLDERS.

a. The TCCA agrees that an FAA-certificated repair station or mechanic certificate holder may perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations (with the exception of annual inspections) on a civil aeronautical product under the regulatory control of the TCCA and approve that product for return to service if the repair station or mechanic certificate holder complies with the following special conditions.

b. All repairs and alterations as defined by TCCA requirements must be accomplished in accordance with data approved by or acceptable to the TCCA.

Page 10

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

c. In the case of work performed by a repair station, the work will not exceed the scope of the ratings and limitations contained in the 14 CFR part 145 certificate and authorized functions listed on the repair station Capabilities List or operations specifications.

d. In the case of a major repair or alteration performed by a mechanic certificate holder, the mechanic may perform the work. However, a mechanic certificate holder with inspection authorization must approve the product for return to service.

e. In the case of maintenance or alterations performed on aircraft operated in commercial air service pursuant to Part IV or Part VII of the CARs, a repair station that meets the additional requirements specified in paragraphs 3.2 and 3.3 shall perform the work.

3.2. REPAIR STATIONS PERFORMING MAINTENANCE, PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, AND ALTERATIONS FOR CAR IV OR CAR VII COMMERCIAL OPERATORS.

3.2.1. In addition to the other requirements specified in this MIP, a repair station performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations on aircraft operating in commercial air service under CAR IV or CAR VII shall have:

a. Procedures to ensure compliance with the air operator’s work order or contract, including notified TCCA airworthiness directives and other notified mandatory instructions contained in TCCA-approved air carriers’ manuals;

b. Procedures to ensure that all current airworthiness directives published by the TCCA that are applicable to the work being performed are available to maintenance personnel;

c. Procedures to ensure that major repairs and major alterations as defined in CAR I are accomplished in accordance with data approved by the TCCA;

d. Procedures to ensure that major repairs and major alterations are reported to TCCA using FAA Form 337 or an equivalent method acceptable to TCCA;

e. Procedures for the reporting to the TCCA any serious defects or unairworthy conditions on civil aeronautical products;

f. Procedures to ensure compliance with the manufacturer’s maintenance manuals or ICA, and handling deviations; and

g. A training program that ensures each employee assigned to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations is capable of performing the assigned task, and that each person who approves an aircraft for return to service following maintenance or alteration has been trained on the aircraft type. Records of such training must be retained for a minimum of 2 years.

3.2.2. In addition to the other requirements specified in this MIP, a repair station performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations on aircraft operating in commercial air service under CAR IV or CAR VII must include in its manual a supplement describing the

Page 11

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

procedures specified in par. 3.2.1, or explains where in the repair station manual those procedures are described, and which are approved by the FAA.

3.3. TO HOLD A REPAIR STATION AUTHORIZATION TO MAINTAIN COMMERCIALLY OPERATED CANADIAN AIRCRAFT.

a. The repair station must continue to comply with 14 CFR part 145 and these special conditions.

b. The repair station must allow the TCCA, or the FAA on behalf of the TCCA, to inspect it for continued compliance with 14 CFR part 145 and these special conditions and to make its manual and the supplement required by these special conditions available for inspection.

c. Investigations and enforcement by the TCCA may be undertaken in accordance with TCCA rules and directives.

d. The repair station must cooperate with any investigation or enforcement action.

3.4. EFFECTIVITY.

a. For maintenance agreements entered into after the effective date of this MIP, a repair station must comply with all the requirements of this MIP.

b. For maintenance agreements entered into prior to the effective date of this MIP, a repair station must be in compliance with these special conditions 6 months after the effective date of this MIP.

3.5. FAA SPECIAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO CANADIAN-BASED AMOS AND AMES.

3.5.1. The FAA agrees that a TCCA AMO or AME may perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, and alterations (with exception of annual inspections) on an aeronautical product under the regulatory control of the FAA and approve that product for return to service if the AMO or AME complies with all of the following special conditions.

a. The AMO or AME must hold a valid AMO certificate or AME license issued by the TCCA in compliance with the most current CARs, and be rated for the maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations to be performed.

b. The AMO employee or AME responsible for supervision or final inspection and return to service of a civil aeronautical product must be able to read, write, and understand English.

c. All repairs and alterations as defined by FAA requirements must be accomplished in accordance with data approved by or acceptable to the FAA.

d. In the case of work performed by an AMO, the work will not exceed the scope of the ratings and limitations contained in the CAR 573 certificate and the MPM.

e. In the case of work performed and certified by an AME, the work will not exceed the AME’s privileges specified in CAR 571.

Page 12

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

f. In the case of a major repair or alteration, the AME who approves the product for return to service shall not have been involved in the performance of the work.

g. In the case of maintenance or alterations performed on aircraft operated under 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air carriers in commercial operations, the work shall be performed by an AMO that meets the additional requirements specified in paragraphs 3.6 and 3.7.

3.6. AMOs PERFORMING MAINTENANCE, PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, AND ALTERATIONS FOR 14 CFR PART 121 OR 135 AIR CARRIERS IN COMMERCIAL OPERATIONS.

3.6.1. In addition to the other requirements specified in this MIP, an AMO performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations for 14 CFR part 121 or 135 operators shall have:

a. Procedures to ensure compliance with 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air carriers’ manuals.

b. Procedures to show separation of quality control functions from other maintenance functions, including the separation of maintenance from inspection on those items identified as required inspection items as defined by the 14 CFR part 121, or 135 air carrier/customer, in accordance with the requirements of 14 CFR part 121, subpart L, or 135, subpart J. (Transport Canada Maintenance Staff Instruction (MSI) 58 specifies that the AMO must assign specified Aircraft Certification Authority (ACA) holders, who were not involved in the work, to perform an independent inspection on required inspection items, and sign a separate release).

c. Procedures to ensure compliance with the air operator’s work order or contract, including FAA airworthiness directives mandatory requirements contained in 14 CFR part 121 or 135 air carriers’ manuals;

d. Procedures for approval for release or approval for return to service for aircraft, and use of FAA Form 8130-3 or TCCA Authorized Release Certificate for components and all information required to be made or kept by the owner or operator, as appropriate. Such required information must be in English.

e. Procedures to ensure that all current airworthiness directives published by the FAA that are applicable to the work being performed are available to maintenance personnel.

f. Procedures to ensure that only FAA-approved or acceptable parts or components are used in the performance of preventive maintenance, or alterations to U.S. aeronautical products.

g. Procedures to ensure that major repairs and major alterations as defined in 14 CFR part 43, appendix A, are accomplished in accordance with data approved by the FAA. This includes a repair or alteration that changes the operating limitations and/or flight data; the revised limitations/data must be set forth in the aircraft flight manual. The major repair or alterations must be recorded on FAA Form 337 or the air carrier equivalent form.

h. Procedures for reporting to the FAA any serious defects or unairworthy conditions on civil aeronautical products.

Page 13

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

i. Procedures to ensure that all current airworthiness directives published by the FAA that are applicable to the work being performed are available to maintenance personnel.

j. Procedures to ensure compliance with the manufacturer’s maintenance manuals or ICA, and handling deviations.

k. A training program that ensures each employee assigned to perform maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations is capable of performing the assigned task. Records of such training must be retained for a minimum of 2 years.

3.6.2. In addition to the other requirements specified in this MIP, an AMO performing maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations on aircraft operating in commercial air service under 14 CFR part 121 or 135 must include in its manual a supplement that describes the procedures specified in par. 3.6.1, or explains where in the MPM those procedures are described, and which is approved by the TCCA.

3.7. TO HOLD AN AMO AUTHORIZATION TO MAINTAIN U.S. AERONAUTICAL PRODUCTS.

a. The AMO must continue to comply with CAR 571, 573, and these special conditions.

b. The AMO shall allow the FAA, or the TCCA on behalf of the FAA, to inspect it for continued compliance with CAR 571, 573 and these special conditions and to make its AMO certificate, MPM, and the supplement required by these special conditions available for inspection.

c. Investigations and enforcement by the FAA may be undertaken in accordance with FAA rules and directives.

d. The AMO must cooperate with any investigation or enforcement action.

3.8. EFFECTIVITY.

a. For maintenance agreements entered into after the effective date of this MIP, an AMO must comply with all the requirements of this MIP.

b. For maintenance agreements entered into before the effective date of this MIP, an AMO must be in compliance with these special conditions 6 months after the effective date of this MIP.

CHAPTER 4. MUTUAL COOPERATION AND TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

4.0. PERIODIC MEETINGS. The FAA and TCCA offices designated in Chapter 1, paragraph 1.5a shall meet regularly, but at least once per year, to discuss the technical implementation of the MIP. Discussions may address the resolution of technical issues, continued improvements to the process, ongoing projects, changes in their organizations, any revisions to their requirements (as notified in accordance with Chapter 1, paragraph 1.3c), technical assistance requests, and any other matters relating to the MIP. The frequency of these

Page 14

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

meetings will depend on the resources available to each authority, as well as the significance of any outstanding issues.

4.1. INFORMATION. The FAA and the TCCA shall provide information and assistance regarding the maintenance and alterations or modifications to be performed under the terms of these implementation procedures, and shall develop appropriate publications and circulate these publications through their respective methods. The FAA and TCCA shall:

a. Inform the public of the terms of the MIP and any amendments or appendices.

b. Outline the regulatory requirements and special requirements necessary for persons to perform work under the terms of the MIP.

4.2. TECHNICAL EVALUATION ASSISTANCE. The FAA and the TCCA agree to provide technical evaluation assistance to each other, upon request, to further the purposes and objectives of the MIP. Such areas of assistance may include, but are not limited to:

a. Performing surveillance and providing reports regarding continued compliance with the requirements described in this MIP by AMOs and AMEs in Canada and repair stations in the United States.

b. Conducting and reporting on investigations at the request of the other authority.

c. Obtaining and providing data for reports when requested.

4.3. EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION. The FAA and the TCCA shall provide each other with regulations, policies, guidance, practices, and interpretations relevant to the MIP, and shall ensure that such documents are updated in a timely manner. In addition, any FAA or TCCA proposal to amend such documents shall be provided to the other authority for the opportunity to review prior to the amendment being effected, consistent with its national laws and administrative procedures.

4.4. ESTABLISHING AND AMENDING REGULATIONS, POLICIES, AND GUIDELINES. To the extent permitted by its national laws and administrative procedures, each authority agrees to provide technical assistance to the other in efforts to establish and amend regulations, policies, guidance, practices, and interpretations relevant to this MIP.

4.5. URGENT OR UNUSUAL SITUATIONS. When urgent or unusual situations develop that are within the scope of the MIP, but not specifically addressed, the FAA and the TCCA will review and consult and take appropriate action, including developing amendments or appendices to the MIP, if appropriate, as set forth in Chapter 1, paragraph 1.3.

4.6. NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE AND SAFETY ISSUES.

a. The FAA and the TCCA agree to notify each other promptly of any investigation into noncompliance by a repair station or AMO under the regulatory control of the other authority that could result in revocation, suspension, or penalty. The notification shall be sent to the other authority’s representative identified in Chapter 1, paragraph 1.5a. The FAA and the TCCA agree that noncompliance will be corrected in a timely manner.

Page 15

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

b. The FAA and the TCCA retain the right to take enforcement action but, in some cases, an authority may choose to consider a remedial action taken by the other authority. The enforcement consultation process under this MIP will be subject to a regular joint review by the FAA and the TCCA.

4.7. PROTECTION OF PROPRIETARY DATA, FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT (FOIA), AND ACCESS TO INFORMATION ACT REQUESTS.

a. Proprietary Data. Both authorities recognize that certain data submitted by a repair station/AMO/AME may be the property of that facility or another person and release of that data by the FAA or the TCCA is restricted. The FAA and the TCCA agree that they will not copy, release, or show proprietary data obtained from the other authority to anyone outside of the FAA or the TCCA without written consent of the owner of the proprietary data.

b. FOIA Requests. The FAA often receives requests from the public under the FOIA to release information that the FAA may have in its possession. Any information that the FAA has in its possession must be disclosed under the FOIA unless it falls within certain exceptions, including trade secrets, or financial or commercial data that would be considered confidential or privileged. When the FAA receives such a request for the release of information related to an AMO in Canada and covered by the MIP, the FAA will advise the TCCA of any information received from the TCCA and submitted to the FAA that might be released. The FAA also may request the TCCA’s assistance, in cooperation with the AMO, in determining if the information submitter would object to release and which portions of the information received from the submitter or generated by the TCCA might be withheld under the FOIA exceptions, if any.

c. Access to Information and Privacy Program (ATIP) Requests. The TCCA often receives requests from the public through the ATIP to release information in its possession. Any information that the TCCA has in its possession must be disclosed under the Access to Information Act unless it falls within certain exceptions, including information covered by the Privacy Act, trade secrets, or financial or commercial data that would be considered confidential or privileged. When the TCCA receives such a request for the release of information related to a repair station located in the United States and covered by the MIP, the TCCA will advise the FAA of any information received from the FAA and submitted to the TCCA that might be released. The TCCA also may request the FAA’s assistance, in cooperation with the repair station, in determining if the information submitter would object to release and which portions of the information received from the submitter or generated by the FAA might be withheld under the ATIP exceptions, if any.

4.8. ACCIDENT/INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REQUESTS. When the FAA or the TCCA needs information regarding repair stations/AMOs/AMEs for the investigation of accidents or incidents involving civil aeronautical products, the request for information should be directed to the office identified in Chapter 1, paragraph 1.5a. In turn, upon receipt of the request for information, the other authority will provide the requested information in a timely manner.

Page 16

10/3/06 AC 43-10B Appendix 4

CHAPTER 5. INSPECTION AND CONTINUING VALIDITY PROVISIONS

5.0. INSPECTION PROVISIONS. The FAA and the TCCA agree to the conduct of inspection, monitoring, and surveillance of repair station, FAA certificated mechanics/AMO/AME certificates currently under their regulatory control in accordance with this MIP.

5.1. CONTINUING VALIDITY. The FAA and the TCCA acknowledge that:

a. Unrestricted Access. With notice, each authority may conduct independent inspections of repair stations, FAA certificated mechanics, AMOs, and AMEs, and review the other authority’s surveillance records and other pertinent information. This applies to maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations performed on aeronautical products by repair stations, FAA-certificated mechanics, AMOs, and AMEs, consistent with the objective of this MIP and the authority’s applicable laws and regulations.

b. Cooperation in Enforcement. The maximum permissible mutual cooperation and assistance in any investigation or enforcement proceedings of any alleged or suspected violations of any regulations or special conditions identified in the MIP is essential. The FAA and the TCCA acknowledge that repair stations, FAA- certificated mechanics, AMOs, and AMEs remain subject to the regulatory requirements and enforcement procedures described in Chapter 3, paragraphs 3.0.2b and 3.1.2b of this MIP.

c. Continued Confidence Program. The FAA and TCCA shall conduct periodic joint evaluations of each other’s continued compliance with the terms of the MIP. Such evaluations may include repair stations/FAA-certificated mechanics/AMOs/AMEs to ensure the responsible authority is adequately applying the MIP.

Page 17

AC 43-10B 10/3/06 Appendix 4

CHAPTER 6. AUTHORITY

The FAA and the TCCA agree to the provisions of these Maintenance Implementation Procedures as indicated by the signature of their duly authorized representatives.

DONE at [INSERT APPLICABLE COUNTRY], this …. day of …. .

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION, UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

By

Nicolas Sabatini Associate Administrator for Regulation and Certification

FOR…. Transport Canada Civil Aviation

By

Don Sherritt Director, Aircraft Maintenance & Manufacturing

Page 18